以下是小编帮大家整理的掌握英语学习丛书人教版高中三册全套教案(人教版高二英语教案教学设计)，本文共17篇，欢迎大家分享。
篇1：掌握英语学习丛书人教版高中三册全套教案(人教版高二英语教案教学设计)
Unit One
Good Friends
Part I
Language Focus
A: Word Study
A1: Topic words
When we describe people or some other things, we use some adjectives from time to time. As you know, different adjectives have different meanings and functions. It’s very clear that we need to use different words to describe people/things we like or dislike.
The following adjectives can be used to describe people. Put the words into the table as the sample. You can add more adjectives you have learned.
active; angry; bad; beautiful; boring; brave; careful; careless; cheap; clever; cold; confident; dangerous; excellent; famous; friendly; funny; grateful; great; handsome; happy; healthy; helpful; honest; interesting; kind; kind-hearted; lazy; lovely; loyal; nervous; nice; pleasant; proud; quiet; rich; serious; smart; strange; strong; terrible; terrific; unusual; useful; weak; wise; wonderful; worst
Words used to describe people in
a positive sense Words with neutral meaning Words used to describe people in
a negative sense
honest, kind, quiet cheap, dangerous
A2: Exercise
1. Look at the following pictures, and fill in the blanks with the suitable words.
This is a picture of a ________ __________ with ___________ hair. Her hair is __________. She’s ________ eyes. Her nose is not ________. Her mouth is _______ and __________. She looks _________ and __________.
1
There is a _______ man in the picture. He wears a _________ shirt with a ________ tie. He is very _________ and has ___________ shoulders. His hair is ___________. His eyes are not very __________ and he is ________sighted so he wears a pair of __________.
2
Look at this picture. What is the _________ man doing now? He is dancing and he
3
feels___________. He is __________ and _________. His eyes are not very _________. He is wearing a ________ _________on his head. From his _________ and __________, we guess that he is from China.
This _______ girl is one of my ________ friends. Her name is Monica. She is very ___________. Her hair is __________ because it is ___________. Her face is ____________ with two ________ eyes, a ________ nose and her mouth looks like a ___________ cherry. She is so ________and _______ that all of us like to make ____________ with her.
4
This _______ man is very ________ in the world. His name is Samaranch. He is considered as a _______ and _________ man. His hair is _________ and his ________ _________ are very _________ and his nose is very _______ and _____. He has a ________ face with a _________ mouth. And of course his _______ are very big too.
5
Self-taught
1. What words do we use more often, nouns or adjectives? Can you give your partner some examples?
2. Sometimes we use “to pull a long face” to describe a person who is not pleased with somebody or something. Do you know what it means? Please look it up in your dictionary if you don’t know.
B: Grammar
B1: Useful phrases
1. be fond of : having a liking for
1) If you are fond of someone, you like him.
2) I am very fond of Michael John for he sings well.
3) Have you ever seen anyone so fond of dancing?
2. to be into: (esp. in spoken/oral English) to be/become/get interested in; to show one’s interest in
1) People are into getting healthy now.
2) Mr. Blair is very deep (just sort of) into Shakespeare.
3) Little Tom says that he’s into electronics himself.
3. hunt for: to search; to look for…carefully
1) Some new arrivals lose hope even before they start hunting for a job.
2) Those young men are hunting for a house to rent at the moment.
3) Why are you so interested in hunting for that position in the company?
4. in order to: so that it is possible to
1) If you do something in order to achieve a particular thing, you do it because you want to achieve that thing.
2) She worked all summer in order to save enough money for a holiday.
3) In order for our relationship to continue, we need to talk about our problems.
5. treat somebody/something as: to deal with or regard in a certain manner
1) The naughty girl treats that mistake as a joke.
2) Police say they’re treating it as a case of attempted murder….
3) He was treated as a child when he first worked as a porter at a hotel.
6. care about/for: to have a regard or consideration for
1) He cares more about/for his hobby than his job.
2) The emperor cared more about/for his new clothes than anything else.
3) John is not well educated and does not care about/for the feelings of others
7. drop somebody a line: to send or post
1) Miss Alice dropped me a line from time to time when she stayed in Africa.
2) Please drop me a line as soon as you arrive in Sydney.
3) Her son has never dropped her a line since he joined the army ten years ago.
Exercises:
Complete the following sentences with the phrases mentioned above which match with the meaning of each sentence.
1. Mr. Wallace, one of my Canadian friends, said he would _________ us ______ __________ as soon as he arrived in Toronto.
2. Though my aunt Lucy is more than 45 years old, she __________ ______________ her clothes than anything else.
3. That lonely lady has no kids around, so she ________ her three pets _________ her own children.
4. Any weight-lifter should eat nothing ______ _______ _______ lose his weight before lifting weight in a competition.
5. Those industrial spies are always _________ ___________ the information of the new project carried on by our company.
6. Though the girl living next door has something wrong with her ears, she _____ still ______ ____
music.
7. Debbie is the tallest in his class, but she ______ never ________ basketball.
B2: Useful grammatical structures and practice
1. I don’t enjoy singing, nor do I like computer.
We should put the form of –ing behind the word “enjoy” instead of the indefinite form of a verb.
For example:
I enjoy skiing / dancing /reading / traveling.
2. The sentence or clause led by “neither” or “nor” should be used in an inverted word order and “nor” is more formal. Look at the following examples:
1) -Paula doesn’t like skating.
-Neither / Nor does Lily.
2) -Jim isn’t coming to my party this evening.
-Neither / Nor is Kane.
3) -Alice can’t speak Russian.
-Neither can George.
4) My brother can’t drive a car, nor can I.
5) The food in that restaurant wasn’t delicious, and nor was the dessert.
3. I’m not into classical music.
The structure of “be + into” means “show one’s interest in…” and it is often used in informal English.
He’s given up photography now and he’s into modern music.
Exercises
Put the following sentences into another structure without changing the meaning of each sentence.
1. Though Lily is poor at her singing, she is fond of classical and pop music. (enjoy)
2. She is very interested in ballet and has bought a lot of magazines of ballet published abroad. (enjoy)(so…that)
3. She likes watching series on TV very much even though she is at table.(enjoy)
4. The girls in my class didn’t go to the Pearl River Tour last Sunday. I didn’t go either. (neither...nor)
5. His father never swims in the river in summer. Little Jimmy doesn’t either. (neither…nor)
6. If you don’t want to take a bus there, I won’t either. (neither…nor)
7. That old man showed no interest in golf though he was very rich. (be into)
8. Most women are always caring for fashionable clothes. (be into)
9. She got interested in working on problems of chemistry when she was a student of Grade 9. (be into)
Self-taught:
Look up in your dictionary to find the answers.
1. What kind of words or phrases should we use after “be fond of” or “enjoy”?
2. What is the difference between “be interested in” and “be into”?
3. How do you like the structure of “Rock music is OK, and so is skiing.” and the one “Rock music isn’t OK, and nor is skiing.”? Can you express the same ideas in a different way?
B3: Key grammatical items
Direct Speech and Indirect Speech
1. We should pay more attention to the changes of persons and tenses when a sentence of direct speech is changed into an indirect one.
2. Some verbs should be changed when a direct speech is changed into an indirect one.
For example:
1) “Sorry, I can’t go to your party tonight,” said John.
John said that he was sorry but he couldn’t come to my party this evening.
2) “They had gone away when I arrived at the station,” Tom told Mary.
Tom told Mary that they had gone away when he arrived at the station.
Questions for thinking about:
1. Should everything be changed when we change a direct speech into an indirect one?
2. What changes should we make if we change an indirect speech into a direct speech?
Practice
1. Turn the following sentences into direct speech or indirect speech.
Example:
“I’m going to come to your ball tonigh,” Sally told Virginia.
Sally told Virginia that she was going to go to her ball that night.
1. “I’d love to go with you, but I promised to meet Mr. Evens this weekend,” said Mr. Green.
2. “It’s very kind for you to invite me, but I’m not sure if I’m free then,” replied Diana.
3. “I wish I could come, but I have an appointment this evening,” said Jimmy.
4. “I’m sorry, but I don’t think I can,” said the guard.
5. “I want to show you what I’ve done with the place. You haven’t seen it since we moved in,” said Mrs. Wallace.
6. “I’m interested in the job you advertised in yesterday’s newspaper. Is it still available?” a young man asked the manager.
2. Please turn the following dialogue into two passages in the tones of Rose and Tom. Put the direct speech into indirect speech.
Rose: Hello. May I speak to Tom?
Tom: This is Tom speaking.
Rose: What’re you doing tonight?
Tom: Nothing. Why?
Rose: I thought I’d drop by for a drink or two. We haven’t seen each other these days.
Tom: OK. That’s a good idea. What time?
Rose: How about nine?
Tom: That’s a bit late. Why don’t you make it a little earlier?
Rose: All right. How about seven?
Tom: That suits me. Have dinner with us.
Rose: Good. See you at seven.
1) Tom: Rose called and asked if she might speak to me on the line….
2) Rose: Tom answered the phone when I called him. He said he had nothing to do that night and asked me why….
Part II
Integrating skills
A: Listening comprehension
Task One
Listen to the following 3 dialogues very carefully and write down some words describing the persons according to what you have heard on the tape.
Dialogue 1
The girl is a_____________ from _____________. She has ___________ and ____________.
Dialogue 2
Miss Nice is ___________ and ______________ and is fond of _____________. She looks ________________ than she is. She is ____________ than the first speaker in the dialogue.
Dialogue 3
Lily Young is ____________.Her hair is ____________. She is _________ under the tree. She is from __________________.
Task Two
Listen to Passage 1 and Passage 2 and then fill in the table.
Character Description
Mr. Dick Height: Hair: Face: Chin:
Eyes:
My new roommate
Feature:
His clothing:
Task Three
Situational descriptions for talking
1. Say something about one of your close friends in your own words.
2. Talk about one of your classmates with your partner with about five sentences.
3. Choose some of the following pictures and describe them to your partner(s).
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
Activities
1. Work in pairs, first write down something describing your partners on the paper and then make a list of their likes and dislikes, looks and characters.
2. Work in groups, first say something about pets and other animals considered as our friends, and then write a brief description about them by taking some notes.
B: Reading & writing
Task One: Cloze
Read the following passages carefully and fill in the blanks with the words which should match with the meaning of the following passages.
Passage 1
With the help of English Pictorial I have made rapid progress in my English study. I like it so much that I read __1__ (each/all) column of the magazine and have learnt a lot from it. It serves as a __2__ (bridge/way) that leads me into a colorful world of English.
Whatever I was praised for the rapid progress in my English study, I thanked English Pictorial __3__ (from/for) the bottom of my heart. It has also helped me __4__ (improve/progress) my writing. I have looked on English Pictorial __5__ ( as/like) my close friend.
I’ll never forget the __6__ (practice/help) from English Pictorial.
Passage 2
Our English teacher, Miss Albright is the best teacher I have known so far. She has not only treated her students __1__ her younger brothers and sisters, but also does well in her teaching.
She is twenty-six, but she does not look her __2__. She is attractive and delicate. She plays and __3__ with us after class. She is our __4__ as well as our teacher.
She is never tired of helping us in our work, and of course, she is good __5__ her method of teaching because she knows how to help her students to __6__ the best result in the limited time.
Task Two: Read and do
1. Read the following passage carefully and do the following exercises.
No one ever gets bored in the hardware store. There are too many things to look at. But if ever you want to buy something there you must be very careful and write it down beforehand, on a piece of paper, and never, never lose it. Otherwise, the same thing that happened to Mr. Fingle might happen to you.
Everyone knows Mr. Fingle. He is always there. No one pays any attention to him. No one ever asks him what he wants. They know it isn’t of any use. Poor Mr. Fingle!
No matter what time of day you happen to go to the hardware store, there wandering about somewhere among the bins and the barrels and the paint pots and the stoves, you will come upon Mr. Fingle.
If you hear something rustling at your elbow, or see a shadow moving in the dusk of the store, no need to turn around. It is only Mr. Fingle. There he is, a little white mouse of a man, creeping softly about, picking things up, laying them down again, peering here and there in his gentle short-sighted way, and every little while just standing still for a moment, with his finger in his mouth, thinking.
He thinks and he thinks, but all his thinking won’t help him. He can’t remember what he wanted to buy.
Years and years ago Mr. Fingle used to live in the little white house up the road, past the shoe store. He had a front porch and a wife and a lawn mower, just like everybody else, and every morning if it was summer time, you would see him out mowing his front lawn, or if it was winter you would hear him tinkering away somewhere inside the house. For Mr. Fingle had one great passion in life.
He loved to fix things.
What I have talked about above is the story of my friend, Mr. Fingle.
1) Look up the underlined words in the passage in your dictionary and write down the explanations of them on the paper.
hardware
barrel
rustle
creep
mower
tinker
2) Describe Mr. Fingle in your own words with about three sentences.
Mr. Fingle is …____________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
3) Read the passage again and answer the following questions.
(1) What did Mr. Fingle have years ago?
(2)What kind of person do you think Mr. Fingle is?
(3)What does Mr. Fingle prefer to do in his life?
(4) Where did Mr. Finge live years ago?
(5) How do people in the town like Mr. Fingle?
4) Please give some information about Mr. Fingle according to the passage.
(1) What he looks like;
(2) Where he likes to go;
(3) What he does every day in the store;
(4) Where he lived years ago;
(5) What he had of his own years ago;
(6) What he did years ago.
Task Three: Read and write
1. Do you know the following words used in e-mails from time to time? If you know, please give its proper form beside each.
thx
i c
bi bi to u
hubby
keypal
2. Please write an e-mail back to Carolina after you read her e-mail below.
Date: July 28, 07:01 PM
Name: Carolina
Age: 15
Sex: Female
Address: I'll give my home address to people who send me e-mails, BRAZIL
Email: perhaps7@cal.com.br
Education: high school
Occupation: student
Languages: English, Portuguese
Hobbies: reading, writing, music
Hello, pals,
I'm looking for long letter snail mail penpals. Please don't waste your time e-mailing me if you're not into that! I like reading, writing, talking, thinking, languages, philosophy, politics, history, life, being alive, literature, daylight, photographs, laughing, long letters, rock music, Brazil, penpaling. I hate prejudice, fights, animosity. I want female long letter writer new penpals from anywhere but near my age (16-20, or something like that ). E-mail me and I can give you my postal address, or if you can't write first, we'll solve it someway . I'm a very open minded person and love talking. I want pals who are interested in friendship, true friendship, sharing thoughts, experiences, knowledge and everything. Write to me. I'm not looking for romance, I have no money to send, sorry. I'm looking for true long term friendship with any student all over the world.
Yours,
Carolina
Unit Two
English around the World
Part I
Language focus
A: Word study
A1: Topic words
If you have a talk with an American and an English at the same time, you, of course, will be puzzled at some words they use. And you will find that they refer to the same thing with different words.
From the following examples you can see some of the differences.
American English British English
can (noun) tin
candy sweets
cane stick
canned-goods tinned-goods
car (railroad) carriage, van or waggon
chief-clerk head-clerk
Besides different words they prefer to use, they also have different spelling on some words. For example, “colour” is often used by British people while “color” is Americans’ favor.
Tips
The following words are examples to show you the different spellings of British English and American English. Read them carefully and pay attention to their differences, and you can add more to the lsit.
British English American English
1. centre center
2. favour favor
3. favourite favorite
4. metre meter
5. neighbour neighbor
… …
A2: Exercise
Please use another word in the British way instead of the italicized one used in the American way in each of the following sentences.
1. And my office is on the first floor of the World Trade Building on the Fifth Avenue.
__________________________________________________________________
2. My aunt works as a saleswoman at a drug-store near my school.
__________________________________________________________________
3. July 4th, the U.S. National Day, is a legal-holiday for all the Americans.
__________________________________________________________________
4. We’ve got a letter-box in front of my house and I can see the letter-carrier place letters and parcels into it from time to time.
_____________________________________________________________________________
__________________________
5. Why do you always make your mum mad, David?
________________________________________
6. Mr. Thomason has been sick for many days and he is now staying in hospital.
______________________________________________________________
A3: Tips for word study
Read the following very carefully, you will know something more about American English and British English. After that, place the italicized words into the table below. The first pair has been given to you.
1. In the United States a pressman is a man who runs a printing press; in England he is a newspaper reporter, or, as the English usually says, a journalist.
2. Square, in England, always means a small park. A backyard is a garden. A subway is always a tube, or the underground. But an underground passage for pedestrians is a subway. English streets have no sidewalks; they always call them pavements or foot-paths or simply paths. An automobile is always a motor-car or motor.
3. In the United States a lawyer tries a case and the judge hears it; in England the judge tries it. In the United States the court hands down a decision; in England the court hands it out.
4. Soccer is a form of football that is still relatively little known in the United States. What we call simply football is Rugby or Rugger to the Englishman.
5. In England quite means “completely, wholly, entirely, altogether, to the utmost extent, nothing short of, in the fullest sense, positively, absolutely”; in America it is conditional, and means only “nearly, approximately, substantially”, as in “He sings quite well.”
American English British English
Pressman: a man who runs a printing press Pressman: a newspaper reporter, journalist
Self-taught
1. What is the difference of the word “vest” between American English and British English? If you want know it clearly, please look it up in your dictionary.
2. If a young lady says she doesn’t want to wash the dishes, can you guess where she is from and which English she is speaking?
B: Grammar
B1: Useful phrases
1. make oneself at home: feel at home; be at ease
1) If you say to a guest make yourself at home, you are making him feel welcome and inviting him to behave in an informal, relaxed way.
2) Please make yourself at home.
3) It’s very kind of your mother to make us feel at home whenever we pay a visit to her at weekends.
2. in total: the whole, esp. regarded as the complete sum of a number of parts
1) I lived in Beijing for eight years in total when I was young.
2) They had got a force containing in total over half a million men and 11,000 tanks.
3) His house is 120 square meters in total.
3. mother tongue: native language; the language first learned by a child
1) That overseas student says his mother tongue is Spanish.
2) Mary was born in Canada and her mother tongue is French.
3) Though Alice was born in Canada, her mother tongue is Russian.
4. be equal to: having the necessary or adequate strength, ability, means, etc.
1) If someone is equal to a particular job or situation, he has the necessary ability, strength, or courage to deal successfully with it.
2) The number of the students in your class is equal to the number in their class.
3) She was determined that she would be equal to any test the corporation put to her.
5. except for: other than; apart from
1) Everyone passed the exam except for Rory.
2) We had a pleasant time, except for the weather.
3) I know nothing about him except for the fact that he lives next door.
6. stay up: remain out of bed
1) If you stay up, you remain out of bed at a time when most people have gone to bed or at a time when you are normally in bed yourself.
2) I used to stay up late with my mom and watch movies.
3) Please stay up until I come back.
7. come about: to take place; happen
1) When you say how or when something came about, you say how or when it happened.
2) Any possible solution to the Irish question can only come about through dialogue…
3) How did the idea for an arts festival come about?
8. end up (with): to finish (in a particular place or way)
1) If someone or something ends up somewhere, they eventually arrive there, usually by accident.
2) The painting ended up at the State Gallery.
3) You might end up getting something you don’t want….
4) He could have ended up a millionaire if he had been lucky enough.
9. bring in: to introduce; to produce as profits or earnings
1) The government brought in a controversial law under which it could take any land it wanted.
2) I have three part-time jobs, which bring in about 6,000 a year.
3) The firm decided to bring in a new management team.
10. a great many: a lot of; lots of; many
1) You will have a great many to look at here and enjoy yourself in the mall.
2) She has got a great many stamps since 1987.
Exercises:
Complete the following sentences with the phrases learned above and each of them should match the meaning of the sentence.
1. The young actor stepped into the producer’s office and was too nervous to say anything. The producer told him _______________________________.
2. The personal manager has a lot of work to do so he has to ____________ very late in the night.
3. Last autumn Miss Asia attended the Berlin Film Festival and she made __________________ friends there.
4. The writer ______________ her book in a surprising way and it made its readers think a lot after reading it.
5. Mr. Jellyfish was so confident and he never cared when and where anything ____________ before him.
6. Over four hundred years ago, tobacco ___________________ Europe and the Europeans began to smoke since.
7. His elder sister likes everything in the house __________________ the colour of the curtains in the living room.
8. Women were looked down upon in many countries at that time. They could never hope to be __________________ men.
9. In the banana-eating competition a competitor from Malaysia ate up 55 bananas __________.
10. We have got a student from Chili in our class. However, to our surprise, he said that Chinese is ___________________________.
B2: Useful grammatical structures
1. make yourself at home
The structure of “make yourself at home” means “be at one’s ease” or “just act as if you’re in your own house”. Besides this structure, we can also use some others like “be/feel at one’s ease” or “just be at home” and “set somebody feel at ease” to express the same thing in everyday English.
For example:
My hostess always made me feel at my ease when I stayed in Canada years ago.
Make yourselves at home and help yourselves to some fruits and soft drinks.
I was at my ease when I had a talk with that old gentleman though he was a big shot at that time.
2. …except for those in Hong Kong, where many people speak English as a first language or a second language.
Difference between “except” and “except for”.
1) The word “except” often shows / introduces somebody or something that isn’t included in the same group or filed. We often use “but not” instead of it. For example:
① Everyone except me got an invitation in my office.
= Everyone got an invitation in my office but I didn’t.
② She is afraid of nothing at all except a spider.
= She is afraid of nothing at all but she is afraid of a spider.
③ I understand everything except why she killed her boss.
= I understand everything but I don’t understand why she killed her boss.
2) The phrase “except for” often shows/ introduces the only thing or person that prevents a statement from being completely true/OK. For example:
① The car you have bought is very nice except for the colour of the handles of the doors.
② The classroom was silent, except for the busy scratching of pens on paper..
③ They have agreed on the project except for some tiny problems in some items.
3) But in modern English, the phrase “except for” is often used as the word “except”. For example:
① We go to school every day except Sunday. We go to school every day except for Sunday.
② He can play all ball games except water polo. He can play all ball games except for water polo.
4) The prepositional phrase can only be used with the word “except” but not the phrase “except for”. For example:
① Those people would like to sleep in the open air, except in the winter.
② I would like to live in any place, except in tombs.
Self-taught:
Questions for thinking about:
1. What is the difference between “except” and “besides”?
2. What is the difference between “except” and “but”?
C: Key grammatical items & practice
1. With so many people communicating in English every day, it will become more and more important to have a good knowledge of English.
The participial phrase “…communicating in English every day” here is used as part of an adverbial.
1) Usually the logic subject of the participle should be the subject of the sentence. For example:
(1) Seeing his father coming towards him, the little boy ran away as quickly as he could.
(The boy saw his father coming towards him,…)
(2) Having tears in her eyes, the young girl left her aunt’s house without a word.
(The girl had tears in her eyes,…)
2) But in some sentences, a participial phrase can also have its own absolute subject, which is often placed before the participial phrase. This is called an absolute structure. Such structure is mostly used in written English. For example:
(1) It being too late, the old man had to say goodbye to the young couple.
(As it was very late, the old man had to say good bye to the young people..)
(2) Our guide disappearing in distance, all of us stood at the door with tears in our eyes.
(When our guide disappeared in distance, all of us stood at the door with tears in our eyes.)
3) Sometimes we use “with” before the participial phrases.
(1) With her dog leading the way in public, the young lady went across the streets very fast.
(2) The young pianist felt so nervous on the stage with so many eyes fixing on her.
2. “Can you repeat the address, please?” asked Harry.
Harry asked Mrs. Smith if she could repeat the address.
When we put a question (a request) into an indirect speech, we should change the word order of a question into that of a statement though tenses and personals should be changed according to the rules.
3. “Don’t forget to buy me some ketchup on your way back,” Mrs. Smith says to Harry.
Mrs. Smith told Harry not to forget to buy her some ketchup on his way back.
When we put an imperative (a command) into an indirect speech, we should use an indefinite phrase as the structure of indirect speech. If the imperative is a negative one, you should put not before the indefinite structure.
Exercise:
Task One:
Choose the right word to complete the sentences.
1. With three dogs __________(ran; running) behind him，that old man walked along the narrow, dirty and dim street.
2. The plane ___________(arriving; arrive) late，Mr. and Mrs. Greenwood had to put off their party.
3. With so many people ___________(looking at; looked at) her in the public，the young girl didn’t feel nervous at all and played the piano excellently.
4. It still ___________(was; being) early，we can go to an inn nearby to have a drink.
5. __________(Knowing; Knew) the answer to the problem，little Edison raised his hand.
Task Two:
Put the following requests and commands into indirect speech sentences.
1. “Would you mind my closing the door?” the secretary asked Kobe.
______________________________________________________________________
2. “Come here on time next time, Jimmy,” said the school master.
______________________________________________________________________
3. “Could you tell me how to get to the World Trade Building, sir?” asked Mrs. Wood.
_______________________________________________________________________
4. “Don’t spit in public, young man,” said the old man.
_______________________________________________________________________
5. “Never tell a lie in your life, my dear son,” said Mrs. Diana.
_______________________________________________________________________
Task Three
Put the following sentences into English, using except or except for.
1. 你的作文除了几个单词拼写错误之外，写得不错。
2. 飞机上除了一些丢弃的报纸之外，空空如也。
3. 除了黎明不会说法语之外，这儿的其他人都会说。
4. 所有的房间我都找遍了，就是你的卧室没去看。
5. 在北方，蛇每天都出来找食物吃，只有在冬天不出来。
6. 要不是窗户太小的话，这幢房子是非常漂亮的。
7. 谁我都愿意合作，但绝不与布什小姐合作。
8. 中国所有方言他都会说，惟有广州话不会。
Part II
Integrating skills
Task One
A: Listening comprehension
Listen to the following 3 dialogues or short passages carefully and finish the exercises:
In the following passages you can hear some usages of the words which are quite different from what we have learned before. Try your best to write down the exact words while listening to the tape.
Passage 1
In America, a girl preparing for the table is called __________, and if she does some other work in addition, she is called as __________________ or __________, but in England she is called as a girl for ________________ _________________ or ___________ instead.
Passage 2
A person who is called a boarder(搭伙者) in England, is called a __________ in America instead. And once the grave of the tin is empted, the British do not call it a dust-bin but an ________. And a person who carries a dust-bin away is called the ________________ in America but he is called the garbage-man or the ________________ or the __________________ in the UK.
Passage 3
In the UK, when a man is back home, he doesn’t step in upon the ______ floor, but upon the ______ floor. What he refers to as the ________ floor is called the __________ floor in America. In the United States, if a person wants to read a newspaper, people often say he ________ a paper, however, the British prefer to use “ _________ ________ a paper.” The British like to say, “Are there any _____________ for me?” instead of “Is there any __________ for me?”. And they prefer to use ________ man to _________-carrier. Besides, the British would rather have his letter ____________ at a _____________than have it _____________ at a ________________________.
Activities
1. Work in pairs. First you need to write down some different words used in American English and British English. After that, exchange yours with your partner’s and work together to make a more complete list.
2. After school, you can surf the internet and search the following internet services (www.english2american.com; www.effingpot.com and www.krysstal.com/ukandusa.html) for the differences between American English and British English in the IT reading room in your own school or at home. After that you can exchange yours with your classmates’.
Task Two
B: Reading & Writing
B1: Match Column A with Column B, and learn something more about the differences between American English and British English.
Column A Column B
UK word / US word definition
1. full stop / period A. unit of paper currency
2. note / bill B. payment in a restaurant
3. bank holiday / legal holiday C. the business part of a city
4. tick / check D. day when offices are closed
5. trousers / pants E. what men wear over their legs
6. handbag / purse F. the dot at the end of a sentence
7. purse / pocketbook G. large bag carried by females for money
8. pavement / sidewalk H. container carried by females for money
9. bill / check I. the area next to a street where pedestrians walk
10. town centre / downtown J. mark made when something is correct or selected
B2: Cloze
Read the following passages carefully and fill in the blanks with the words which should match with the meaning of the following passages. The following phrasal verbs (with meanings in paraphrases) are used, some are used more than once:
come into: inherit; get on with: have a good relationship with; cut down: reduce;
give up: stop; be up to: to be doing;
drop in on: visit;
look after: take care of; hold on: to wait on the telephone; get over: recover from;
set off: to leave; come up with: to have an idea; take on: to employ;
tell off (to critisize); take up: to begin a new activity look for: to search for;
make out: to see in the distance, to pretend;
Uncle Fester
Last year, Jack Peterson found out that he had come into a small fortune after Uncle Fester had passed on. His uncle had been a heavy smoker for many years and hadn't been able to __1__ on his smoking. Jack __2__ Uncle Fester, and often __3__ on him to see what he__4__. One summer, Uncle Fester promised __5__ on his cigarette smoking after having taken 3 months __6__an extremely bad cough. Jack __7__ him in those 3 months and, a number of times, he __8__Uncle Fester. Then he __9__a brilliant idea to make Uncle Fester __10__his nasty habit. He had the local cancer society telephone Uncle Fester. When they called, he told them to __11__and then put Uncle Fester through. They proceeded to __12__that they were looking for a volunteer to __13__to help __14__the patients. Well, that frightened Uncle Fester and he immediately swore to __15__smoking. In fact, Uncle Fester __16__ jogging in order to help him feel better. He even began to __17__other smokers (although he couldn't quite give smoking up himself). One day, as he __18__on his morning run, he __19__a stand in the distance. A new society had turned up that day __20__ people willing to __21__young puppies. Uncle Fester immediately __22__a cute Dalmatian, and ended up in __23__this new responsibility. Now, three years later Jack __24__the “small fortune” which reminded him every day of his wonderful, if not wise, Uncle Fester.
Task Three
C: Reading comprehension
The desire to use language as a sign of national identity is a very natural one, and as a result language has played a large part in national movements. People have often felt the need to use their own language to show that they are different from the others. This was true when the United States split off from Britain. At that time some patriots even suggested that the Americans should adopt Hebrew or Greek! In the end, as everyone knows, the two countries adopted the practical solution of carrying on with the same language they had used before. For 200 years Britain and the United States have shown the world that political independence and national identity can be complete without losing all the mutual advantages of a common language.
In other words, language is not necessarily the private property of those who use it, just as French is not the private property of French people, nor English of English people. English is spoken as a first language in the United States, in Australia, in New Zealand, in most of Canada, in certain nations of Africa, and in other areas of the world. It is unreasonable to regard any language as the procession of a particular nation, and with no language is it more unreasonable than with English. This is not to say that English is used by a greater number of speakers than any other language, for it is easily outnumbered in this respect by Chinese. But it is the most international of languages. A Dane and a Dutch person meeting in Rome will almost automatically find themselves speaking to each other in English. The pilots of a Russian plane approaching Cairo will use English to ask for landing instructions. Malaysian lecturers use English when addressing their Malaysian students in Kuala Lumpur. To people in Africa, Asia, and South America, English is an important foreign language to master, not merely because it is the language of Britain or the United States, but because it provides ready access to world scholarship and world trade. It is understood more widely than any other language.
It’s true, then, that a great many people-and a great many peoples-are involved in the use of English. Millions of men and women in the four continents have English as their language, and millions in every part of the world use it as their second or foreign language. This gives us some idea of the importance of English, and it shows both the United States and Britain that the language is not the possession of these two nations alone. It is also the property of the Canadian and the Indian, the Australian and the Nigerian. It belongs to all those who use it.
1. Look up the following words in your dictionary and write down the explanations beside each of them.
desire
patriot
adopt
identity
mutual
possession
automatically
merely
access
2. Some countries are mentioned in the following passage. Before you read the passage, try to get some information about those countries and write a briefing after the model.
Model:
The United States: One of largest countries in the world, located in the North America with the neighbor Canada at the north, Mexico at the south, and its first language is English.
The United Kingdom:
Australia:
New Zealand:
Canada:
Malaysia:
Russia:
Nigeria:
India:
3. Read the passage again and answer the following questions.
1) What nationalities does the author mention that cannot be identified with a single language? Why can’t they?
2) What two countries have used the same language but enjoyed political independence for over 200 years?
3) What nations are named in which English is spoken as a first language?
4) What language has a greater number of speakers than English?
5) What is the difference, then, in the way English and Chinese are used around the world?
6) People around the world learn English “not merely because it is the language of Britain or the United States.” What is the more important reason for learning English, according to the author?
7) According to the author, to whom does English belong?
4. Supplying missing words
In the following short passage approximately every eight word has been deleted. Reread the first paragraph. Then, without looking back at it, supply the missing words or other words that express the same meaning. Work as quickly as you can. After you finish, refer to the reading to check your answers.
The desire to use language as a _______ of national identity is a very _________ one, and as a result language has _________ a large part in national movements. People ______ often felt the need to use their ______ language to show that they are different _______the others. This was true when the United States _______ off from Britain. At that time some _______ even suggested that the Americans should adopt ________ or Greek! In the end, as everyone _______, the two countries adopted the practical solution _______ carrying on with the same language they ______ used before. For 200 years Britain and the United States have ________ the world that political __________ and national identity can be complete without ________ all the mutual advantages of a common _____________.
Activities:
1. Work in groups, discussing the following questions and try your best to express yourselves in English.
1) How many language are spoken in your community?
2) What difficulties may result from having more than one official national language? What are the advantages?
2. You have been learning English for over five years now. Try to say something about your own experience of learning English.
1) How do you expect to use English in your life?
2) Has English been useful to you already?
3) Are there other international languages that you think you would find useful too?
Task Four
D: Writing
Write a composition with no more than 200 words about your own experience of learning English as well as your own ideas about language learning.
Unit Three
Going Places
Part I
Language focus
A: Word study
Topic words
Everybody likes traveling around home and abroad if he has got enough money or a lot of time. It’s no doubt that some people prefer to travel by air, some would like to travel by rail, some by water, some by land, of course, some would rather hike. On the other hand, some people pay no attention to their proper behaviors during their journey or trips. Besides adventure traveling and eco-traveling, many people like some other traveling or tours. Look up the following phrases in your own dictionary or say something about them in your own words.
Adventure tour /traveling
Cultural tour / traveling
Eco-tour / traveling
Family adventure tour / traveling
Mountain tour / traveling
Wildlife tour / traveling
Exercise:
Read the following brochures very carefully and get some main ideas about them and have a talk with your partners after that.
Family Adventures Worldwide 2003-
Explore Worldwide operates small-group tours in over 100 countries - often in the remotest(faraway) corners of the earth - and is widely recognised as the leading specialist in Adventure travel. There are hundreds of brochures offering family holidays in popular resorts. But what about the many families who have a thirst for Adventure and who want to discover the world as it really is? Well, at Explore we believe we offer just that. Using all the trusted machinery of our 'grown-up' brochure (and the personal experience of those of us with children who appreciate more than just a beach!).
Exodus Destinations 2003
European Destinations have been selected to give a real insight into the landscapes and culture of particular corners of Europe, This simple concept of comfortable accommodation, chosen for character, hospitality and/or position, mixed with the opportunity to explore the attractions of a particular area has proved increasingly popular. There is a wide variety of destination, activity and style of holiday. Small group holidays have a maximum of sixteen plus their own leader; self-led 'go as you please' and fly-drive trips for more independent travel are available to individuals, couples, families and private groups of just about any size.
Africa -Safaris, Overlanding and Discovery 2003/2004
Throughout the brochure we hope you will find the African experience you are looking for - be it an 8-day Kenyan safari visiting some of the most renowned game parks in the world, or a 10 week West African Adventure travelling from Morocco to the coastline of Ghana. With a wide choice of overland Adventures, camping or lodge safaris, cultural journeys and family trips, we cater for everyone. Travelling in a small group with mixed nationalities and backgrounds make having a great time hard to avoid.
Walking & Rambling in Europe's Best Kept Secrets
Great walks and rambles with family run accommodation and local cuisine. With small groups and knowledgeable tour leaders, these tours combine stunning walks with a relaxed atmosphere for the perfect holiday. After a good walk, sit down to wonderful food and a glass of wine before retiring to your comfortable bed. Nothing beats it!
This brochure brings you the real Europe; a different Europe, rich in landscape and heritage, but away from the crowds. Wherever we go it has always been our policy to spend locally. We use guesthouses, inns and other local establishments and try to avoid international hotels and cuisine. Strolling in the hills of Andalucia or hiking in the Alps, we want you to enjoy traditional hospitality and comfort. Our leaders are there with an enthusiasm to share for the places we take you. Come and enjoy some of Europe's best kept secrets the Guerba way!
West Africa
A once in a lifetime experience! Discover new cultures, experience incredible Adventures. Don't just travel, absorb a different world! Come with us and live West Africa, 16 weeks with a small diverse group of experience seekers. With mountain bikes, all terrain boards and kayaks on a fully prepared expedition vehicle, allowing us to explore, discover and interact with everything around us. Camp under the stars, drink tea with desert nomads, leave with more than just stamps in your passport!
Self-taught
1. What’s the difference between “holiday” and “vacation”?
2. What is the difference between “travel” and “tour” and “trip”? If you don’t know, please look them up in your dictionary?
3. What can’t you do during your traveling or tour? Please make a list of things you can do below.
4. What kind of traveling do you prefer to take besides the tours mentioned in the text?
B: Grammar
B1: Useful phrases
1. get away (from): to escape, esp. from the scene, or from being caught
1) The robbers had got away with several bags of money from that bank before the police arrived.
2) We want to get away from the politics of outdated dogmatism.
3) If you get away from it all, you have a holiday in a place that is very different from the place where you normally live and work.
2. watch out: (esp. in giving or reporting orders) to take care
1) Watch out! -- There’s a car coming.
2) If you tell somebody to watch out, you are warning them to be careful, because something unpleasant might happen to them or they might get into difficulties.
3. protect sb. / sth. from / against: to keep safe (from harm, loss etc.), esp. by guarding or covering; to prevent something (something) from being dangerous by separating, covering, etc.
1) He raised his arm to protect his face from the blow.
2) What can women do to protect themselves from heart disease?
3) You should take an umbrella with you and it can protect you from the rain.
4. see sb off: to go to the airport, station, etc., with (someone who is beginning a trip)
1) When you see someone off, you go with them to the station, airport, or port that they are leaving from, and say goodbye to them there.
2) She said that she would see her friend off at the bus station the next morning.
3) Ben had planned a steak dinner for himself after seeing Jackie off on her plane.
5. on the other hand: (used to compare different things or ideas) as one point in the argument / as an opposite point
1) You use on the other hand to introduce the second of two contrasting points, facts, or ways of looking at something.
2) I know this job of mine isn’t much, but on the other hand I don’t feel tied down.
3) On the one hand, if the body doesn’t have enough cholesterol, we would not be able to survive. On the other hand, if the body has too much cholesterol, the excess begins to line the arteries.
6. as well as: in addition to (being)
1) He came as well as his brother.
2) He was kind as well as sensible.
3) It is in his best interests as well as yours.
Tips:
1. on the other hand
a) Besides using on the other hand in the sentence, you also can on the other hand in an earlier sentence to introduce the first part of the contrast.
b) As we know, on the other hand has the same meaning as but or however, furthermore, it can be used with on the one hand either together in a sentence or separately.
2. as well & as well as
a) You use as well when you mention something which happens in the same way as something else already mentioned, or which should be considered at the same time as something else already mentioned.
b) You use as well as when you want to mention another item connected with the subject you are discussing.
Exercises:
Complete the following sentences with the phrases learned above and each of them should match the meaning of the sentence.
1. The dancer on the stage dances smoothly _________________ attractively.
2. It rained dogs and cats last night, ____________ it does little help to the area here in the desert.
3. That naughty boy ______________ as quickly as he could when he saw his father coming towards him at the corner of the street.
4. All of us should do our best to __________ those precious birds here ______ ________ killed.
5. I was about to put my head out of the bus the time the conductor shouted to me, “______ ______!”
6. “Sorry, I won’t be at the meeting tomorrow morning because I have to _____ Mr. Nice ______ at the harbor,” said Miss Wendy.
C. Key grammatical structures & practice
1. Many of today’s travelers are looking for an unusual experience and adventure travel is becoming more and more popular.
Sometimes we can use the present continuous tense to express the durational aspect of the event for some single events, which in any case involves a limited time-span. Read the following examples.
1) She is looking forward to her son’s arrival next week.
2) ---Supper is ready, Susan.
---I ’m coming, Mum. And I have a last word to write.
3) Mr. Wood is going on his business trip to Japan in a week.
Besides, the present continuous tense also can express the actions of the present, putting emphasis on the limited duration of the state of affairs. Read some more examples as the following.
1) If you are looking for more excitement, you may want to try whitewater rafting.
2) They are living in a rented house.
3) More and more tourists from other countries are coming to China these years.
2. Miss Albright is going with me to Tibet.
From the sentence above we can learn that the present continuous tense is often used for plans in the near future. This is a common expression in spoken English. Read the coming sentences below.
1) How is she getting there by herself?
2) I wonder how long you are staying in Toronto next time.
3) Michael is taking dancing lessons this winter.
Self-taught
Questions for thinking about some special use of the present continuous tense
1. What does the present continuous tense express when the word “always” or “all the time” is used the sentence?
2. What’s the difference between the following two sentences?
She is dancing on the square when we are out to work in the morning.
She is always dancing on the square when we are out to work in the morning.
3. What other use does the present continuous tense have in English? If you know, please tell your partner or your classmates.
Exercise
Task One
Complete the following sentences with the phrases including off.
1) Mr. Blare _____________________(离开) the football team for months.
2) His father said that he decided to _____________(戒) smoking.
3) Everybody should ______________(脱掉)his hats before he steps into the concert hall.
4) The little boy was so thirsty that he _____________ (饮尽) a glass of water at one draft.
5) They didn’t _____________ (下车)until the bus stopped completely.
6) The girl ______________(掰下) a piece of bread stealthily before her mother saw her.
7) A few minutes later, that group of soldiers _____________(转到) into a path to the forest.
8) Sorry, I’m late today because I had to ________ my nephew____ (送行)at the port this morning.
9) Sales in this shop ________________(下降) during the time of SARS.
10) Look out! It’s dangerous here and you’d better ______________(切勿靠近) this building.
Task Two
Fill in the blanks with the correct words.
trip, travel, tour, journey, hike, sightseeing, vacation, holiday, transportation, means, way
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1) If you _________, you go for a long walk in the country.
2) A __________ is a period of time during which you relax and enjoy yourself away from home.
3) A ____________ is a day when people do not go to work or school because of a religious or national festival.
4) Business managers are focused on increasing their personal wealth by any available _________.
5) If you do some ________________, you ____________ around some visiting the interesting places that tourists usually visit.
6) A ____________ is an organized ___________ that people such as musicians, politicians, or theatre companies go on to several different places, stopping to meet people or performance.
7) When people are ____________ on a tour, you can say that they are on __________.
8) There is an express service from Paris which completes the _______ to Berlin in under 8 hours.
9) ______________ refers to any type of vehicle that you can _________ in or carry goods in.
10) You’d better ______________ to Helsinki by air tomorrow.
11) On Thursday all of my students went out on a day __________ with me.
12) She would say she was going my _________ and offer me a lift.
Task Three
Put the following sentences into English.
1) 这几天我一直在看这本小说。
2)近来你的工作进展如何？
3) 有几位老人坐在湖边的椅子上,注视着湖面享受着冬天的阳光。
4) 我妹妹一会儿要去健身俱乐部。
5) 你干吗总是找你妈妈要钱呢？
6) 弗雷德先生一直在我们城市里的一家信息公司工作。
7) 你爸爸要在伦敦呆多久？
Part II
Integrating skills
Task One
A: Listening comprehension
Listen to the coming three short passages and write down the missing words according to what you have heard.
Passage 1
Max, at the age of _______ and Willie, _______ years old, joined Team ___________ crew members and Skip Novak on _________ his vessel, Pelagic. They spent five ___________ on board Pelagic as they explored the Antarctic Peninsula(半岛) and the Southern reaches of the __________ oceans. While on board they transmitted ___________ and images to their schools and ___________ reports on their Adventure website.
Passage 2
Team Adventure continued its __________ adventures by sailing the “Route of Discovery”. The ____________ first taken by Christopher Columbus was Team Adventure's course on its ________ to the Americas. While not under the pressure of racing _____________, the voyage was a perfect opportunity to ___________ the idea of a floating classroom. With the _______ of our Monster.com, Team Adventure _______ two teachers through an international _______________; Janet Bradley, teacher of English and Media Studies at Bridgemary Community School in Gosport, Hampshire, UK and Susie Rieck, teacher and _____________ at John Burroughs Middle School in Milwaukee, Wisconsin, USA. Susie and Janet were able to communicate with their own ___________ and others through e-mail and daily web postings.
Passage 3
Team Adventure is now in Rhode Island on the hard. We are currently waiting for __________ to begin and hope to get the boat back _____________ soon.
The continuing effort of all our supporters and __________ is making it possible to continue the Team Adventure ________. We have 40,000 ___________ of sailing behind us with many records to be broken __________. We push on and hope to get back to sailing in 2003. Thanks ___________ to everyone with special thanks to Halsey Herreshoff, Commander in __________ and William P. Knowles, Director of Operations at the Herreshoff Museum / Americas Cup Hall of Fame for all their ______.
Activities:
1. After listening to the three short passages above and read them again carefully, discuss with your partner what kind of journey all these passages talk about.
2. Suppose you will join one of team adventure courses organized by your students’ union. Work in groups, make a plan with your partners for your adventure course. Please write down what preparation you should make and how to arrange your course. And show your own ideas before others in class.
Task Two
B: Cloze
1. Read the following passage carefully enough and select the correct word for each blank which should matching the meaning of the passage.
If you read this, it means our Book, PM-post __1__ (worked / started). Well we thought Geelong was not __2__ (that / rather) big, but as a matter of fact, it is quite big but __3__(still / also) very nice.
This morning we decided to take a __4__(bath /shower) with the Solar Shower bag we bought on Monday from Super Cheap in Melbourne. It is one of those thick __5__(paper / plastic) bags which can __6__ (hold / support) till 20 ltrs, one side is black and the other one transparent. It's got a hole on the __7__ (lower / upper) side to fill it with water and a kind of __8__ (mini / big) shower underneath like form tube. As it is not hot enough __9__ (inside / outside) (now is winter in Australia) we had to heat the __10__ ( tube / water) ourselves.
2. Fill in the blanks with the given words in their right forms.
( get, have, hang, leave, look, park, rent, require, see, decide)
To get the thick plastic bags may __1__ a bit of practice, the thing is that it is quite heavy to __2__ the bag and you don't put inside much water, you don't __3__ much from it. On the other side it is cheap, you __4__ a shower for $8.95.
After having an oat breakfast and __5__ we did not get any park fine, on the lucky day (we have slept since yesterday in a __6__ area where you are suppose to pay from 9.a.m. to 5 p.m., we get up at 10 a.m. and __7__ the place at about 11.30 a.m.).
We __8__ to go to the library today, as we are __9__ for some books about Australia and we thought we could find them here. The library is quite in the center of the city and it is quite big. You are even able to __10__ recent DVD's for $2.20 a week if you are a member. They also offer free internet access in their around 10 computers.
Task Three
C: Reading comprehension
Himalayan Mountains
Since time immemorial, the mighty Himalayas have attracted many adventurers, tourists and geographers with different aims and objectives. Some came here to reaffirm the powerful strength of their bodies and minds by climbing the highest range while some came to study the mysterious formation and some were here to just experience the majestic(=greatest) Himalayan panorama.
Himalayan Mountain stretches from India, Nepal, Bhutan, and Tibet. It has 10 highest peaks of the world, out of which 8 are the part of Nepalese Himalayas.
Five major mountains that form the main chunk of the Himalayan Mountains are K2 (Austin Godwin), Nanga Parbat Peak, Mount Everest, Annapurna and Kanchenjunga.
Majestic Mountains
Mount Everest is mainly located in Nepal and Tibet and in Nepal it is known as Sagarmatha & as Chomolangma in Tibet. From sea level, it measures up till 8,850 m (29,035 ft). It lies between 8655'40“ E Longitude to 2759'16” N, Latitude. Mount Everest is just one of the 30 peaks in the Himalayas that are over 24,000 feet high.
Himalaya is a Sanskrit word meaning, “abode of snow”, which is so true. The snowfields which dominate many of the peaks in the Himalayas are perman
篇2：掌握英语学习丛书人教版高中三册全套教案二(人教版高二英语教案教学设计)
广东省教学教材研究室 编
广东教育出版社
说 明
《掌握英语》是广东省教学教材研究室组织编写的《掌握学习指导丛书》之一。本书是根据人民教育出版社重新修订的并经全国中小学教材审定委员会审查通过的全日制普通高级中学教科书（必修）《英语》（Senior English for China Student’s Book），并参照了九年义务教育、高级中学《英语课程标准》的要求编写的。目的是积极贯彻新课程标准精神，通过围绕课本内容补充大量的相关材料帮助学生学习和训练，达到开拓学生的学习视野，丰富学生的知识面，帮助他们掌握教学内容，提高学习成效的目的。
本书共四册，每学期一册。每册按课本单元编写，每单元由两大板块组成：Language Focus和Integrating skills。 Language Focus 有Word study和 Grammar两部分。该板块主要是围绕单元的语言知识进行解释与扩充，巩固和提高，其中的Self-taught旨在启迪学生的思维，发展学生的学习策略。Integrating skills由Listening and talking 和Reading and writing两大部分组成。该板块的内容与话题相关，并注重情景设置，配有不同形式的听、读材料和训练，以及说、写活动任务。目的是在大量的内容相关、循环反复的训练中培养学生的综合运用语言的能力。本书构思新颖，用英语编写，有一定的广度和难度，并积极体现新课标精神。
《掌握英语》是由黄志红组织，肖鹏老师构思，编写组集体讨论，最后分工编写而成的。参加编写的人员有：第十三、十六、十七、十八、十九和第二十二单元：由肖鹏和沈益共同编写，第十四、十五单元：由王晓贤老师编写；第二十、二十一单元：由镇祝桂老师编写。
本书由唐锡玲老师负责统稿、审稿，罗耀权老师负责校对。
本书配有录音带、参考答案和听力录音材料，方便师生使用。
本书编写组
1月
目 录
Unit 13----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 14 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 15-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 16 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 17 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 18 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 19 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 20 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 21 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 22 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
参考答案---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
听力原文录音材料-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 13
Healthy eating
Part I
Language Focus
A. Word Study
A1: Topic words
As we know, different countries have different eating habits. It is said that Chinese food is the healthiest food in the world. But bad food and bad eating habits will make you weak or sick. If you have no time to cook your own meals, you will have to buy them. So it is important for us to know what food is good and what is not. Please write out names of food in the right places.
Healthy food
Junk food
A2:
Tips for word study
In this unit we’ll meet a lot of words connecting with food. When we talk about vegetables, we, of course, speak of fibre, Vitamin C and some other nutrients contained in them. When we have a talk about food like meat and fish, we’ll surely mention calorie, fat and protein etc. in it.
Exercise
A) Read the following sentences very carefully and write out the suitable word according to the meaning of each sentence.
1. A __________ is a person who never eats meat or fish.
2. People who are on diets try to eat food that does not contain many __________.
3. The word “__________” is relating to milk or products made using milk.
4. __________ is something consists of the parts of plants or seeds that your body cannot digest.
5. ___________ is a food in the form of a thick, slightly sour liquid that is made by adding bacteria to milk.
6. ___________ is a simple meal that is quick to cook and eat.
7. __________ is something in meat, cheese, and butter which forms an energy stored in your body.
B) Fill in the blanks with the words given in the box above the following sentences. Each word can only be used once.
bacon, bar, bean, dairy, lettuce, mineral, muscle, nutrient, peel, product, snack, soft, spoonful, stir, strong, vitamins, vegetarian, yoghurt,
1. My younger brother prefers _________ drinks to __________ drinks. And he never drinks wine at parties with his friends.
2. In winter, people in this cold and faraway town can only get ________ in stead of fresh pork.
3. As is known to all, some special __________ are found in eggs, meat and ______ products.
4. Hey, you cannot drink the water of the river directly. I have got two bottles of ___________ water here and you can have one.
5. It is good for you to drink a tin of _______ milk before you go to bed. You can also have some fresh dairy __________ delivered by the farm.
6. –What can I do for you, young man?
– Three _______ of chocolate, please.
7. I know ___________ is not so healthy and is less _________, but I’ve been as busy as a bee these days and have no time to cook.
8. Miss Alice is a ___________ and never touches meat in her meals. She prefers to have plenty of ___________ and __________ instead.
9. First put a _____________ of sugar into the coffee and then __________ it with a stick.
10. Combine nuts, sugar, and orange ________ in a small bowl and the mixture will taste wonderful.
B. Grammar
B1: Useful Phrases
1. ought to:
a) to indicate duty or obligation
1) You use ought to to say that you think it is normally right to do a particular thing or behave in a particular way, especially when giving or asking for advice or opinions.
2) You’ve got a very good position in the company. You ought to take care of it.
3) Do you think I ought to stay with him?
b) to express probability or expectation
1) You ought to finish this by Friday.
2) You ought to ask a lawyer for advice.
3) I realize I ought to have told you about it.
2. plenty of: a lot of; many; much; a great deal of; a number of
1) If there is plenty of something, there is a large amount of it, often more than it is needed.
2) There is still plenty of time to take Jill out for pizza.
3) Michael was so thirsty that he drank plenty of water when he caught sight of a tap in the corner of the hall.
3. keep up with: to remain informed; to compete with;
1) If someone or something keeps up with another person or thing, the first one moves, progresses, or increases as fast as the second.
2) She shook her head and started to walk on. He kept up with her…
3) She did not bother to keep up with the news.
4) Things are changing so fast that it’s hard to keep up with them.
4. short of: not enough; not much / many
1) If you are short of something or if something is short, you do not have enough of it.
2) His father’s illness left the family short of money.
3) At that time he was rich and probably never went short of anything.
5. now and then: now and again; occasionally; on and off; sometimes
1) If you say that something happens now and then or every now and again, you mean that it happens sometimes but not very often or regularly.
2) My father has a collection of magazines to which I return every now and then.
3) Judy works far from home, and she needs to go to see her mother now and then.
6. roll up: to fold something around itself to make the shape of a ball or tube, or to make a piece of clothing shorter
1) If you roll up your sleeves or trouser legs, you fold the ends back several times, making them shorter.
2) Walking in the surf, she had to roll her pants up to her knees.
3) That shop assistant is rolling up the purchases into a sheet of paper.
4) The chimney rolls up smoke.* (= Thick smoke comes out of the chimney.)
5) Our football team has rolled up another victory.* (= Our football team won again.)
6) A carriage rolled up to an inn.* (= A carriage arrived at an inn in a hurry.)
B2: Useful grammatical structures
1. You ought to be careful with fruit.
A) Here “ought to” means “should”. More examples:
1) All of us ought to respect not only our own privacy, but that of others.
2) You ought not to drink so much; you are ruining yourself by drinking a lot.
3) You ought not to shout to your parents like this, instead you ought to respect them.
B) Besides the use above, the structure “ought to” is used usually with expression that you think it is a good idea or it is important for you or someone else to do a particular thing, especially when giving or asking for advice or opinion.
1) You ought to ask the policeman over there for help.
2) You ought to ask for some advice from those experts in that field.
3) you ought to go to the airport to see them off.
C) The structure “ought to have” is used with a past participle to indicate that although it was best or correct for someone to do something in the past, they did not actually do it.
1) I realize that I ought to have told you about it.
2) They ought to have gone there by car, but they went by bike.
3) Whatever reasons you might have, you ought not to have told such a lie.
D) The structure “ought to” is used to tell others politely that you must do something.
I think I ought to leave for the airport right now.
2. It’s nothing serious.
When the words “nothing, anything, everything, something” are modified by adjectives, they should be put in front of those adjectives. More examples:
1) Attention please! I have something important to tell you.
2) Those who want to go to Paris please take everything necessary with you.
3) The old lady said she had not seen anything interesting in that old town.
3. Choosing what to eat is no longer as easy as it once was.
The phrase “no longer” means “not…any longer”, but their positions in the sentences are quite different. “no longer” can only be put before the predicate or behind the predictive while part of “not…any longer” should be put at the end of the sentence.
1) Sorry. Mr. Wild has no longer worked in our company.
2) His uncle said Tommy no longer lived upstairs.
3) You are very silly and I don’t think I can stand you any longer.
4. If we want to keep up with the high pace of modern life, we had better learn to make the right choices about what and how we eat.
The phrase “keep up with” means “to compete with or to remain informed”. More examples:
1) If you want to catch up with others, you should put your whole heart into your weak subjects and work harder than before.
2)The best way to keep up with the news is to surf the internet.
3) There is so much in the fashion field that you can never find enough money to keep up with it.
The structure “had better do…” means “it is best for somebody to do…”. It is often used in its short form as “’d better do”.
1) You’d better go to see a doctor or you will suffer a lot.
2) We’d better take a bath in the sea on such a hot day.
3) We’d better learn how to face the reality in our life. In this way we can be more practical.
4) You’d better not bother your mother right now for she is too tired after a day’s work in the company.
5. Eating habits become part of who we are.
“to become part of” means “to be part of” or “to have something to do with”
1) They are very glad that the lovely puppy has become part of their life.
2) That’s a tricky plan. I don’t want to be part of it.
3) The old man was delighted that he has become part of our family.
6. Organic vegetables are vegetables that are grown without chemicals that can be harmful to human beings and the environment.
The phrase “to be harmful to” means “to do somebody / something harm” or “to do harm to somebody / something”. More examples:
1) Polluted water is not only harmful to humans but also fish and other animals.
2) Drinking too much is harmful to your health.
3) Staying up too late is harmful to your health.
7. The same goes for “crash diets” that some companies say will make us lose weight fast.
The phrase “to go for” means “it is also true”.
1) Learning Chinese is interesting . The same goes for learning English.
2) Mrs Green is kind and patient. The same goes for her husband.
3) What I have said to Mr Smith goes for you, too.
8. We ought to learn more about our body and fuel it needs to keep fit. Only in that way will we be ready for the challenges and opportunities in life.
The second sentence is an inverted one, that is, its predicate is before the subject. Why? Because the structure with “only” is put at the beginning of the sentence. More examples:
1) Only by working hard can you catch up with the others in study.
2) Only to this hospital can you send the SARS patients.
3) Only by talking to him heart-to-heart can you know what’s really in his mind..
Compare to the following sentences:
1) Only the doctor can save your kid’s life. (“The doctor” is the subject of the sentence, so the normal word order is used.)
2) Mr. Goody, my son always speaks of you before us and admires you very much. Only you can persuade him now. (“you”, of course, is the subject of the sentence.)
9. Most fruits are naturally sweet and we can eat them just the way they are - all we have to do is clean or peel them.
“just the way they are” means “to be what they are”. More examples:
1) My younger sister always leaves her quilt just the way it is after she gets up in the morning.
2) You should not remove what your father left on the table and you’d better let them just the way they are.
3) Please put the book the way it was.
The phrase “clean or peel them” is used as the predicative in the sentence. Pay attention that the word “to” in the infinitive here is left out.
1) What she has done is (to) offer you her help.
2) All they were doing was (to) try to persuade their manager.
3) All I want to say is (to)take good care of yourself.
B3: Key grammatical items
Modal Verbs (1) -had better, should and ought to
When you give advice or your opinion about something, you can use had better or had better not.
1) You had better(= You’d better) get some more information about the plan to be carried out next week.
2) That old man is carrying a lot of paper over there and you had better(=you’d better) give him a hand.
3) You had better not (=You’d better not) drink the water that is polluted.
When you are trying to advise someone about what to do or what not to do, you can use should / ought to or should not / ought not to.
1) You should / ought to pay more attention to your behavior at the meeting.
2) You should not / ought not to have left without saying goodbye to Mr. Howard.
3) You should / ought to deliver these ESL materials to the state education bureau tomorrow morning.
C: Key grammatical items & practice
C1: Suppose you are a doctor and need to give your patients advice. You need to use should, ought to, had better or their negative forms. Your advice should be based on the situation given in the sentence.
e.g.: Tom feels cold because didn’t wear enough clothes. So you said to him,
“you’d better wear enough clothes so that you won’t feel cold.” or
“you should have put on more clothes to keep warm.”
1. Andy didn’t wash his hands before meal. So you said to him,
“________________________________________________”
2. Alice was very careless to step downstairs that way! So you said to her,
“____________________________________________________”
3. John was lack of sleep and he felt tired. So you said to him,
“____________________________________________________”
4. Kay had eaten some fruit that were not ripe. So you said to her,
“____________________________________________________”
5. Tony had got something wrong with his back. So you said to him,
“____________________________________________________”
6. Mike seldom did morning exercises last month. So you said to him,
“____________________________________________________”
7. Jane had got a high fever. So you said to her,
“____________________________________________________”
8. Mr. Smith stayed up too late last night. So you said to him,
“____________________________________________________”
C2: Fill in the blanks with the word or phrase like “had better (not)”, “should (not)”, “ought to (not)” .
1. ____________ you have come here five minutes earlier, you could meet Jimmy.
2. You _____________ go there by car or you will miss the plane.
3. We __________________ do it ourselves so that we can know what we are short of.
4. You _____________ say hello to your coach and it can make him happy.
5. They _________ go to the information office and ask them for their help in no time.
6. He _____________ go and deliver this emergency letter to the headquarter office right away.
7. You ______________ disturb your father for he has not got a good sleep these days.
8. All of you __________ help each other wherever you go. A friend indeed is a friend in need.
9. They _____________ leave that young boy alone in the woods in the night.
10. You ________________ show your pity on such a person like him.
Part II
Integrating skills
A: Listening & talking
Listen to the following passage about box lunches two times and fill in the blanks with the suitable words. The first time you should try to be familiar with the main idea of the passage, and the second time you will be given some pauses for writing the missing words.
Box Lunches: Packed for Safety!
Follow food safety basics (noted above) when you pack a lunch.
Always start with a clean lunchbox or a new ___(1)___bag. Wash your lunchbox out with soap and ______(2)_______ water after every use.
Pack a _____(3)_____ chill pack in an insulated lunch box to ___(4)____ perishable foods chilled. Those foods _______(5)_______ sandwiches or salads made with deli meat, _____(6)______ fish, hard-cooked eggs, and other foods made with ______(7) _______, poultry, fish or eggs.
If you ______(8)_______ any foods in a thermos, make ____(9)____ it has a good seal.
Keep a carried lunch or _____(10) ______ in a dark, cool, dry and clean place. The refrigerator is best if you have perishable ingredients. ______(11)_______ kids to ask their teacher if they need to find a _______(12)________ place.
Make sure to toss foods that aren't ____(13) ____ properly.
Help children ______(14) _______ to wash their hands before eating their lunch; tuck a note in the lunch box as a ______(15)_______ reminder for younger children.
Teach caution about _______(16)________ carried lunches with other children; some _____(17)________ may have allergic(过敏) reactions to come foods or ingredients.
Activities for talking
1. After listening to the passage above, discuss with your partners about how to pack a lunch box or what snacks you think will be good for you. Use your own words in discussion and use the information from the passage as much as you can.
2. Talk about your habits before your meals and share your partners with your own idea on healthy eating. More than 10 sentences should be used in your talk.
B: Reading & doing
B1: Read the passage and choose one best word from the three words given in each bracket.
ABOUT CANNED FOOD: SHELF LIFE
One of the most frequently asked questions about canned food is its shelf life and “use-by” __ 1 __ (dates / days / data). The canned food's shelf life is the length of time it stays in good condition and can be used. The codes that are __ 2 __ (placed / put / stamped) on canned food are manufacturers' codes that usually designate the date the __ 3 __ (goods / product / matter) was packaged. The codes __ 4 __ (different / vary/ come) from manufacturer to manufacturer and usually __ 5 __ (include / including / contain) coding for time and place of canning. Most manufacturers __ 6 __ (require / offer / provide) a toll-free number to call for __ 7 __ (answers / puzzles / questions) about canned food expiration dates. The following is a sample of how to read product codes.
Remember, the code stamped on the can is __ 8 __ (where / when / how) it was packaged. The general rule of thumb is that canned food has a __ 9 __ (shelf / its / lasting) life of at least two years from the date of purchase. It is recommended that all canned food be __ 10 __ (place / stored / hidden) in moderate temperatures (75° F and below).
For more information about canned food expiration dates, nutritional content of canned food and the __ 11 __ (right / exact / real) date of processing, please review the answers to our FAQs about __ 12 __ (canned / packed / frozen) food storage. For additional food safety information, please visit our branches in the cities sponsored by the National Food Processors Association.
B2: Read the following passage and choose one from A、B、C or D for each blank.
ABOUT CANNED FOOD
From artichoke hearts(朝鲜蓟心) to pumpkin, there are more than 1,500 food items packaged in cans. __ 1 __ with traditional canned favorites such as tomatoes and peaches, you'll find many new and __ 2 __ specialty foods that provide endless possibilities for canned creations.
Did you know that canned food is __ 3 __ full of nutrition? In most instances, canned food is equally or even __ 4 __ nutritious than its fresh and frozen counterparts. Plus, it's available year-round __ 5 __ it can easily be added to your favorite recipes __ 6 __ a convenient meal solution. To __ 7 __ more about canned food research, recipe ideas and nutrition __ 8 __, spend some time at Mealtime. Before long, you'll __ 9 __ that canned food really is an easy way to eat __ 10 __.
1. A. Along B. Down C. Alone D. Up
2. A. excited B. exciting C. special D. adventurous
3. A. packing B. wrapped C. packed D. wrapping
4. A. much B. more C. less D. many
5. A. that B. as C. when D. so
6. A. for B. to C. at D. with
7. A. study B. take C. learn D. observe
8. A. passages B. advice C. suggestion D. information
9. A. discover B. gain C. learn D. find
10. A. wrong B. good C. right D. more
C. Reading comprehension
Dear Elisa,
You said in the letter that you cut little pieces off bars and sweets. You feel like you’re not really eating as much, but you know you end up eating a lot. It bugs your mom. And you wonder what you can do.
Well, you realize that you do have a problem and that is a good start. I would like to suggest that you should learn some different behavior techniques to help you change your eating habits.
You are correct in assuming you eat more when cutting off little pieces of food. But there is more to it. A lot of people deny they are eating much when eating small pieces. Also, this eating behavior may happen more often when you are bored, angry, tired, upset, or just because food is easily available and it's socially acceptable. To just depend on “will power” within that same food atmosphere would not help.
You stated that it bugs your mom, but you didn't say how you feel. Most people feel guilty about eating “forbidden foods” such as cakes, cookies and sweets. Because they feel bad after the first piece, they eat more because eating is pleasurable and gives comfort. They express the attitude of “Well, as long as I had one piece, I might as well have more because I blew my diet anyway. I'll just start my diet again tomorrow.”
The most successful long term changes in eating habits result from using right behavior techniques. First, you need to know what environmental and mental factors cause your current eating habit. Is food placed in your kitchen within your sight and reach? What time of day are you more likely to eat little pieces of food? What room are you in when eating? Are you standing, sitting or lying down? Are you alone? Does your eating accompany another activity like watching television? What is your mood? Are you actually feeling hungry or are you eating for some other reasons?
The answers to these questions would help you identify the environment in which you eat inappropriately. This record would also reveal your other food habits. Once identified, you can change your food environment to change your eating habits. A dietitian would be able to give you meaningful suggestions in steps to achieve a change. Also, alternative activities need to be planned by you so that when you are tired, angry or upset, you can do something other than eat.
Yours,
Orin
C1: Try your best to choose the right words underlined in the passage to fill in the blanks according to the meaning of each following sentence.
1. If you __________ something that has been out of sight, you uncover it so that people can see it.
2. If you ______________ something, you state that it is not true.
3. If one thing is an _____________ to another, the first can be found, used, or done instead of the second.
4. If someone or something _________ you, they worry you or make you angry.
5. The word “________________” means concerned with protection of the natural world of land, sea, air, plants, and animals.
6. If you ____________ something, you say or write it in a formal or definite way.
7. A study of the British diet has ___________ that a growing number of people are overweight.
8. The government has ______________ that the police had driven away all the people with force, who were against the act passed, were marching towards the City Hall the other day.
9. To tell you the truth, I did it only to ____________ my parents.
10. The police report ____________ that Jack Error was arrested for robbing a small bank in the town of a lot of money.
11. These letters _____________ him to be an honest man.
12. _______________ groups plan to stage public protests during the conference.
C2: Read the passage above carefully again, and answer the following questions.
1. What did Elisa say in her letter to Orin?
A. She admits she has eaten too much though she cut her food in small pieces.
B. She says she’s eaten less than before for she has cut her food into small pieces.
C. What she has done on her diet is the same as most people have done.
D. She has changed her eating habits completely after the writer’s suggestion.
2. What is “will power” mentioned in the passage?
A. Anger and sadness.
B. Happiness and tiredness.
C. Self control power.
D. Environment and atmosphere.
3. What do most people feel after they eat some “forbidden food”?
A. They feel bad because the food is polluted and it cannot be eaten.
B. They feel guilty because the food will make them heavier and heavier.
C. They feel very happy because the food is good for health.
D. They feel sad because they are not allowed to eat such food.
4. Why does the writer raise so many questions to Elisa in Paragraph 4?
A. Just ask Elisa to answer all these questions as soon as possible.
B. Just remind Elisa of getting all the food out of her sight.
C. Just remind Elisa to get rid of all her bad eating habits.
D. Just tell Elisa where and when she can eat what she likes.
D: Writing
The following passage is adapted from a magazine, written by a college student. Try to write a reply to this student in about 150 words and tell her / him how to be on a healthy diet.
Dear Orin,
I am a college freshman and I recently started working out a few times a week. I'm also trying to eat healthier food, but I find it difficult to do this because I am on a 2-meal/day dining plan. So, I usually skip breakfast and have a large lunch and dinner. I may have an afternoon or midnight snack. I know I should be having more smaller meals throughout the day, but that is not possible when on a meal plan. Do you have any suggestions?
Also, what’s your option about eating in a school cafeteria? I'm bored of turkey sandwiches, salads and cereal!
Yours,
Weight
Unit 14
Festivals
Part I
Language Focus
A: Word Study
Topic words
Learn the following words shown in the two diagrams which include many of the words in this unit.
Diagram 1
This diagram shows us words concerning with different aspects about festivals.
KKii
Diagram 2: Verbs + nouns(objects)
verbs objects verbs objects verbs objects
honor the ancestor solve the problem celebrate the cycle of life
light the candle choose the date build unity/community/nation/
future
salute to the dead respect life and nature share our hopes for the happy future
enjoy the spirit of a holiday
Exercise
A) Fill in the blanks with proper words from the diagrams above. The first letter has been given.
1. The ways of Christmas celebration in Canada are s_________ to those of other countries.
2. Nowadays holidays are becoming c___________, as the business world all aim at the chance of selling things in the holidays.
3. When we learn different festivals of different counties, we should first understand and r_________ their cultures.
4. It has been proved that teachers should try to make students s__________ the problems on their own.
5. National Day and Labour Day are two of China’s m___________ festivals, when people can have a 7-day holiday in each.
6. If you don’t believe in anything, it means you have no f____________.
7. World Water Day is a r___________ that people need to love water, save water, and use water properly.
8. Dragon Boat Festival was originally celebrated to h___________ Qu Yuan, an ancient Chinese statesman and poet.
9. Rows of lighted lamps are s____________ of India’s festival Diwali.
B) Fill in the blanks with purpose, theme, crimes, destruction, arguments, and unity.
Let’s create some holidays of our own. The p___________ of our holiday creation is to make our life better.
First, Peace Day. The t____________ of it is “No fighting or c___________ are allowed. Second, Nature Day, we’ll try to realize the aim of no pollution or d_____________ of nature. Third, Friendship Day, we’ll reduce a____________ or fights to the minimum (最小值).
In all, we will try to build a society of u_________, friendship, peace and health.
B: Grammar
B1: Useful phrases
1. make a decision: decide, settle, or give a judgment (裁决) or solution to something or a problem
1) Darling, it’s up to you to make a decision on how we should have Valentine’s Day.
2) The government has made a decision to arrange those senior army men to spend Ederly Day in Hawaii.
3) We are facing with serious situations. It’s high time that we should make a decision.
2. have … in common: share…by two or more people or things
1) Most religious holidays have something in common, that is, they were originally celebrated to worship gods or buddhas.
2) They are brothers, but they have little in common.
3) American English and British English have much in common.
3. believe in: have trust in, or feel sure of the value or worth of
1) Diwali is a five day Hindu festival which people in India celebrate, as they believe in Laksmi, goddess of wealth.
2) Generally speaking, parents are your first teachers whom you believe in most.
3) I dare say he is lying. He is the last person who I believe in in our circle.
4. as well (as) : in addition (to); too; together with
1) The most popular food on Thanksgiving Day is roast turkey, as well as corn, cranberries, and pumpkin pie and so on.
2) Mid-autumn Festival is a time for family reunion, as well as a day to celebrate harvesting.
3) Before the Spring Festival, people give their houses a thorough cleaning, prepare for gifts and lucky money, as well as children’s Sunday best and everyone’s delicious food.
5. keep …alive: keep…living or in existence
1) Dragon Boat Festival is celebrated in many parts of China, so that Chinese traditional festivals will be kept alive.
2) An old woman from Shanxi went to many countries to teach Chinese paper cut. She said, “I can cut all kinds of features. I just want to keep our ancestors’ paper cutting skills alive, and spread it to all over the world.”
3) We have to make measures to keep the wild animals alive.
6. play tricks on: to deceive someone as a joke
1) On April Fool’s Day, people play tricks on each other, which might lead to some unexpected results.
2) The naughty boy played a trick on his teacher by hiding a toy snake into the drawer.
3) I am serious. Don’t play silly tricks on me.
7. be taken in: to be deceived by someone
1) I reminded myself on the early morning of April Fools’ Day, “Never be taken in anyway today”.
2) I came to know that I had been taken in after I paid for the second-hand car.
3) Don’t be taken in by their promises.
8. in one’s opinion: from one’s own point of view
1) In my opinion, cultures of one country influence those of another.
2) ― What’s is the possible result of their football game in your opinion, Jim?
― I guess Class One will win, as in the last game they won Class Three by 2 goals ahead.
3). I like the dress, but in my mother’s opinion, it is not a nice fit.
9. dress up: put on special clothes
1) People who will take part in the parade have already dressed up.
2) On Halloween, some people dressed up to frighten others as a joke.
3) We all will have to dress up for the opening ceremony of the school sports meet.
B2: Useful grammatical structures
1. I don’t think it’s necessary to create a nature day in our village.
1) I don’t think it’s going to rain tomorrow, as we’ll have an outing.
2) We don’t believe that the world is created by God.
3) They didn’t think it was safe to put so much money in the case.
2. Kwanzaa was born in 1966, when people created a new festival so that African-Americans would be able to celebrate their history and culture.
1) Race Unity Day (the second Sunday in June or sometimes the Saturday before it) is celebrated so that the USA would have no racial prejudice (偏见).
2) People even travel hundreds of thousands of kilometers to their home towns, so that they could get together with their families and friends during the Spring Festival.
3) I wore my glasses so that I could see the blackboard clearly.
3. The people who created Kwanzaa liked the characteristics of the African festivals so much that they used them to write the seven Principles of Kwanzaa.
1) The Harry Potter stories are so interesting that I always forget my meals or sleep when I read them.
2) There are so many festivals all over the world that I can’t tell the exact dates of them.
3) I’ve been to the museum so many times that I can describe every exhibit in it.
4. Earth Day is a reminder that we need to care about the world we live in and that we should learn to respect life and nature.
1) He said that it was another victory, and that he would try even harder next time.
2) We believed that we would have our salary raised, and that we might have to do heavier work in the future.
3) He promised that he would try every effort to help, and that he would be my lifelong friend.
5. The people who created Kwanzaa used the word for “first fruit” in Swahili, the largest language in Africa.
1) Earth Day is celebrated on March 21, the first day of spring.
2) People all over China celebrate the Spring Festival, the Chinese New Year.
3) Have you heard about Kwanzaa, a seven-day festival celebrating the culture and history of African Americans?
B3: Key grammatical items
Modal Verbs (2) -must, have to and have got to
1. “Must” helps to express the speaker’s determination or ideas. It means that one wants to do something or is sure of doing something. “Mustn’t” consists of(包含) the meaning of “be not permitted” or “be forbidden”. The negative answer to the question “Must …?” is “needn’t” or “not have to”, but not “mustn’t”.
2. “Have to” means “need to do something or be forced to do something”. You may not be willingly doing it, but you are obliged to do it or responsible to do it.
3. “Have got to” has the same meaning as “have to”, but it’s more colloquial.
e.g. 1) We must remember our past and build our future.
2) We have to build our loves, think for ourselves, and speak for ourselves.
3) －I’ve got to leave now. It’s late already.
－Oh, really? Must you leave so soon?
C: Key grammatical items & practice
C1: Complete the following sentences by choosing the suitable phrases from the above ones.
1. All the people, including the emperor and the prime minister, ______________ by the two weavers who promised to make the emperor’s magic new clothes.
2. The fox _______________ on the crow in order to get the meat from her mouth.
3. The doctor gave the patient who had serious heart trouble a heart transplant (移植) so as to ______________. And it was successful.
4. She used to say she didn’t __________ marriage, but now she’s changed her mind.
5. My grandpa has finally ___________ to retire next month.
6. John said at the meeting, “________, we should create our own Music Festival.”
7. The little boys and girls are ___________ as rabbits, pandas, and pigs in the play.
8. The Spring Festival is a time for relaxation, family reunion, _______ seeing off the old year and welcoming a new year.
C2: Fill in the following sentences with the correct forms of the model verbs “have to” and “must”.
1. I am so sorry for being late, because I ___________ go to the police station to report the car accident I met with on my way here.
2.- Must I go to work tomorrow earlier than usual?
- No, you ___________.
3. Tom, you __________ play computer games so often, as you are going to have your final exams soon.
4. The teacher calls on us to take part in the coming sports meet. Everybody _________ join in an event, as this is the school rule.
5. We ___________ take measures to get rid of robberies and thefts in our city.
6. The boss had one strict rule. He said that all the workers _________ come to work on time.
7. He ____________ support seven people. He is the only bread earner （经济支柱）in his family.
8. We __________ use the office phone for private calls.
C3: Complete the following sentences.
1) They celebrate festivals ______________________________________. (目的是将自己国家的历史和文化保存下来)
2) People in the country seem to be so interested in traditional festivals ___________________
_____________________________________________ (结果农村的节日气氛显得更浓厚些). (气氛:atmosphere)
3). _________________________________________________________ (我认为他不会出席) the meeting of next week.
4). They all agreed that festival presentations in tourist resorts should be planned, _________ ______________________________________________________ (并且他们应该展现出原貌).(原貌: original form)
Part II
Integrating skills
A: Listening and speaking
A1: Listen to the tape once and fill in the missing words.
Carving pumpkins into jack- o'lanterns is a Halloween custom ____________ to Ireland. The Irish people carved frightening faces out of turnips, beets or _____________ representing “Jack of the Lantern”. When the Irish brought their customs to the _____________, they carved faces on pumpkins. Today jack-o' lanterns _____________ of a house on Halloween night let costumed children know that there are goodies waiting, if they ________ and say: “ _________________!”
A2: The story you’re going to listen to is about the ancient New Year.
1) Listen to the monologue to get the main idea of it. Tick the following items mentioned in the passage.
1. the oldest holiday ( ) 2. The Old Chinese new year ( )
3. the beginning of spring( ) 4. buying presents for friends and relatives ( )
5. early Egyptians ( ) 6. Roman Senate(参议院)( )
7. an 11-day celebration ( ) 8. the weather conditions of years B.C.( )
9. Julius Caesar( )
2) Listen again and answer the following questions.
1. When was first ancient New Year celebrated?
2. What did people think of the beginning of spring?
3. Who kept changing the Roman calendar?
4. What did the Roman Senate do to set the calendar right?
A3: Listening comprehension
1) First listening: Listen to the dialogue and choose the correct choice to answer the following questions.
1. Why does Jack know so much about Teachers’ Day in different countries?
A. He is writing a report. B. His father is a teacher.
C. He wants to be a teacher after graduation.
2. Which country/countries has/have Teachers’ Day on September 5th?
A. America. B. India and Korea C. The USSR and Sudan(苏丹).
3. When is the USSR Teachers’ Day?
A. June 12th. B. January 16th. C. On the first Sunday in October.
4. What can you know from the dialogue?
A. The ways of celebrating Teachers’ Day in different countries are completely different.
B. Different countries have much in common in celebrating Teachers’ Day.
C. Only some Asian countries celebrate Teachers’ Day.
2) Listen to the passage again and fill in the blanks in the chart below.
Country Teachers’ Day Other Descriptions
America September 28th It is the ___________ of Chinese ancient philosopher Confucious (孔子).
Thailand January 16th Teachers _______________ work on that day.
___________ June 12th /
Hungary __________ /
Many of
these
countries
/ The government and the whole society show their _________, __________ and _________ to teachers and education.
A4: Oral practice:
Work in pairs to describe how you celebrate your Spring Festival in your home town.
B: Reading & doing
B1: Read the following passages carefully and choose the proper words to fill in the blanks.
The History of Valentine’s Day
Valentine's Day started in the time of the Roman Empire. In ancient Rome, February 14th was a holiday to __1__ (honour/amaze/satisfy) Juno. Juno was the Queen of the Roman Gods and Goddesses. The Romans also knew her as the Goddess of women and __2__ (money/marriage/education). The following day, February 15th, began the Feast of Lupercalia. The lives of young boys and girls were strictly __3__(united/separate/equal). However, one of the customs of the young people was name drawing (抓阄). On the __4__ (end/ eve/beginning) of the festival of Lupercalia, the names of Roman girls were written on __5__ (loafs/piles/pieces) of paper and placed into jars. Each young man would draw a girl's name from the jar and they would then be __6__ (partners/enemies/ pioneers) for the duration of the festival with the girl whom he chose. Sometimes the pairing of the children __7__ (held/remained/lasted) a whole year, and often, they would __8__ ( pull/draw/fall) in love and would later marry.
B2: Read the following passages carefully and fill in the blanks with proper words.
Spring Festival
In China, the Spring Festival is the most important and __1__ of all Chinese festivals. Since 1949, the Spring Festival has become a __2__ holiday which is celebrated throughout the country for at __3__ a week. It is important as a family holiday, and on the eve of the Spring Festival, the whole family __4__ for a big meal. The principle ritual (典礼) activity during the festival is __5__ as “New Year's Visiting” wherein relatives and __6__ go to each other's houses and give greetings. Spring Festival carnivals (欢庆会) are different __7__ place to place, offering lantern and flower displays and the even more popular Lion and Dragon Dances. __8__ to Christmas in the Western countries, Spring Festival is the most celebrated festival in China.
C: Read comprehension
Read the following passage carefully and do the following exercises.
FLAG DAY in the USA: JUNE 14
The Fourth of July was traditionally celebrated as America's birthday, but the idea of celebrating the Flag Day firstly began in 1885. A Wisconsin Public School teacher, called BJ Cigrand, made his pupils celebrate June 14 as 'Flag Birthday'. He advocated the celebration of June 14 as 'Flag Birthday', or 'Flag Day'.
On June 14, 1889, a kindergarten teacher in New York City planned some ceremonies for his school children. His idea of celebrating Flag Day was later agreed by the State Board of Education of New York. On June 14, 1891, the Betsy Ross House in Philadelphia held a Flag Day celebration, and on June 14 of the following year, the New York Society of the Sons of the Revolution, observed Flag Day.
With the idea expanding, on May 8th,1893, Public Schools of Philadelphia directed that Flag Day exercises be held on June 14, 1893 in Independence Square. School children were gathered together, each carrying a small Flag, and patriotic(爱国的) songs were sung and addresses were given.
On June 14th, 1894, the first general public school children's celebration of Flag Day in Chicago was held in Douglas, Garfield, Humboldt, Lincoln, and Washington Parks, with more than 300,000 children participating.
Adults, too, participated in patriotic programs. Franklin K. Lane, Secretary of the Interior, delivered a 1914 Flag Day address in which he repeated words he said the flag had spoken to him that morning: “I am what you make me; nothing more. I swing before your eyes as a bright gleam of color, a symbol of yourself.”
Inspired by these state and local celebrations, Flag Day - the anniversary of the Flag Resolution of 1777 - was officially established on May 30th, 1916. While Flag Day was celebrated in all kinds of communities for years after that. It was not until August 3rd, 1949, that President Truman signed an Act of Congress announcing June 14th of each year as National Flag Day.
C1: Match the words and phrases on the left with their meaning on the right.
1.observe A. move forward and backward, or from side to side
2.expand B. set up
3.participate C. make sb. feel that they want to do sth. and can do it
4.swing D. celebrate
5.inspire E. become larger, unfold or spread out
6.establish F. write one’s name
7.sign G. take part in
C2: Read the passage again and decide if the following sentences are true or false. Write a “T” if the sentence is true. If it is false, write an “F” and correct it.
1. America’s birthday and Flag Day are on the same day.
2. Flag Day came from the state of Wisconsin, 1885.
3. The State Board of Education did favour the idea of the kindergarten teacher.
4. The first celebration of Flag Day in Chicago was carried out in private schools in 1894.
5. F. K. Lane gave a speech to adults, in which he expressed his love to the flag.
6. The act of Congress for the National Flag Day was passed long before August 3rd,1949.
D: Reading & writing
Ming Hua got an e-mail from Abby, her pen pal in the USA, after Thanksgiving Day. Suppose you are Ming Hua. Please write back to Abby after you read the e-mail below.
Dear Ming Hua,
For the whole week, I have been having my Thanksgiving Day with my parents. Now let me tell you something about Thanksgiving Day in America.－one of our national festivals.
Thanksgiving Day in America is celebrated on the fourth Thursday of November. It is a day in each year for giving thanks to God for blessings received during the year. On this day, people give thanks with feasting (盛宴) and prayer. They eat turkey, corn, cranberries, and pumpkin pie. Thanksgiving is usually a family day, celebrated with big dinners and joyous reunions, with good things to eat. Thanksgiving is also a time for serious religious thinking, church services, and prayer.
The First Thanksgiving observance in America was entirely religious .The custom spread from Plymouth to other New England colonies in America after the Plymouth colonists had settled in America in 1619. The first dreadful winter in Massachusetts had killed about half the members of the colony. In 1621, the settlers expected a good corn harvest, despite poor crops of peas, wheat, and barley. Thus, in early autumn, Governor William Bradford arranged a harvest festival to give thanks to God for the progress the colony had made.
The festival lasted three days. The men of Plymouth had shot ducks, geese, and turkeys. The menu also included clams, eel and other fish, wild plums and leeks, corn bread, and watercress. The women of the settlement did cooking over outdoor fires. About 90 Indians also helped in the festival. That’s the first thanksgiving in America.
Dear Ming Hua, I am glad we can share different cultures through emails. I was told you have a similar festival- the Mid-autumn Festival. Is there anything in common? How do you celebrate it? Is there a historical story behind it? Please tell me something about it.
Best wishes to you and god bless you on a good harvesting year.
Sincerely yours,
Abby
Unit 15
The Necklace
Part I
Language Focus
A: Word Study
A1: Topic words
In this unit, we learn some words that are very frequently used in communication. Please study the words in the following two charts.
Chart 1:
Name of the play The Necklace Author Guy de Maupassant
Characters in the play Mathilde Loisel, Pierrie Loisel, Jeanne
Materials the necklaces were made of diamond, glass
Verbs in the play script recognise, accept, explain, match, marry, cost
Nouns in the play script ball, palace, franc
Nouns formed
from verbs invitation, government, description
Adjectives and adverbs in the play script valuable, pretty, worth, precious, exactly
Chart 2
Learning on plays What you think about and do with
When reading a play, you try to know about time, place, characters, scenes, lines, acting and so on
When writing a play, you need to (work out) the outline, (make up) the plots, write down the dialogue , rehearse the play and perform.
A2: Tips for word study
1. recognise: know sb. or sth. because you have seen or experienced them before
1) I could more or less recognise his handwriting although he pretended to be Jim and signed his name.
2) But for the scar (疤) on her chin, I couldn’t have recognised her as she had such strong make-ups on the face.
3) I got to know Alice in 1994, but I could hardly recognise her last week when we met. Because she had had a plastic surgery(整形手术), which made her look so different.
2. accept: receive something offered, be willing to take something offered
1) Li Ming is not ready to accept critical ideas from other people.
2) I won’t accept the gold watch given by my grandma as I don’t think she should have bought me so expensive a present.
3) She received a lot of money from the man but she didn’t accept it.
3. worth: having a certain value, especially in money
1) The drama is worth watching a second time.
2) The Museum of Fine Arts is well worth a visit.
3) We believe that our freedom is worth fighting for.
4. marry: take sb. as a husband or a wife by law
1) Dianna was married to Prince Charles，but later she could not stand his disloyalty.
2) J. K. Rowling married a second time after she became famous for her masterpieces.
3) Her father married her to a rich man with a large clothing factory.
5. explain: show the meaning of, make something clear
1) How do you explain her strange behaviour?
2) Can you explain to me how this cell phone works?.
3) The doctor explained to us why the mad man always talks to himself.
6. rehearse: practise (a play, music ,etc. ) for public performance
1) He is rehearsing his role in the play as a hero.
2) Ten minutes of performance made us keep rehearsing for many more hours.
3) When you rehearse, you also need some audience to give advice.
Tips: The noun form of rehearse is “rehearsal”.
7. exactly: completely correct, quite
1)－To be frank, do you mean that I will drive over to pick you up?
－ Exactly.
2) Her earrings look exactly the same as mine, but mine are more expensive.
3) What exactly seems to be the problem?
8. Word formation
1) v + tion, sion n eg. invite – invitation
communicate – communication, solve – solution,
pronounce – pronunciation, introduce – introduction,
prepare – preparation, impress – impression,
express – expression explain – explanation
2) v + ment n eg. govern - government
agree – agreement, announce – announcement,
move – movement, endanger – endangerment
3) adj. + ness n eg: happy – happiness
ill – illness, sad – sadness,
careless – carelessness, kind – kindness,
weak – weakness happy– happiness
4) n /v + able, ible adj eg: value - valuable
reason – reasonable, fashion – fashionable,
enjoy – enjoyable, terror – terrible,
credit – credible (可信的) depend–dependable
Exercise
A1: Review the text and fill in the blanks according to the text, using words mostly from Chart 1.
The story in “The Necklace” was set in the 19th century in France. There were three major __1__ in the story: Mathilde Loisel, Pierre Loisel and Jeanne. Mathilde’s husband Pierre got an __2__ from the __3__ to a ball. He __4__ it and decided to go there with his __5__ wife. But his wife Mathilde was worried, because she had no new dress or any __6__ to wear. Her husband spent 400 __7__ on a new dress for her, and she borrowed a diamond necklace from her good friend Jeanne, in order to __8__ her new dress. They went to the __9__ and had a good time there.
On their way back after the ball, Mathilde found the necklace was no longer __10__ her neck. They rushed back to the palace and looked for it, but couldn’t __11__ it. It was lost.
In the case, the young __12__ had to borrow a great deal of money and bought a necklace that was __13__ like Jeanne’s. It cost them 16,000 francs. So they had to work day and night to pay for the debt. After ten years of hard work, they at last paid off all the money, but Mathilde became so old a woman that Jeanne even could not __14__ her when they met.
When Jeanne heard the story, she told Mathilde that the necklace she lent her wasn’t a real __15__ necklace. It was not __16__ at all. It was __17 __ 500 francs at the most.
A2: Fill in the blanks, using words mostly from Chart 2.
Before you act a play out, you need first of all to try to know about the setting of the play. That is the __1__ when it happens and the __2__ where it happens. You are also supposed to find out how many __3__ there are in the play, and what are the relationships among these people. Then you read and recite the __4__. Keep __5__ in each scene until you are very pleased with it, and at last you act it out to the audience.
When you write a play, you need to work out an __6__, make up the __7__, write down the __8__ and rehearse the play many times, and then ask a group of people to __9__ it out, to see whether your play is attractive and practical.
B: Grammar
B1: Useful phrases
1. call on (upon) : visit, appeal to, invite, require
1) I will call on my customers when I go to Hangzhou on business.
2) The government has been calling on the whole nation to fight against corruption (腐败).
3) I called on some old classmates for the classmate-gathering on the New Year’s Day.
2. pay back, pay for, pay off
(1) pay for: hand over the price of, bear the cost of
(2) pay back: return money that has been borrowed
(3) pay off: pay in full and free from obligation to
1) I paid 1800 yuan for the TV set last year, but now the price is 40 percent lower.
2) The deadline for returning me the money she borrowed is up, but she asked to delay paying it back.
3) You can pay off all the loan (贷款)to the bank at one time, although you should pay in installments(分期).
3. play a role/part in : perform (act ) a part in (a drama, a film etc.)
1) Jacky Chan has played many different roles in a lot of films.
2) In his latest film, he plays the role of a brave police officer.
3) In order to rehearse effectively, each of us should make full preparation for the role he plays.
4. at (the) most: not more than a particular amount or number
Its opposite is “at (the) least”.
1) I guess the second-hand car cost you 30,000 yuan at most.
2) I think the whole journey will take an hour at the most.
3) If you want to use an English word correctly, you will have to meet with the word for at least three times in at least three different contexts.
5. not …any more/ longer: neither, not again, not at the present time, or no longer
1) The next day I came, the poster of the name list was not there any longer. (It was no longer there.)
2) This coat doesn't fit me any more since I’ve grown a lot.
3) I didn’t wait for him any longer after I received his phone message.
6. after all: anyway, for a good reason that you should remember
1) Don’t blame (责怪) him so much for his mistakes, after all, he is a child.
2) She shouldn’t be working so hard. – She is 60, after all.
3) I don’t really care. After all, money isn’t everything.
7. day and night: for days without the difference between day and night, continuously
1) The soldiers are working day and night to rescue the people from the flood.
2) In summer it costs us a lot to have the air-conditioner on day and night.
3) The earth is spinning day and night, year in and year out.
B2: Useful grammatical structures
1. Well，I would rather not (tell you).
1) I would much rather go out for a meal than stay in and watch TV.
2) ––What was all that about?
––I’m sorry, I would rather not say anything about it.
3) He would rather play computer games at home instead of going out.
2. ––I hope you weren’t ill.
––No, Jeanne, I wasn’t ill.
1) ––This isn’t yours, is it?
––No, it isn’t mine. Maybe it’s Jean’s.
2) ––I don’t think it’ll rain today.
––No, it certainly won’t rain. Just look at the sun.
3) ––I don’t believe she has done it all by herself.
––No, she can’t have done it all by herself.
3. Do you have a friend who might lend you some jewellery?
So I called on you and asked if I could borrow some jewellery.
1) We often go to the library to borrow books and magazines.
2) I have to borrow some money. Can you lend me a little?
3) She always lends her books to those who want to borrow them.
B3: Key grammatical items
Modal Verbs (3) -must, can/could, may/might
Modal verb “must” is used to show that the speaker thinks something is very likely or certain to be true while “can” is often used for totally negative tone, or in a question expressing the speaker’s guess which needs to be conformed. “May” expresses less confirmed tone towards a statement. “Could’ and “might” are the past forms of “can” and “may”.
e.g:
1. It can’t be true, Pierre. ( totally negative tone)
2. You must be Jeanne. ( totally affirmative tone)
3. You may not know that the necklace I returned is not the one that I had borrowed.(some sort of possibility)
C: Key grammatical items and practice
C1: Complete the following sentences with the phrases above to agree with the meaning of each sentence.
1. His parents had been missing him ____________ after he went to Taiwan in 1973.
2. Gong Li _____________ in different films, including both images (形象) of country women and city girls.
3. The commander _________ the soldiers to fight bravely for the country.
4. He is not a person worthy of trust. As far as I know, he has borrowed money from a lot of friends, but has never _____it ____ as he promised, Let alone (更不要说) __________his debts.
5.That lecture-room is not big enough to hold 300 people. It has ______ 250 seats.
6. Hearing this, I _______ feel regretful ________. I don’t think it was my fault.
7. I don’t think you need to treat them with a good dinner, because you are _________ a guest.
C2: Fill in the blanks, using “can”, “may”, “must”, “could”, and “might”.
(A)
A: It’s Sunday today. It’s breakfast time. But Danes is not downstairs yet. He __1__ be sleeping, I bet.
B: No. He __2__ be sleeping, as he is an early bird. He __3__ have got up. He __4__ be out doing some running, or he __5__ be reading in the garden.
A: Let me see…. (Looking out of the window) Yeah. He is holding a book. You are smart. Call him back here for breakfast.
B: All right.
(B)
A: There is a certain Mr. Wang who asked to see Miss Li. Where is Miss Li?
B: She __1__ be in her office, as when I telephoned her 20 minutes ago, she was there.
C: She __2__ be in her office now. Her timetable shows that she goes to the airport to meet someone at 10 o’clock. It’s 10:25. She __3__have been back so early.
B: Oh, Gosh. That Mr. Wang __4__ be that new comer. Miss Li __5__ have gone to the wrong place and failed to meet him.
C. Quite reasonable. But where is Miss Li now?
B: She might be still waiting at the airport, or she __6__ be on the way back. But she should have made a telephone call anyway.
C: I’ll call her to make sure. Ask Mr. Wang to wait, will you?
Part II
Integrating skills
A: Listening and talking
A1: a) Listen to the dialogues and answer the questions in pairs.
1. What are they talking about? ___________________________
2. How many questions does Helen mention? _________________
3. What is needed when you read a play? _____________________
b) Listen to the dialogue again, filling in the blanks of the following sentences.
You should be clear about these questions when you read a play.
How many __1__ are there in the play and __2__ are they? What is the __3__between each of them? What is __4__? What is __5__?
1. _____________ 2. ______________ 3. _________________
4. _____________ 5. ______________
A2: a) Listen to the tape and make the best choice for each of the following questions.
1. Guy de Maupassant is a French writer of _________.
A. 17th century B. 19th century C. 18th century
2. When was he born?
A. In 1850.
篇3：掌握英语学习丛书人教版高中三册全套教案一(人教版高二英语教案教学设计)
补充材料
1． 请参看paper-copy的红笔校对稿。
2．补充材料 1（请补在第12页）
D: Writing
After reading Passage One in Reading comprehension, you know something about Morse Solomon, an American scientist. Maybe you are interested in what he has done and want to know more. Now write a letter asking Morse Solomon to publish his ideas in the magazine Popular Science so that more people can know about them.
In your letter you need to
1) tell Mr Solomon who you are and how you happened to know his ideas;
2) tell Mr Solomon what you think of his ideas and suggest him getting them published;
3) give Mr Solomon two reasons for your suggestion;
.
3. 补充材料 2（请补在第21页）
Unit Two
D: Writing
Read Passage One above (See Reading comprehension) again, and write a short passage about how your teacher use the new media - Internet -in his/her English teaching and what changes the Internet has brought into your classroom.
You need to include the following in your essay:
1. give two or three advantages of using the Internet in English teaching and learning;
2. give one or two the problems about using the Internet;
4. 补充材料 3（请补在第30页）
Unit Three
D: Writing
Do you live in the city or the countryside? Are there any famous buildings in your city / hometown / home village? Now write a short passage about one of your local buildings.
In your passage you need to
1. tell us what kind of building it is, where it is, when was it built;
2. tell us something about its style: how is it different from the other buildings you have seen.
5. 补充材料 4（请补在第41页）
Unit Four
E: Read and writing
Read the following poem very carefully and write a short comment about it.
Friends
Jean Kyler McManus
A friend is someone we turn to
when our spirits need a lift,
A friend is someone we treasure
for our friendship is a gift.
A friend is someone who fills our lives
with beauty, joy, and grace
And makes the whole world we live in
a better and happier place.
Here are some tips for your comment:
☆What do you think of what the poet has said in the poem?
☆ What are your ideas about friendship based on your own experiences?
6. 补充材料 5（请用来替代第73页的B2: Useful structures）
B2: Useful grammatical structures
1. It looked as if she were dead.
1) Why doesn’t she buy us a drink? It isn’t as if she had no money. (=she has plenty of money.)
2) - “He’s gone.”
- “As if I cared.” (=I don’t care at all.)
*But sometimes no subjunctive mood is needed:
1) It looks as if it is going to rain.
2) We’ve missed the bus. It looks as if (=It seems) we’ll have to walk.
3) He shook his head as if to say “Don’t trust her”.
2. …and knowing what to do can mean difference between life and death.
1) Calling an ambulance or the police is important.
2) Using the mouth-to-mouth method is effective when we try to start his or her breathing at once.
3) Learning about first aid is the best way to make sure that we will not have to feel that we could have done more.
3. We can prepare for an emergency by learning more about first aid.
1) We can do a lot of good by simply asking “are you all right?”
2) This can be done by gently tipping the person’s head back slightly.
3) We can also check a person’s pulse by putting a finger on the person’s neck or wrist.
4. But most of us will eventually find ourselves in a situation where we or someone else needs help.
1) When he woke up, he found himself in the hospital.
When we arrived, we found him in bed.
I didn’t find her an easy woman to deal with.
2) Think of a situation where this phrase can be used.
7. 补充材料 6（请用来替代第81页的B2: Useful grammatical structures, 注意连原来的第1题调到Useful phrases处，作为第8点。）
7. take action: do something with the intention of gaining a desired result
1) We have to take firm action to deal with the most serious environmental problem.
2) Conferences like the Earth Summit help people understand that there exist serious problems and that there’s still time to take action.
8. 1. advise (against) doing sth. / advise sb. (not) to do sth. / advise that sb. (should) do sth.
1) The lawyers have advised against signing the contract.
2) I advise your leaving early /that you leave early.
3) I would advise people not to buy products that harm the environment.
4) I advised her to wait. =I advised that she (should) wait.
B2: Useful grammatical structures
1．Since then, several Earth Summits have been held and much progress has been made.
1) Since its publication, this book has been translated into many languages.
2) Since the 1980s, swift progress has been made in culture and education.
3) Since the introduction of the new method, production costs have been greatly reduced.
2. Most of these deaths happen in rural areas, where people burn wood and coal to cook food and stay warm.
1) I’m going to visit Kungming, where you can see flowers all the year round.
2) Guangzhou is a modern city, where you can find a lot of huge buildings.
3) Have you heard of the new maglev train, which is environmentally friendly, energy-saving and travels at an amazing speed?
3. If we are to develop the world successfully, we must make sure that everyone is able to take part in the new world we create.
1) If we were to panic, we would not be able to help.
2) If we were to get hurt trying to save someone, we would not be able to help.
3) Visitors are to leave when the bell rings.
4. All too often, global development means that rich people get richer while the poor get poorer.
1) Schools in cities tend to be better equipped, while those in the country are relatively poor.
2) Their country has plenty of oil, while ours has none.
3) He is fat and tall while his wife is thin and short.
5. Only by changing the way we live can we save the earth.
1) Not until we know more will we be able to improve the situation.
2) Only when people are better educated will there be a chance of less violence and fewer wars.
3) Not until you've done your homework can you go out and play.
8. 补充材料 7（请用来替代第88页的B2: Useful structures）
B2: Useful grammatical structures
1. You asked me to write you something about the death of my uncle Pliny, who died in an unforgettable disaster.
1) He was brought in a letter from his friend’s wife Rectina, who was frightened by the danger.
2) Frank Lloyd Wright, who built an art museum in New York, found himself inspired by Japanese seashells.
3) “The only trouble,” Hawking, who is British, says, “is that it gives me an American accent.”
2. He ordered a boat be prepared.
In clauses after “order”, “suggest”, “insist”, “demand”, “require”, and so on, “should + verb” structure is usually used and “should” can be omitted.
1) He suggested that the patient (should) be sent to hospital at once.
2) The teacher demanded that we (should) get there before eight the next morning.
3. The flames came from the homes of farmers who had left in a panic with fires still on.
1) The emperor appeared, with nothing on.
2) She is sound asleep, with all the lights on.
4. Helped by two slaves, the scientist stood up, and immediately fell down, dead.
Sometimes adjectives can be used as adverbial to indicate a state.
1) They came in, tired and hungry.
2) The sun rises red in the east.
3) The old lady lay in bed, awake all the night.
5. Another one like this, and that’s the last of her.
1) One more minute, and I’ll finish my essay.
(=If you give me one more minute, I’ll finish my essay.)
2) Study harder, and you’ll pass the exam.
(=If you study harder, you’ll pass the exam.)
3) Study harder, or you’ll fail the exam.
(=If you don’t study harder, you’ll fail the exam.)
9. 补充材料 8（请插在第56页，将原来的B2: 改为B3。）
B2: Useful grammatical structures
1. E-commerce, or business done on the Internet, is becoming more popular.
1) The smaller islands, such as the Isle of Man, are neither part of the United Kingdom nor independent.
2) Some disease, for example smallpox, have already been successfully defeated.
3) Instead of searching a crowded store for basic goods, such as food and clothes, people want to go to a pleasant mall.
2. Current trends indicate that transportation is becoming cleaner, faster and safer.
1) New technology is being used to make sure that the cars we use do not pollute the air.
2) They realize that it is of great value to record and teach them to the younger generation.
3) Many people in the West say that English is one of the easiest languages to learn.
3. The way we view learning and knowledge is also changing.
1) Many companies have already begun reforming the way they do business.
2) New discoveries may lead to changes in the way diseases are cured and medicines are made.
3) I could tell by the way he looked at me that he was annoyed.
4. They are careful about what they eat and exercise regularly.
1) The schools of the future will probably be quite different from what they are today.
2) Lei Feng is always remembered for what he did and said.
3) We can never be satisfied with what we have achieved.
普通高中人教版教材
掌握英语
高中二年级第一学期
广东省教学教材研究室 编
广东教育出版社
说 明
《掌握英语》是广东省教学教材研究室组织编写的《掌握学习指导丛书》之一。本书是根据人民教育出版社20重新修订的并经全国中小学教材审定委员会审查通过的全日制普通高级中学教科书（必修）《英语》（Senior English for China Student’s Book），并参照了九年义务教育、高级中学《英语课程标准》的要求编写的。目的是积极贯彻新课程标准精神，通过围绕课本内容补充大量的相关材料帮助学生学习和训练，达到开拓学生的学习视野，丰富学生的知识面，帮助他们掌握教学内容，提高学习成效的目的。
本书共四册，每学期一册。每册按课本单元编写，每单元由两大板块组成：Language Focus和Integrating skills。 Language focus 有Word study和 Grammar两部分。该板块主要是围绕单元的语言知识进行解释与扩充，巩固和提高。Integrating skills由Listening and talking 和Reading and writing两大部分组成。该板块的内容与话题相关，并注重情景设置，配有不同形式的听、读材料和训练，以及说、写活动任务。目的是在大量的内容相关、循环反复的训练中培养学生的综合运用语言的能力。本书构思新颖，用英语编写，有一定的广度和难度，并积极体现新课标精神。本册为第二册（上），供高中二年级第一学期使用。
《掌握英语》是由黄志红老师组织，肖鹏老师构思，编写组集体讨论，最后分工编写而成的。参加编写的人员有：第1-4单元：由肖鹏老师和沈益老师共同编写，第5-6单元：由王晓贤老师编写；第7-10单元：由镇祝桂老师和黄广萍老师编写。
本书由唐锡玲老师负责统稿、审稿，罗耀权老师负责校对。
本书配有录音带、参考答案和听力录音材料，方便师生使用。
本书编写组
208月
目 录
Unit 1----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 2 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 3-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 4 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 5 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 6 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 7 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 8 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 9 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 10 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
参考答案---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
听力原文录音材料-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Unit 1
Making a difference
Part I
【Language focus】
A: Word study
A1: Topic words
What makes a great scientist differ from others? What are the characteristics of a successful scientist? What’s the scientific spirit? According to the passage, how can we make a difference? Try to find out as many words and phrases as you can to describe a famous scientist. By talking about the great scientists and their famous quotes, we students will be surely encouraged to devote ourselves to science. Do you know any other well-known sayings? If you do, enter more information into the chart.
Fill in the chart.
Scientists The quotes Meaning
Benjamin Franklin Never leave that until tomorrow.
Thomas Edison Achievement provides the only real
pleasure in life.
Albert Einstein Try not to become a man of success
but rather try to become a man of value.
Isaac Newton If I have done the public any service,
it’s due to patient thought.
Copernicus It’s man’s duty to be courageous
enough to seek for truth.
A2: Tips for word study
1. Match the new words on the left with their meanings on the right.
Words Meanings
1. undertake A. say, tell in advance
2. seek B. eager to know or learn
3. predict C. start a piece of work
4. debate D. able to learn and understand things easily
5. curious E. look for, try to find
6. intelligent F. easy to understand or see
7. obvious G. be the same (with sth. else.)
8. match H. to discuss a subject in a formal way
9. disable I. of science
10. scientific J. to make someone unable to use a part of their body properly
2. Choose one word from the above column on the left to finish the sentences. Pay attention to the correct forms of the words.
1) Nothing __________, nothing find.
2) All human beings are much more _________ than animals.
3) Mr. Smith __________ a new experiment last year.
4) It’s _________ that she knew little about it.
5) I was _________ to know what would happen.
6) They had a heated __________ with the manager.
7) The weather bureau _________ rain for tomorrow.
8) A ___________ theory is the result of the _________method.
9) This painting doesn’t __________the curtains.
10) Stephen Hawking, the_____________ scientist, devotes himself to science and achieves great success.
B: Grammar
B1. Useful phrases
1. work on: be busy with
1) She has been working on the book since the beginning of this year.
2) They began to work on inventing a new machine for office work.
3) I worked on a report of the experiment last night.
2. go by: pass
1) As months went by, the work seemed endless.
2) Several years went by before we met again.
3) As time goes by, her hair is turning gray.
3. go on with: continue with
1) Let’s go on with our discussion.
2) Just go on with your own work. It’s none of your business.
3) Jack went abroad to go on with his study last month.
4. dream of: imagine
1) When I was a little girl, I always dreamed of becoming a teacher.
2) Peter used to dream of living on a desert island.
3) He knew the wonderful place he dreamed of did not exist.
5. turn out: prove (to be)
1) Sometimes a bad thing turns out to be a good one.
2) The plan of raising penguins in Guangzhou turned out a failure.
3) To our surprise, the final exam turned out to be very easy.
6. use up: run out of ; exhausted
1) The soldiers were very tired. They have used up all their energy.
2) They were so hungry that they used up all the food at breakfast.
3) The boy has used up all his pocket money in only three days.
7. make a difference: have an important effect or influence on something or someone
1) One false step will make great difference .
2) It makes no difference to me whether you go or stay.
3) Painting the walls white will make a big difference to this room.
8. be satisfied with: be pleased with
1) We’re satisfied with the result of the experiment.
2) The teacher was very satisfied with your progress.
3) Are you satisfied with what he has done so far?
9. what if: used to ask what you should do or what the result will be if something happens, especially something unpleasant
1) What if this plan of yours fails, what then?
2) What if a storm should come up?
3) － What if it rains tomorrow?
－We'll just have to postpone the picnic.
10. the other way around: in the opposite way
1) You can try to consider it in the other way around.
2) As is known to all, the earth moves around the sun, not the other way around.
3) It is vital to match the software to the task, not the other way around.
B2: Useful grammatical structures
1. There did not seem much point in working on my PhD ―I did not expect to survive that long.
1) There’s no point in wasting time― He has never been that late before.
2) What’s the point of arguing further? ― I didn’t expect he was that rude.
3) There is very little point in protesting― The manager was that angry.
2. Nor did he let the disease stop him from living the kind of life he had always dreamt of.
1) My brother didn’t watch TV last night. Nor did my mother.
2) I don’t think it is necessary to carry out this plan. Nor does he.
3) She could hardly speak Japanese. Nor could I.
3. In the book, Hawking explains both what it means to be a scientist and how science works.
1) Your idea won’t work in practice.
2) My brain doesn’t seem to be working very well today.
3) The medicine I took worked. I feel much better now.
4. People laughed at Zhang Heng when he first introduced his seismograph and it was only later that the world recognized his greatness.
1) It was only when I read his poems for the second time that I began to appreciate their beauty.
2) It was because of bad weather that the football match had to be put off.
3) Was it during the Second World War that the building was destroyed?
5. Everyone has his or her special skills and interests, and only by discovering what we do best can we hope to reach our goals and truly make a difference.
1) Only in this way can we solve the difficult problem.
2) Only when one loses freedom does he know its value.
3) Only when the math class began did he realize that he had left his book at home.
B3: Key grammatical items
The Infinitive
The structure of the Infinitive is “ to do”, its negative form is “not to do”. It can be used as the subject, object, attribute, adverbial and so on.
1. The subject
1) To see is to believe.
2) To live is to work.
3) It is important for us to learn English well.
2. The object
1) I want to go to Xinjiang with Dad next month.
2) They decided to begin the experiment at once.
3) We find it necessary to learn computer.
3. The attribute
1) There is nothing to worry about.
2) They have a large house to live in.
3) She was the first to come and the last to leave.
4. The adverbial
4) The old man sat down to have a rest.
5) Tom hurried to the school to find nobody there.
6) In order to pass the exam, all the students are working hard.
C: Key grammatical items and practice
Exercises
1. Read the following sentences and decide if the underlined parts are used as subjects, objects, attributes or adverbials.
1) To talk to Stephen Hawking is a great pleasure. ( )
2) To be a teacher, one must first be a student. ( )
3) Learn to walk before you run. ( )
4) I have something important to tell you. ( )
5) It takes time to know a man. ( )
6) Please remember to bring me the book I want. ( )
7) She gets up early every day in order to catch the early bus. ( )
8) I have got a lot of work to do even on Sunday. ( )
2. Choose the best answer.
1) The purpose of new technology is to make life easier, _______ it more difficult.
A. not make B. not to make
C. not making D. do not make
2) ----- The light in the office is still on.
----- Oh, I forgot ________________when I left.
A. turning it off B. turn it off
C. to turn it off D. having turned it off
3) Paul doesn’t have to be made _________. He always works hard.
A. learn B. to learn
C. learned D. learning
4) I’ve worked with children before, so I know what _________ in my new job.
A. expected B. expects
C. to expect D. to be expecting
5) Mr. Smith warned her daughter ___________ after drinking.
A. never to drive B. to never drive
C. never drinking D. never drive
6) Madame Curie is believed ____________ the radium.
A. to discover B. discovered
C. discovering D. to have discovered
3. Complete the following sentences.
1) 说比做容易。
_________ is much easier than ________.
2) 爱和被爱都是最大的幸福。
__________ and _____________ are both great happiness.
3) 汤姆希望有人邀请他参加晚会。
Tom hopes _______________ to the party.
4) 快点！我们没时间了。
Hurry up! We have no time ____________.
5) 据说他到过长城两次。
He is said _____________to the Great Wall twice.
6) 听到这消息，她激动得说不出话。
On hearing the news, she was too excited __________.
Part II
Integrating skills
A: Listening and speaking
A1: Listen to the tape twice and write out the missing words.
The Internet has made a great ___1___in our life. It makes it possible for people all over the world to ___2___ with one another quickly and cheaply. It is a computer network that uses the telephone system to link together millions of ___3___ around the world. Once you’re connected to the Internet, there are lots and lots of different things you can do. You can send ___4___ to your friends or you can look through all sorts of ___5___ on something called the World Wide Web.
There are all sorts of computers connected to the___6___. Most are small machines sitting on people’s ___7___ but many are powerful computers in universities, government offices or large companies. All these computers ___8___ by people and organizations, but no one actually owns the Internet itself. This means that no single company or group can ___9___ what happens on the Internet. Also no one really knows how many people are connected to it. It’s thought that there could be ___10___ people on the Net, connected to over 15 million computers!
A2: Listen to the tape twice and choose the best answer.
1. Who is John Vincent Atanasoff?
A. The inventor of Internet.
B. The inventor of electronic digital computer.
C. The inventor of computer controller.
2. What can you get from the passage you heard?
A. We can live quite well without any computers around us today.
B. We will find ourselves helpless without any computers in our life today.
C. Computers don’t work in all parts of our life toady.
3. How many fields where computers are used does the writer mention in the passage?
A. About nine fields.
B. About ten fields.
C. About eleven fields.
4. When does the computer develop rapidly enough according to the passage?
A. In the last ten years.
B. About twenty years ago.
C. Within the last twenty years.
5. What can you learn from the passage you heard?
A. Computer has changed all aspects of human life.
B. Computer will take all the places of human beings.
C. The capabilities of computers will reach the peak of its technology.
B: Reading and doing
B1: Read the following passage and choose the best one from the words given in the blanks.
Electrifying claims for DNA are dashed
Electrifying claims for DNA are dashed
Can DNA act as electricity conductor(导体)? Some physicists say __1__ (it / that / this) is a very good conductor. Others believe it does not conduct __2__ (electric / electrical / electricity) at all.
However, an agreement in opinion has become known recently. __3__ (Although / But / So) the molecule(分子) can transport electrons __4__ (at / on / over) a length of a few base pairs, allowing it to turn oxidative(氧化) damage __5__ (apart / away / out) from important sections, it fails to conduct over __6__ (long / longer / longest) distances. That will dash long-held __7__ (wants / hopes / wishes) that the self-copying molecule could be controlled and __8__ (use / used / using) to make self-assembling nano-wires(微丝状).
Researchers from the University of California, Los Angeles, have hammered the final nail in the coffin __9__ (by / in / with) a thorough and complete paper offered to Physical Review Letters. They show that conduction in a strand of DNA __10__ (various / variety / varies) directly with humidity(湿度)。 This shows that it is the layer of water molecules putting into a fitting case of the DNA, that is conducting over long distances, not the DNA itself,
“DNA __11__ (has / is / was) a water layer under practically any conditions. We have systematically changed __12__ (a / any / the) number of water layers and shown that the conductivity arises __13__ (away / from / out) water molecules, not the electrons on the DNA,” says George Gruner.
B2: Read the passage and pick up the best choice for each blank.
Cats can catch SARS - and pass it on
Cats can become infected (传染) with the SARS virus - and they can pass it on. But the researcher who made the discovery __1__ that the chance of a person catching SARS from their pet cats is “infinitely remote”.
Albert Osterhaus of Erasmus University in __2__ Netherlands and the other doctors he worked together were the first to recreate SARS in monkeys __3__ infecting them with the SARS coronavirus (冠状病毒). The __4__ proved that the virus __5__ SARS. “But monkey experiments are __6__ expensive. We wanted an alternative animal for __7__ potential drugs and vaccines(疫苗),” Osterhaus told New Scientist.
The team __8__ that cats and ferrets (雪貂) can become infected with SARS. Ferrets __9__ quite ill, with __10__ the same diffuse pneumonia(肺炎) symptoms __11__ humans. The team plans to __12__ studying the disease in ferrets.
The cats, meanwhile, showed no symptoms - but they got rid of the virus, and passed it __13__ the uninfected cats in the same cage. “This shows the virus __14__ more promiscuous(杂交) than we __15__,” says Osterhaus.
1. A. says B. speaks C. talks D. tells
2. A. a B. / C. the D. this
3. A. at B. by C. from D. with
4. A. reason B. illness C. action D. experiment
5. A. causes B. caused C. reasoned D. reasons
6. A. much B. very C. well D. most
7. A. checking B. examining C. puzzling D. testing
8. A. found B. saw C. discovered D. invented
9. A. are B. change C. become D. fall
10. A. many B. much C. little D. few
11. A. like B. that C. as D. similar
12. A. continue B. go C. hold D. stop
13. A. on B. by C. with D. to
14. A. has B. is C. are D. have
15. A. thought B. think C. have D. had
C: Reading comprehension
Passage One
American scientist Morse Solomon has developed an unusual method to make meat softer. First, put a kilogram or more of firm meat in a container filled with water. Add a small amount of explosives. Then, mix carefully and explode. No, Mr. Morse is not attempting to destroy the meat. Instead, he is making it softer and also killing harmful bacteria. Mr. Solomon is a meat scientist with the United States Agricultural Research Service. He began to explore the use of shock waves to soften meat ten years ago. His method is called the Hydrodynamic Pressure Process. The theory is simple. Shock waves from an explosion travel through water to the meat. The shock waves tear small pieces of muscle and other particles away from the meat. This makes the meat softer and easier to eat. The shock waves also reduce the amount of bacteria（细菌） in the meat. The Department of Agriculture says the process could increase food safety for companies that sell meat. Uncooked meat may contain some extremely small living things which might be harmful, such as E. coli. E. coli can make people sick if they eat meat that is not well cooked. The Hydrodynamic Pressure Process may help reduce concerns about harmful bacteria in meat.
Other American scientists attempted to improve the process. They used a thick-walled metal container that was buried in the ground. This device did not improve the quality of the meat as much as the simpler method. However, the scientists found there seemed to be fewer bacteria in the meat than before the process. Scientists had proved that the Hydrodynamic Pressure Process could improve large pieces of meat. Next, they wanted to see if the process reduced bacteria levels in smaller pieces of ground beef that is used to make hamburgers. Their tests showed a reduction of bacteria in ground beef products. Other studies showed that ground beef containing E. coli had no measurable levels of the bacteria after the treatment.
The Hydrodynamic Pressure Process does not kill all bacteria in the meat, however. Mr. Solomon says some good bacteria remain. The agricultural scientists say more studies are needed to see if the method could be used in the meat processing industry.
C1: Choose the best answer for each item.
1. Which of the following titles best summarizes the main idea of the passage?
A. The Life of an American Scientist Morse Solomon.
B. The American Agricultural Research service.
C. An Introduction of the American Meat Processing Industry.
D. An Introduction of the Hydrodynamic Pressure Process.
2. What make meat softer and easier to eat?
A. Some explosives. B. Shock waves.
C. Certain organisms. D. Other particles.
3. The phrase “the simpler method” (Line 5, Para. 3) refers to __________.
A. Thick-walled Containers Burying method
B. Hydrodynamic Pressure Process
C. Bacteria-killing Method
D. Meat-improving Treatment
4. It had been proved that the Hydrodynamic Pressure Process ___________.
A. could improve smaller pieces of ground beef but not large pieces of meat
B. could improve large pieces of meat but not smaller pieces of ground beef
C. could improve large pieces of meat and reduce the bacteria in ground beef as well
D. could improve large pieces of meat but could not reduce the bacteria in ground beef
5. We can learn from the passage that the Hydrodynamic Pressure Process _______.
A. proved to be a great success B. turned out to be a failure
C. remains to be further studied D. needs to be further tested
Passage Two
The great advance in rocket theory 40 years ago showed that liquid-fuel (液态燃料) rockets were far superior in every respect to the skyrocket with its weak solid fuel （固态燃料）, the only kind of rocket then known. However, during the last decade, large solid-fuel rockets with solid fuels about as powerful as liquid fuels have made their appearance, and so many of us often ask a question, “Which one is ‘better’?” Actually, the question is meaningless. It all depends on the purpose. A liquid-fuel rocket is complicated, but has the advantage that it can be controlled beautifully. The burning of the rocket engine can be stopped completely; it can be reigned when fuel pumps. A solid-fuel rocket, on the other hand, is rather simple construction, though hard to build when a really large size is desired. But once you have a solid-fuel rocket, it is ready for action at every notice. A liquid-fuel rocket has to be fueled first and cannot be held in readiness for a very long time after it has been fueled. However, once a solid-fuel rocket has been started to burn, it will keep burning. It cannot be stopped and reigned whenever desired and its thrust (推力) cannot be varied. Because a solid-fuel rocket can be kept ready for a long time, most military missiles use solid fuels, but manned space flight needs the fine adjustments that can only be provided by liquid fuels. It may be added that a liquid-fuel rocket is an expensive device; a large solid-fuel rocket is, by comparison, cheap. But the solid fuel, pound by pound, costs about 10 times as much as the liquid fuel. So you have, on one hand, an expensive rocket with a cheap fuel and on the other hand a comparatively cheap rocket with an expensive fuel.
C2: Answer the following questions in your own words, with a phrase or a sentence.
1. What is the author’s attitude towards a solid-fuel and a liquid-fuel rocket?
___________________________________________________________
2. The sold-fuel rocket is comparatively cheap because of ____________________
_________________________________________________________________
3. The most important consideration for a manned space flight is that the rocket is
______________________________________________________________.
4. What is characteristic of the solid-fuel rocket?
______________________________________________________________.
5. Liquid-fuel rockets are cheap to operate because of _______________________
_________________________________________________________________
Unit Two
News Media
Part I
【Language focus】
A: Word study
A1: Topic words
In the modern world there are many means of communication. Besides radio, we have television, magazines, newspapers and websites etc. All the news media can help us learn about what’s happening in the world around us. Which of the news media mentioned in this unit do you think is the most convenient and cheapest to use? Try to find out as many words as possible while talking about the news media.
News broadcast, website, report, editor, interview…
Do you know the programmes given below? Please translate them into Chinese.
1) Topics in Focus 2) Health Club
3) News Probe 4) Business TV
5) Soccer Night 6) China News
7) China Today 8) Man and Nature
9) Sunday Topics 10) Chinese Cooking
11) English News 12) Oriental Fashion
13) Super Variety Show 14) World Economic Report
15) Science and Technology Review 16) Traditional Chinese Medicine
17) Time Together across the Strait 18) Spring Festival Gala Evening
A2: Tips for word study
1. Match the new words on the left with their meanings on the right.
Words Meaning
1. reliable A. take no notice of
2. relate B. to hurt a person, animal, or part of your body
3. present (v.) C. a natural ability to do something well
4. addict D. to be connected to; to be about someone or something
5. ignore E. able to be trusted and depended on
6. update F. introduce, offer, show or display
7. injure G. to accept or allow something although you do not like it
8. tolerate H. like something very much and do or have it too often
9. inform I. to tell, to give information to
10.talent J. make something more modern
2. Use the correct forms from the words above on the left to complete the sentences.
1) Mary ________ herself while cycling. She broke her left arm.
2) My uncle is hopelessly _________ to smoking.
3) Jim is capable and honest. He is a _________ employee.
4) The new principal _______ a report of his plan to all the teachers.
5) Jack is very rude. How can you _________ his bad manners?
6) This letter_________ to the sale of the car. If you want the information, read it!
7) We mustn’t _______ the fact that the world's population is increasing rapidly.
8) Doctors should ________patients about the possible side effects of the medicine.
9) The girl who wants to become a dancer has a _________ for dancing.
10) Do you know how to ________ your computer with what the Internet offers?
B. Grammar
B1. Useful phrases
1. go up: rise , increase
1) Prices of fruit and vegetables have gone up recently.
2) The products from this factory have gone up in quality.
3) It has been very hot this week. The temperature keeps going up!
2. burn down: destroy, damage or injure by fire
1) Their house burnt down while they were away on holiday.
2) The old town hall was burnt down in World War One .
3) The drugs were burnt down in public yesterday.
3. relate …to: have a connection with sth.
1) It is important to relate the results to the cause.
2) To what events did your remarks relate?
3) I can’t relate what he does to what he says.
4. be addicted to: unable to stop taking or using sth. as a habit
1) It isn’t good for children to be addicted to computer games.
2) His son is addicted to reading detective novels.
3) It is so bad that some young people are addicted to drugs.
5. even if: used to emphasize that something will still be true if another thing happens
1) Even if I have to sell my house, I’ll keep my business going.
2) She’s going to have problems finding a job even if she gets her A levels.
3) I would never eat meat, even if I was really hungry
6. draw attention to: to make someone notice someone or something
1) The naughty boy is always trying to draw attention to himself. in class.
2) He drew my attention to an error in the report
3) The purpose of the article was to draw attention to the problems faced by single parents.
7. on all sides: on every side
1) There are mountains on all sides of the village.
2) The soldiers were attacking the enemy on all sides.
3) The country is surrounded on all sides by South Africa.
8. look up to: show respect to
1) Students should look up to their teachers.
2) We all look up to Bill for his courage and determination.
3) The fans usually look up to the great pop singers.
B2: Useful grammatical structures
1. Newspapers and other media do more than simply record what happens.
1) Hibernation is more than sleep.
2) Peace is much more than the absence of war.
3) Being a good listener means much more than just “listening with ears”.
2. They also make sure that readers can relate to the stories.
1) I think I locked the door but we’d better make sure.
2) He must take full responsibility for making sure that everyone is doing fine.
3) Make sure that you arrive here on time.
3. The two reporters agreed to switch roles for once and be the interviewees rather than the interviewers in order to let us know about their work and how the news we read is made and written.
1) He was engaged in writing rather than reading the newspaper.
2) I’d prefer to go in summer rather than in winter.
3) She likes to keep things rather than throw them away.
4. A reporter begins by contacting the people to be interviewed and then prepares questions.
1) The man to be interviewed this afternoon was the director of the company.
2) The plan to be discussed is a five-year plan.
3) The building to be built is for the foreign experts.
5. The story I like best is about an ordinary young woman who tried to adapt to her new life after having studied abroad.
1) After they moved to Canada, the children adapted to the changes very well.
2) Mary adapted herself to the cold weather soon.
3) You should try your best to adapt yourself to the new environment.
6. The result is a better understanding of the world on all sides, leading to a future world where people from all countries are respected and different views and opinions are tolerated.
1) Do you still remember the events that leading to the start of the First World War?
2) Do you believe that hard work leads to success?
3) Too much work and too little rest led to his poor health.
B3: Key grammatical item
The Past Participle used as Attribute and Predicative
The Past Participle can be used as Attribute and Predicative.
1. Attribute
1) The broken cup has been thrown outside.
2) The ground is covered with fallen leaves.
3) Mr. Brown is an experienced expert on DNA.
2. Predicative.
1) The bus is too crowded.
2) Those happy days are past and gone.
3) All the windows are closed .No wonder it’s so hot here.
Question:
What’s the difference between past participles and present participles?
If we want to say how we feel about something, we can use the past participles like interested, surprised, etc. To talk about the persons or things that make us feel interested, surprised, etc., we use present participles. This kind of the participles is used as adjectives to refer to a state or a quality.
Examples:
1) The story he told me is interesting, and I’m interested in it.
2) The exciting game is making us more and more excited.
C: Key grammatical items &practice
Exercises
1. Fill in the missing words, using the correct forms.
1) We sent the _______ (injure) girl to hospital as quickly as we could.
2) The old man lived in the house _________ (build) by his father.
3) The streets are _____________ (crowd) so it’s hard to cross.
4) The film was so__________(move) that we were all deeply _______(move).
5) The speech given by the old scientist was _________ (inspire). All the students were _______ (inspire).
6) In autumn, you can see many ________ (fall) leaves everywhere.
7) Tom has nothing to do. He feels ________ (bore) and lonely.
8) We waited for a long time for the results but they turned out to be very __________ (disappoint).
2. Choose the best answer.
1) The Olympic Games, _________ in 776 B.C., didn’t include women until 1912.
A. first playing B. to be first played
C. first played D. to be playing
2) Most of the artists _________ to the party were from South Africa.
A. invited B. to invite
C. being invited D. had been invited
3) The computer center, _________ last year, is very popular among the students in this school.
A. open B. opening C. having opened D. opened
4) The first textbooks _________ for teaching English as a foreign language came out in the 16th century.
A. to be written B. written
C. being written D. having written
5) What’s the language ________ in Germany?
A. speaking B. spoken C. be spoken D. to speak
6) This news sounds __________.
A. encouraging B. encouraged C. encourage D. to encourage
7) - How did Bob do in the exams this time?
- Well, his father seems _______ with his results.
A. pleasing B. please C. pleased D. to please
8) - How did the audience receive the new play ?
- They got very ________.
A. exciting B. excite C. excitedly D. excited
Part II
Integrating skills
A: Listening and speaking
A1: Listen to the tape twice and choose the best answer.
Questions for passage One
1. Where will Tom Thomson be offered to give his first solo exhibition?
A. In Ontario. B. In St. Petersburg.
C. In the Art Gallery of Canada.
2. How long have the Art Gallery and the museum prepared for Tom’s first solo show?
A. More than two years. B. More than four years. C. Over five years.
3. How many buildings has the Hermitage got according to the passage?
A. Six. B. Four. C. Five.
Questions for passage Two
4. Where will Shayne Dark be invited to show his talents?
A. In Kingston. B. In Hartington. C. In Athens.
5. What does Shayne Dark do according to the passage?
A. A sportsman. B. An artist. C. An Olympic official.
6. How many Canadians are chosen to display their works?
A. One. B. Two. C. Three.
7. Where will Mr. Dark display his Donna’s Room?
A. At a Canadian art festival. B. At a National art festival.
C. At an international art festival.
A2: Listen to the tape twice and write out the missing words.
In Georgia, fifteen were arrested on June 10, , for sitting in front of a security fence on a highway. The highway had been closed to traffic because the leaders of the Group of Eight countries were at their annual summit which was held on Sea Island, Georgia this year. The __(1)__ still stood despite the G-8 leaders had already __(2)__ for their closing press conference in Savannah, Georgia. The leaders of the US, Canada, Japan, Russia, __(3)__ , Italy, Britain, France, and also the European Union, __(4)__ it G-8 plus one, had already left Sea Island. The fence that blocked the roadway, the first barrier __(5)__ encountered other than armed forces, and now only a symbol of state power, was no longer__(6)___,. Similarly, the marchers knew the symbolism of their __(7)__ , a nearly eight-mile “death march” in the blazing sun __(8)__ enough water (the authorities only supplied water to protesters after the march when a bus took the __(9)__ protesters, those not arrested or who had not dropped out of the march, which advanced toward the __(10)__ to Sea Island.) These marchers earlier __(11)__ off from a pro-Palestine march after a rally at a public park with a __(12)__of speakers who had traveled to Palestine or Israel.
B: Reading and doing
B1: Read the following passage carefully and choose the suitable one for each blank from the words given in the slot.
interviews explores silver by guiding honours former earned
After 23 years of __1__ readers through the maelstrom of modern arts and culture, Border Crossings has earned one of the highest __2__ in the Canadian magazine world: the President's Medal conferred __3__ the National Magazine Awards Foundation....Published from an office nestled among the __4__warehouses of Winnipeg's Exchange District, Border Crossings has won 50 gold and __5__ medals at the National and Western Magazine Awards, and __6__ 129 award nominations. The magazine __7__ the arts from Canada and around the world with articles, __8__ , drawings and photographs.
B2: Read the following passages carefully and choose the best answer from A、B、C and D.
Passage One
When new contract negotiations between the CBC and the Canadian Media Guild begin on May 12, one can expect some major sparks to fly. The CMG, which represents all of the public __1__ employees -- about 6,100 members -- __2__ voicing anger over the corporation's decision last week to issue layoff __3__ redundancy notices to about 30 employees in __4__ current-affairs and sports departments....Most of the 30 staffers are being temporarily__5__ to other shows or units --a move union senior staff representative Dan Oldfield calls “a flagrant abuse of the process. First of __6__, they're clearly targeting employees who have been working there for longer years -- 15, 20, 25 years -- when the redundancy clauses were designed __7__ more junior employees. And if they're being assigned to other jobs, then those jobs ought to be posted. “Make it an open book.” CBC spokeswoman Ruth-Ellen Soles denies the __8__. “There is no reason to say that we are __9__ longer-serving employees,” she said. “And we're sticking to the agreement with respect to the redeployment of our staff. We have worked very hard to find positions for those __10__, are continuing to do this with the union, and are optimistic that more of the staff will be placed.”
1. A. broadcaster’s B. broadcaster C. broadcasters D. broadcasters’
2. A. are B. is C. were D. was
3. A. and B. but C. or D. so
4. A. its B. their C. it’s D. theirs
5. A. reassigning B. assigning C. assigned D. reassigned
6. A. it B. all C. which D. that
7. A. at B. with C. for D. from
8. A. charge B. charging C. charged D. charges
9. A. targeting B. aiming C. attacking D. shooting
10. A. affect B. effect C. effected D. affected
Passage Two
Hope springs eternal in the world of book publishing -- hope that, contrary to past experience, every new book will be a bestseller and every bookstore will be filled with eager readers. That optimism bubbled up at [Toronto's] Metro Convention Centre __1__ the weekend as thousands of booksellers, authors, publishers, and other industry professionals __2__ together for this year's Book Expo Canada to hear about __3__ and future titles over breakfasts and lunches and toast authors with champagne....Book Expo, which __4__ yesterday, is not open to the public. Reed Exhibitions, which __5__ took over the trade show from the Canadian Books Sellers Association four years ago, has been working to attract more booksellers from __6__ the country, as well as __7__ exhibitors. Last year, there were 2,257 visitors and this year show manager Jennifer Sickinger said attendance was up __8__ 50 per cent.
1. A. at B. by C. over D. with
2. A. came B. went C. hurried D. stayed
3. A. old C. late C. present D. new
4. A. completed B. ended C. finished D. over
5. A. came B. got C. made D. took
6. A. across B. away C. over D. through
7. A. many B. more C. much D. same
8. A. at B. by C. from D. over
C: Reading comprehension
Passage One
The Internet has brought great changes in language teaching and learning. As English is the main language of science and technology, world-wide communications on the Internet are mainly conducted in the English language. In fact, the general dominance of the English language on the Internet has worked to further encourage the learning and use of English, especially among those whose native language is not English.
Using the Internet for English teaching is very new. However, as a resource in the hands of a skilled teacher, the Internet can provide a wealth of materials with which the skilled teacher can build encouragement.
Through booking electronic magazines, taking part in electronic discussion and attending conferences on the Internet, the teacher can share views and ideas with far–off colleagues quickly, easily and inexpensively. This is especially attractive and helpful for those in separated geographical areas.
C1: Answer the following questions in your own words.
1. What does the passage mainly tell about?
____________________________________
2. What does the underlined word conducted in the first paragraph mean?
________________________________________________________
3. What can you get from the statement of the writer in the third paragraph?
___________________________________________________________
C2: Put the following into Chinese.
1. The Internet has brought great changes in language learning.
_______________________________________________
2. Using the Internet for English teaching is very new.
_________________________________________
3. This is especially attractive and helpful for those in separated geographical areas.
_________________________________________________________________
Passage Two
Phone books have white, blue and yellow pages. The white pages list people with phones by last name. The blue pages contain numbers of city services, government services, and public schools. Business and professional services are listed in a special directory - the Yellow Pages.
The area covered by one area code may be small or large. For example, New York City has one code area, but so does the whole state of Oregon. There is an area code of map of the US and Canada in the front of the white pages.
Pay phones have numbers in the US. This means you can call a friend at a phone booth. Or if you are making a long distance call and run out of money, give the number on your phone to the person you're talking to. Then hang up the receiver and they can call you back.
If you make a long distance call and get a wrong number, call the operator and explain what happened. This means that you can make the call again to the right number without having to pay more money; or you can have the phone company mail you a credit coupon that has the same value as the phone call.
Some companies advertise a service called WATS. You can dial a special number without a long distance charge. These are called “toll-free numbers” and the area code for all of them is 800. WATS means Wide Area Telephone Service.
C3: Choose the best answer for each item.
1. In the yellow pages, you can find a list of _______.
A. people with phones B. public schools
C. professional services D. city services
2. You can find an area code map ________.
A. in the white pages B. in the yellow pages
C. in the blue pages D. in all the pages above
3. If you run out of money when making a long distance call, ______.
A. you can tell the one on the phone your phone number and wait to be called back
B. you can tell the one on the phone your number, hold on and wait to be called back.
C. you must hang up and stop making any calls
D. you have to run out and borrow some money
4. A credit coupon _______.
A. is used to buy a phone B. has no value at all
C. has more value than the phone call D. has the same value as the phone call
5. The underlined phrases “toll-free numbers” means _______.
A. an area code B. a telephone service
C. a free long distance call D. WATS
Passage Three
Next G-8 also isolated
Next year's G-8 meeting in Gleneagle, Scotland, follows the Sea Island pattern in its luxurious island location, highly defensible area, limited public chances for approach and far from major population centers.
One G-8 expert said he does not expect British officials to copy everything their observers saw here. “The security(安全) presence here in Savannah has been very noticeable and it makes local people uncomfortable,” said Sir Nicholas Bayne, a former U.K. diplomat and professor at the London School of Economics. “I'm sure the British will try and make it less noticeable.”
While some previous international economic gatherings in more urban areas - a World Trade Organization meeting in Seattle in and a G-8 in Genoa, Italy, in , in particular - caused violent actions and an international trade conference in Miami was marred by a heavy-handed police crackdown, this week's G-8 summit in coastal Georgia was notable for careful planning and a law enforcement blanket.
Not only did Sea Island avoid acts of terrorism and violent protests, but the number of petty crimes, burglaries and car thefts fell in Savannah, the largest nearby city, which was the center for media and support staff for the world leaders.
Sea Island's security formula included a division-strength military and police team numbering about 20,000, high-tech NASA-styled controlled rooms where linked computers monitored every downtown park and intersection, and a rapid but measured police response at the first hint of trouble.
The tactics already are being copied for Boston, New York and other American cities scheduled to host major events, law enforcement officials said.
Much of the military hardware has been present in Washington since the Sept. 11, 2001, terrorist attacks, but street closings around the National Cathedral today and generally heavier law enforcement presence echo the G-8 model, officials said.
Boston will be host to the Democratic National Convention(民主党全国代表大会) in July. The Republican Convention(共和党代表大会) is in New York in August. Neither city has the isolation of Sea Island, but police observers were on hand to see how Savannah handled its role in the summit.
“I liken this to sports - if you're a pro team and you're going to play a big game, you want to look at the game film,'' said Robert O'Toole, commander of the Boston Police Department's special operations division.
The Secret Service is the lead agency at national security events, including the political parties' presidential nominating conventions. It, too, will refine its plans based on experiences here.
”We learn from every event, and we adapt,“ said Malcolm Wiley, an Atlanta-based Secret Service agent on duty in Savannah during the summit. ”Lessons learned here will definitely be useful going forward.“
C4: Guess the meanings of the underlined parts in the sentences below.
1. …follows the Sea Island pattern in its luxurious island location, highly defensible terrain, …
A. very comfortable and expensive B. removed and separated
C. very comfortable but not too dear D. nearby or close to
2. …in particular - caused violent actions and an international trade conference in Miami was marred by a heavy-handed police crackdown, …
A. depressed or put down B. spoiled and damaged
C. carried on and worked out D. guarded and defended
3. The tactics already are being replicated for Boston, New York and other American cities scheduled to host major events, law enforcement officials said.
A. special instrument used to defend
B. special ideas for dealing with
C. special positions used by the police
D. special methods used to achieve what you want
4. …, but street closings around the National Cathedral today and generally heavier law enforcement presence echo the G-8 model, officials said.
A. replacement of something B. represents something special
C. something special appears again D. hear something special
5. ”I liken this to sports - if you're a pro team and you're going to play a big game, you want to look at the game film,''
A. regard something as B. compare something to
C. love something very much D. prefer to do something
C5: Give a tick or cross to each sentence below according to the passage above.
( ) 1. It is expected that next G-8 to be held in Scotland may be safer than this one in the USA.
( ) 2. It is not a good idea for the British police to do everything the same as the American police.
( ) 3. G-8 in Genoa had to be put off because the Italian police put down the violent actions there.
( ) 4. The Democratic Convention will be held in New York while the Republic Convention in Boston in August.
( ) 5. All the police think what they have experienced during the summit can teach them a lot.
Unit 3
Art and architecture
Part I
【Language focus】
A: Word study
A1: Topic words
Do you like art and architecture? Do you want to be an artist or an architect? Definitely a lot of us do. What words and phrases do you think will be useful when talking about art and architecture?
building, streets, squares, parks, balcony, wall, roof, hall, stadium, school, hospital, church, factory,
pattern, style, modern-looking, unusual look traditional, straight line,
material, earth, stone, wood, brick steel stone glass concrete
be made of , be covered by, be famous for , look like …
Can you make a comparison between traditional architecture and modern architecture?
Traditional Architecture Modern Architecture
Examples
Characteristics
Materials
Architects
A2: Tips for word study
1. Here are some new words for us to learn in this unit. Can you match the new words on the left with their meanings on the right?
Words Meaning
1) convenient A. make sth. new or original
2) preference B. build, make
3) fantastic C. suitable, handy
4) construct D. way in which sth. is made, shaped, etc.
5) architecture E. like something more than another thing and will choose it if you can
6) style F. to make someone admire or respect you
7) impress G. wild and strange
8) stand H. art and science of building
9) create I. bear, put up with
10) design J. to make a drawing or plan of something that will be made or built
2. Please choose one word from the above column on the left to finish the sentences. Pay attention to the correct forms of the words.
1) Do you think all men are ________ equal?
2) The workers are planning to ________ a bridge across the river.
3) Have you any __________ between tea and coffee?
4) My mother has had her hair cut in a really nice _________.
5) When is the most __________time for us to meet?
6) You can find Norman _________ in this area.
7) I used to like _________ tales of dragons and fairy queens a lot.
8) We were deeply __________ by his unyielding spirit.
9) The book was _________ mainly for children.
10) I can't _______ the way he's always telling people what they should do.
B: Grammar
B1.Useful phrases
1. act as: serve as; play the part of
1) Peter acted as host to the foreign visitors.
2) A trained dog can act as a guide to a blind man.
3) As I don’t know French, please act as my interpreter.
2. fill up with…: make or become completely full
1) Please fill up the tank with petrol.
2) Dad gave me a smile that was filled with pride.
3) On Children’s Day, the air was filled with the sound of young kids’ laughter.
3. belong to: be the property of; be owned
1) China belongs to the third world.
2) The blue sky belongs equally to us all.
3) Victory belongs to the revolutionary people of the world.
4. pull down: destroy sth. / leave sb. in a weak condition
1) We saw the houses pulled down in order to make room for a large square.
2) Since his illness, he is pretty much pulled down.
3) The workers were busy pulling down an old house.
5. remind… of …: cause sb. to remember or be newly aware of sb./sth.
1) He reminds me of his father, especially the way he speaks.
2) The film reminded him of what he had seen in Paris.
3) What you said just now reminded me of an American professor.
6. set aside: kept to be used later; moved to one side or away from you;
1) When it was dark, she set aside her book and lit a candle.
2) Let’s set aside our personal feelings and try to be fair.
3) Jim set aside all objections and stuck to his own idea.
B2: Useful grammatical structures
1. Every great culture in the past had its own ideas of beauty expressed in art and architecture.
1) She had her hair cut last week.
2) He had his bike repaired yesterday.
3) If you want to lose some weight ,you’d better have yourself weighed regularly.
2. In some of his architecture, …the walls seem to be covered with the skin of a fish, while the roof looks like the back of a dragon.
1) I like
篇4：高二（上）全套教案(人教版高二英语上册教案教学设计)
Unit 1
A brief of Stephen Hawking
Stephen Hawking ; born , 1942 Oxford,England.
High School: St Albans School
College: Oxford University
Cambridge University: Do research
Incurable Disease; motorneuron (肌萎缩性侧索硬化症) wheelchair; a computer system made great contributions in physics
Scanning
Why did Stephen Hawking need a PhD?
When did Hawking become famous ?
When did Hawking visit Beijing ?
True or false statements:
1.Hawking was told that he had an incurable disease when he was just 21 years old. T
2.Finally Hawking had to give up PhD and his research
3.He and Roger Penrose made new discoveries about the Big Bang and black holes. T
4.“A Brief History of Time” is too difficult for people to understand.
5.Science is about true facts that never change.
6.When Hawking gives lectures, he always speaks through a computer.
Choice
1. Which of the following best express the main idea of the passage? ______ d
A. Hawking is famous for his new discoveries.
B. People should come to terms with their fate.
C. A scientific theory is always wrong.
D. Anyone with great determination will achieve his success.
2. Hawking became famous in the early 1970s because _____. D
A. he was disabled B. he was a PhD
C. he was sitting in a famous chair D. he made new discoveries about universe
3. According to the passage, what does “an American accent” mean? ______ C
A. Hawking’s accent. B. Hawking’s voice.
C. Sounds translated by computer. D. Accent of some British people.
4. From the passage, we can infer that _____. D
A. Hawking got married to Jane Wilde before he fell ill B. science is always true
C. Hawking is an American D. great scientists always want to know more
Questions
1. What did Steven Hawking do when he was told that he had an incurable disease?
2. How would most people feel when they were told that they had incurable diseases and may not live long?
3. What did Hawking do when visiting China?
4. What did Hawking write in 1988? And what did he explain in the book?
5. According to Professor Hawking, how do people misunderstand science?
6. What is that Hawking does not like about his speech computer?
7. What are the basic steps of the scientific method?
Discussion
How can we grow rice where there is little water?(using the scientific method )
Integrating skills
What’s the characteristic of Galileo Galilei?
Curious creative
Why could Stephen Hawking make contributions to science work? Want to know more
What can be described as the ability to use knowledge? Creativity
Read for the information to complete the table:
Scientists How they make a difference Characteristics
Stephen Hawking Always want to know more;
Never satisfied with a simple answer… Curious
Galileo Galilei Used a microscope and telescope… Curious Believe in what you do
the earth moves around the sun
Zhang Heng Built a model…show how the
position of the stars changed…. Creative..imagination,believe in what you do
Invented seismograph
Unit 2
Step1 Lead in
Do you know what they are?
And do you know how they are made?
Step 2 Pre-reading
The text below is about reporters and newspapers. Look at the title and the pictures. Try to guess which of the following questions the text will answer.
_____ How does a reporter decide what to write?
_____ How much does a newspaper cost?
_____ Why do people read newspapers?
_____ How do newspapers report what happens?
_____ Where do people read newspapers?
_____ How do newspapers help us understand the world?
Topic sentence :Newspapers and other media do more than simply record what happens
How do you decide what you are going to write?
Zhu lin: Before …, discuss … editor…listens, suggests… ( long ＆ important ) …tell…develop Editor’s job----keep …balanced ＆ interesting
Chen ying: …done…before starting; begin by contacting…questions interviewing, how ---ask, get…to talk…After…present….,make sure----reflects…
Which of the articles that you have written do you like best?
Chen Ying: About the efforts Contact museums ＆ interview experts Because …news ＆ story
Zhu Lin : …about an ordinary young woman who…adapt to…life because …with real passion; realize…unique
Topic sentence: The media can often help solve problems and draw attention to situations where help is needed.
Step 3 Careful reading
Now please read the text carefully and try to find out the answers to the following questions.
1.Who were asked to be interviewed?
2.Whom does a reporter have to discuss with before he/she decides what to write? And what is the person’s job?
3.Is interviewing someone difficult? What must a reporter know?
4.Which of the articles that they have written do they like best? Why?
5.What could they write about if they could write any article? Why?
6.What is the basic task for a reporter?
7.What result can TV programmes and printed articles bring to us?
Post reading
1.Which of the Pre-reading questions are answered in the text?
2. If you were a reporter, what would you like to write about?
3. It is important to be a critical reader. How would you “read” the following media messages?
True or false
1.Newspaper and other media just record what happens.
2.The reporter has to discuss with the editor before he/she decides what to write. T
3.Much has been done before the reporter starts writing. T
4.Chen Ying’s favourite story is about an ordinary young woman.
5.The media can often help solve problems and draw attention to situations where help is needed. T
Discussion:
Do you believe these media ?
Unit 3
Scanning
1.When was Modernism invented?
2.Who invented Modernism?
A group of architects who wanted to change society with building that went against people’s feeling of beauty
3.Why did they invent Modernism?
Modernism … in the 1920s by …who …
that went against people’s feeling of beauty. They wanted their buildings…to look natural.
Skimming
Sum up the main idea of the text:
Paragraph 1 Architecture looks at the man-made living environment.
Paragraph 2 Modernism
Paragraph 3 Modern architecture
Paragraph 4 Though modern buildings impress us, they seem hard and unfriendly.
Paragraph 5 Ancient architecture shows us many beautiful buildings.
Paragraph 6 Antonio Gaudi was an architect inspired by nature.
Paragraph 7 There are other modern architecture inspired from nature
Paragraph 8 The new Olympic Stadium.
Part 1(1 para.) Architecture looks at the man-made living environment.
Part 2(2-4 para.) Modernism and modern buildings
Part 3(5 para.) Ancient architecture
Part 4(6-8 para.) Some modern architecture takes examples from nature.
Part 1: Every great culture in the past had its own ideas expressed in art and architecture.
Part 2 How and when modernism came into being?
Part 3: The difference between traditional and modern…, and why ancient architecture…
Part 4: Examples of famous architects and great buildings that take examples from nature.
Answer the following questions
1.Who is Antonio Gaudi?
He is a modern architect. His Building are full of fantastic Colors and shapes and he likes to use some natural materials.
2.Who is Lloyd Wright ?
He is a modern architect, and build an art museum in New York. He was inspired by Japanese seashells.
3. What the materials of modern architecture and the ancient architecture?
Careful reading
1. Every great culture has the same styles for buildings, streets, squares and parks
2. Modernism wants the buildings constructed in a way to look natural.
3. Earth, stone, brick and wood are used in modern architecture.
4. Compared with ancient architecture, modern architecture stands much closer to nature.
5. Both the works of Antonio Gaudi and Frank Lloyd Wright take examples from nature. T
6. The Olympic Stadium in Beijing looks warm and friendly . T
Compare ancient architecture with modern architecture
Shape material feeling example
ancient architecture Nature does not earth,stone, beautiful Taihe Dian
have any straight lines. brick,wood natural the Temple of heaven
Cathedral
modern.. Huge,like boxes with flat steel, glass,
roofs,sharp corners and concrete, hard and Most of modern buildings
glass walls unfriendly look the same
Post reading
Answer the questions on Page20: What do the words in bold refer to?
You do not feel invited to enter them modern buildings
Antonio Gaudi, a Spanish architect, was the first to understand that.
Nature doesn’t have any straight lines.
He only wanted natural materials, such as stone, brick and wood to be used and many parts of his building. Antonio Gaudi’s
Scan the text and find two architects whose work was inspired by nature. What inspired them.
Antonio Gaudi: eyes, bones, fish and a dragon
Frank Lloyd Wright: Japanese seashells
Answer the following question
1.Which two architects were inspired by nature when they designed?
Antonio Gaudi and Frank Lloyd
2. Into which two groups can we divide those materials mentioned in the text?
Traditional materials and modern materials.
Discussion
What’s your feeling about the design of the 2008 Olympic Stadium in Beijing?
Share your design for the 2008 Olympics!!
Unit 4
Scanning
Scan the text and answer the questions.
1.Whose poetry reminds us of Su Dongpo?
John Donne reminds readers of Su Dongpo.
2.Whose poetry reminds Chinese readers of Du Fu or Li Bai?
Wordsworth, Byron, and Keats remind readers of Du Fu and Li Bai.
3.Can you name some famous Chinese poets?
Li Bai, Du Fu, Wang Wei, Bai Juyi etc.
4.Write down 5 key words that you would expect to find in a text about poetry.
Poem, poet, rhyme, style, image (literature, language, form, line)
Fast-reading
Questions
1. What are the differences between poetry and other forms of literature?
2. Whose poetry reminds Chinese readers of Du Fu or Li Bai? Whose of Su Dongpo?
William Wordsworth
George Gordon Byron John Donne
John Keats
Careful-Reading
Para. 1 The characters of poetry.
Para. 2 Chinese ancient poets and poetry.
Para. 3 Early English poets.
Para. 4 English poets of the 19th century.
Para. 5 Why modern poets have special attraction?
Para. 6 The introduction of English poetry to China.
Para. 7 Why more people are interested in English poetry.
Divide the text into 4 parts
Part 1 Para 1 Brief introduction to poetry
Part 2 Para 2 Chinese poetry and poets
Part 3 Para3,4.5 History of English poetry
Part 4 Para 6,7 Poems can be bridges between the east and the west
Choose the best answer
1.Modern English came into being from about the middle of the ____ century. A
A.16th B. 17th C. 18th D. 19th
2. The poetry of Marvell reminds Chinese readers of the poems by ____. C
A.Du Fu B. Li Bai C. Su Dongpo D. Gou Moruo
3. Byron’s “Isles of Greece” is an example of _____. B
A. a sonnet B. romantic poetry C. nature poetry D. modern poetry
4. The wider public in Cina discovered English poetry at the beginning of the _____ century. D
A.17th B. 18th C. 19th. D. 20th
5. The advantage of reading English poetry in Chinese translation is ____. D
A.that you have more advice B. that something of the spirit is lost
C. that you understand it better D. that you learn how to express yourself in new ways
True or False
1.The wider public in China discovered English poetry at the beginning of the 19th century. F
2. Modern English came into being from about the end of the 17th century.
3. The advantage of reading English poetry in Chinese translation is that you understand it better.
Further-understanding
1. When did modern English start ?
Modern English started around the Time of William Shakespeare,towards the end of the sixteenth century .
2. Why do modern poets have their special attraction?
Because they stand closest to us both in the language and images they use .
3. When did Chinese readers start reading more foreign poetry?
Towards the end of the nineteenth century Chinese readers started reading more foreign poetry .
4. What are the differences between poetry and other forms of literature?
① Poetry plays with sounds, words and grammar
② Poetry is difficult to write,but interesting to read
③ Poetry calls up all the colors, feelings,experiences and curious images of a dream world.
there are some words in bold; can you tell what do they refer to?
Para. 1 That makes poetry difficult to write, but very interesting to read.
------Poetry plays with sounds,words and grammar.
Para. 3 Despite its short history,there is a lot of good poetry around.
------English poetry’s
Para. 4 The style and atmosphere in their poems has often…
------William Wordsworth,Byron,John Keats
Para. 5 Finally, modern poets have their special …in the language and images they use.
------modern poets
Para. 7 They can help us to understand each other better,…------poems and literature
Discussion
Are poems good for our life? What can we get from poems?
1. Poems bring passion (激情) to our life.
2. Poems help us to understand life, virtues, beauty and romance…
3. Poems make us know, we are here,we can make our life and the world more colorful!
Unit 5
Lead-in
1.What places are they?
River Thames Oxford university British Museum Thames and Big Ben London Bridge
Listen to the tape and answer the following questions.
1.How countries is the Great Britain made up of?
Three,England,Scotland and Wales.
2.Is there much rain in the Britain Isles?
Yes,there is much rain
3.When did England and Wales make up the Union? 1536.
4.What is the warmest months in the British Isles? July and August
Skimming:
Skim the text and find out the top sentences for each paragraph.
Para. 1: The idea that England stands for Fish&Chips, the Speakers’ corner and the Tower of London is past. (Idea)
Para 2: The British Isles is a group of islands that lies off the west coast of Europe. (Geography)
Para 3: The climate of the British Isles is mild with a lot of rain. (Climate)
Para 4: The culture of the people in the British Isles has received many influences from the European mainland. (Culture)
Para 5: In 1066, all of Great Britain and Ireland was run over by the French. (French influence)
Para 6: The United Kingdom has a long history. (History)
Para 7: In modern times, people throughout the British Isles speak English. (Language)
Read the passage carefully and decide whether the following sentences are true or false:
( )1.Many people around the world study English, and they know a lot about British culture.
( ) 2.Great Britain is made up of four countries.
( T ) 3.The island of Britain is separated from France by the English Channel.
( ) 4.Scotland is colder throughout the year, but receives less rain.
( T ) 5.People from different parts of northern Europe settled in England, so the culture of the people of the British Isles was influenced by them.
( T ) 6.The southern part of Ireland is now an independent republic.
( ) 7. In modern time, people throughout the British Isles only speak English.
Scanning:
Read for details and fill in the form:
Headings Details
Idea Fact unknown: Made up of three kingdoms
Cultural diversity: Different country, common language
Geography Position of Britain: Off the west coast
England: In the east
Scotland: In the north
Wales: In the west
Position of Ireland: West of Britain
Position of the Isle of Man: In the Irish Sea/ between Britain and Ireland
Position of the Channel Islands Southeast of Britain
Climate The British Isles: mild
The Channel Isles: Warmer and sunnier
Scotland: cold
England and Wales: Rains a lot
Culture Influenced by the European mainland
French Influence The reason why many English words end up with French words: ruled by French in 1066
History 1536: England and Wales formed the Union
1707: Scotland joined the union
Ireland used to be: Part of the UK
And now is: An independent republic
Northern Ireland: Part of UK
The Isle of Man and Channel Islands: Ruled by the King of England
Language English, Welsh, Scottish, Gaelic and Irish
Scan the text and answer the following questions
1.What are the most important facts about the United Kingdom?
The United Kingdom is made up of four parts. They are England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland.
2.Which countries make up the British Isles?
Great Britain, Ireland, the Channel Islands and Isle of Man.
3.What are the most important facts about Ireland?
Ireland is a large island in Europe. Northern Ireland is part of the UK. while the rest makes up the Republic of Ireland.
Questions
1. What is the UK?
The UK is really a nation of different countries held together by a common language and culture.
2.What’s the weather in the British Isles like?
The climate of the British Isles is mild with a lot of rain. Scotland is colder throughout the year. It also has plenty of rain.
3. From where did the culture of the people in the British Isles receive many influence?
The European mainland
4. Who ran over the Great Britain in1066? What’s the result of French influence?
The French. The result was that there were many French words in the English language.
5. Which are the first two countries that joined in the UK?
England and Wales.
6. What do people throughout the British Isles speak now? English
Unit 6
What are mentioned in the article?
Travel online shopping Smart credit cards education health medical science sports
Pre-reading
Scan the text to find out in which paragraph you can find answers to the questions.
1.How will people shop in the future? Para 3
2.How will people travel in the future? Para 2
3.What will schools be like in the future? Para 5
4.What will the future be like in generals? Para 1、6
Transportation
1.Compared with the past, what is the most important thing in future transportation?
No pollution is the most important thing.
2.Why will the maglev train be popular in the future?
Maglev train Environmentally friendly
energy –saving
Amazing speed---430 km/h
Controlled by an advanced computer system.
Health and medicine
What makes it possible for people to enjoy a longer life?
People will pay attention to ….
People are careful about….
Advances in medical science allow us….
New discoveries in …and … may lead to….
Education and knowledge
1.How will the schools of the future be different from what they are today?
There may be more “schools on the air” and “e-schools”.
2.How will the way we view learning and knowledge change?
We will become lifelong learners
Conlusion
What should we do to make sure we will have a bright future?
If we learn to accept and appreciate what is new and different. We will be well-prepared for whatever the future may have in store.
Main idea of each paragraph
Para.1 . Computers are already being used in agriculture and industry.
Para. 2. People will also use computers more and more in their personal lives.
Para. 3. It’s possible that people will work at home.
Para.4.Computers will be used more and more in transport.
Para. 5.Space travel will become much cheaper
Para. 6.In the fields of education, health and research,computers will continue to play an important part.
Main idea of two parts
Part 1: The prediction of the life in the future.
Part2: Future transportation/ education/business/ health and medicine
True or false
1. Public transportation is already well developed in most areas of China.
2. Scientists are developing new fuels and engines that are environmentally friendly. T
3. People can combine shopping with fun in the future. T
4. E-commerce will not be so popular as it is not very safe.
5.We will still prefer using cash instead of cards in the future.
6. In the future distance education will play an important part. T
1.What is one way to catch a glimpse of the future ?
One way to catch a glimpse of the future is to examine some of the major trends in contemporary society.
2.What’s the advantage of on-line shopping?
For companies, the internet makes it easier to keep in touch with customers and companies in other countries.
For people , shopping is no longer a necessity but a form of entertainment combining shopping with fun .
3.What kinds of schools will be there in the future?Why are they useful？
They are “schools on the air” and “e-schools”.
Because people can study whenever they have time and wherever they may be and , what’s more, they will become lifelong learners.
Post-reading
Advantages disadvantages
future transportation clean, fast, safe, without pollution high cost, expensive
online shopping convenient saving time no insurance of quality
future life longer and healthier
e-schools Interesting, convenient, saving time no face-to-face coach
Summary
Fields What will be used? Results
Transportation New technology ;new fuels and engines Cleaner, faster and safer.
Business E-commerce;mall; smart cards. Convenient, fun.
Health and medicine Healthy diet ; exercising regularly; Enjoy a longer and healthier life;
advances in medical science. remain active
Education and E-schools; distance education Can study at home; lifelong learners.
Knowledge
Note-making
AREA USE
Farms control the growing conditions of plants
Banks change money ;pay bills
Houses central computer to control heating and hot water recognize some’s voice
Transport work out the best distance between trains operate trains
Education Store texts
Unit 7
Step1 : Leading-in
They are all living with HIV
Step 2: Skimming
1.In what ways does AIDS spread?
AIDS, which is caused by HIV, can be transmitted via unprotected sex, infected blood transfusion or through birth.
2.How many children were infected in the world in ?
As a result, 3.2 million children were infected in 2002.
Step 3 Intensive Reading
Find out the main points of each part
Para.1 Xiaohua is a person living with AIDS
Para2 what is AIDS.
Para.3 How do people get AIDS
Para.4 Many children become infected with AIDS.
Para.5 Since there is little hope for Xiaohua, she decides to use the limited time to do something to help others.
Para.6 &7 xiaohua helps AIDS patients and tries to change people’s attitude to them.
Part1 Para.1
Part 2 Para.2
Part 3 para.3
Part 4 Para.4
Part 5 Para.5,6,7 How does a person live with Aids and how do others deal with a person living with AIDS?
Main idea:
This passage mainly tells us what we should do toward AIDS and Aids patients
Step 4 Scanning
Please read the text carefully again and add more questions to your list.
1.What kind of disease is AIDS?
AIDS is a disease that breaks down the body’s immune system and leaves a person defenseless against infections and illness.
2.Where is the disease spreading faster?And why?
In Africa and parts of Asia,Mainly because of a lack of proper health care,prevention and education
3.Which kind of people suffers the most? The young.
4.What did Xiao Hua decide to do after she know she got AIDS?
She decided to use the limited time she has left to do something to help others.
5.Is the disease the only thing that AIDS patients have to suffer from?
No,they also have to deal with people’s fear of the disease
6.What is the best way to show you care about AIDS patients?
Giving an AIDS patients a hug.
Step 5: Listening and reading
1.People will die immediately after they get AIDS.
2. Xiao Hua has hardly any hope to survive. T
3. In 2002, 3.2 million children in the world were infected with HIV. T
4. We should avoid any contact with AIDS patients.
5. Xiaohua’s life won’t be as long as her classmates’ so she is unhappy.
6. Giving an AIDS patient a hug is the best way to show that you care him / her. T
Step 6 Post-reading
1.Find out the difference between AIDS and HIV.
HIV is the virus that caused AIDS. AIDS is a kind of incurable disease. People get AIDS after having been infected with HIV virus.
2. How should we act towards people who have HIV / AIDS? What can we do to help them?
We should be helpful ,friendly and understanding .We can help them by learning more about the disease and by treating them as normal people.
Uni 8
Step 1 Lead-in
1.What should you do if you find a person whose leg is bleeding? Why?
2.What would you do if a person has drunk poison by mistake? Why?
Step 2 Skim the text and complete the table
Letter Represent Meaning
D Danger The accident scene is no longer dangerous
R Response To know that he/she is conscious and can breathe.
A Airway To make sure a person’s airway is open and it is easy to breathe.
B Breathing To start the person who is not breathing at once, using mouth-to-mouth method.
C Circulating Make sure the person’s blood is circulating by looking for color, coughing and eye movement.
Step 3 Fast- reading
What’s the topic of the paragraphs ?
Para. 1. First aid is very important
Para. 2 The most important is to stay calm.
Para. 3-4 When we have to think fast,we must remember DR ABC to give first aid
Para. 5-6 When we have checked the DR ABC we should give the first aid that is needed and call an ambulance.
Step 4 Scanning
1). Is it vital to learn some knowledge about first aid? Why?
Yes, because seconds count in an emergency, and knowing what to do can mean the difference and death.
2). What is the most important thing to bear in mind when you are confronted with an emergency? And for what reason?
We must stay calm, for only in this way will we be able to consider what to do and make better decisions.
3). What is a correct way of placing a body so that the airway is clear and it is easy to breathe?
(Answers on Page 60.)
a…
b…
c…
Step 5 Listen to the tape and answer the question.
Para. 1 First aid is very important
Why is first aid important in our daily life ?
Para. 2 What is the most important thing to remember when dealing with an emergency ?
Para. 3-4 What do the hospitals recommend ?
What do the letters DR ABC stand for ?
What are three important things?
1.Check that the person can breathe.
2.If the person is not breathing, you must try to start his breathing at once.
3.If the person is bleeding badly, you must try to stop the bleeding.
Para. 5 What should we do when we have checked the DR ABC ?
Para. 6 Can we do first aid correctly after reading this passage?
Step 6 Comprehension
1. By saying “ Seconds count in an emergency, ” the writer means ________.
A time is very important B you can count numbers by the second
C time is life D to be calm down, in an emergency, just say numbers by the second
2. What should you do if you want to do first aid correctly ?
A.Learn with a teacher. B Remember the letters DR ABC
C Stay calm D All of the above
3. According to the passage, people in the accident_______.
A. can be helped by anyone who’d like to do so
B. Should be waken up as soon as possible
C. should be put in the recovery position when having been given first aid
D. can be given first aid even without checking the DR ABC
4. Which of the following sentences best expresses
the main idea of the passage?
A. DR ABC should be remembered
B. Remembering the letters DR ABC is enough forfirst aid
C. Why first aid is important and what the letters DR ABC stand for in an emergency
D. What the letters DR ABC mean
5. In the passage., the author seems to be _________.
A.explaining the meaning of the letters DR ABC B. telling us the importance of the first aid
C. giving some basic information about first aid D. showing the importance of DR ABC
Step 7 True or false
1. We can do nothing but call an ambulance or the police when someone is hurt.
2. If you don’t know about first aid, never try to revive the wounded person. T
3. We can check blood circulating only by looking for eye movement.
4. If the person is not breathing , we must start her breathing in ten minutes.
5. If a person is bleeding, make sure that the airway is clear and it is easy to breathe.
6. When the accident happens, go to save the wounded people immediately.
Step 8 Post-reading
Look at the pictures on Page60. Use what you have learnt from the text to explain what the people are
doing in the pictures.
Picture 1
The man is gently tipping the person’s head back to make sure that his airway is open and it is easy to breathe.
Picture 2
If a person is not breathing, we can use the mouth-to-mouth way to start his/her breathing. And this must be done within five minutes.
Picture 3
If a person is bleeding, we should cover the wound with a clean piece of cloth and press on the wound to stop the bleeding.
Step 9 Retelling
Retell something about DR ABC according to the table in pairs.
Step 10 Group discussion
What are some of the most important things to do at the scene of an accident?
Firstly, we should keep calm, make better decisions and call an ambulance or the police.
Secondly, we should check the DR ABC and then give first aid if we know how to do it.
Thirdly, we should put the person in the recovery position and make sure that the airway is clear and it is easy to breathe.
Finally, we should cover the person with a blanket or a jacket to help him or her stay calm, stay with him or her and wait for the ambulance.
Unit 9
skimming
When and where was the first Earth Summit held? What did they do then?
It was first held in Stockholm in 1972.Representatives discussed some of the most important problems facing our planet. Much progress has been made.
step1. Fast reading
Try to find the main idea of each Para.Match them.
Para.1 A brief introduction to 1972,2002 Earth Summits.
Para2 The big three and the results caused by them
Para.3 The responsibilities of the richer countries
Para.4 How to save the earth
Para.5 Small changes make big difference
Para.6 Sts’ better understanding of he environment and their willingness to act are important
Para.7 One of the solutions to the problems---education
Listening
1. Listen to Para 1 and find one of the main themes of the summit.
Sustainable development
2. Listen to Para 2& 3 and find what topics are talked about by the speakers.
1)What are “The Big Three”?
Contaminated drinking water
Poor sanitation Air pollution
2) Poverty, War, Violence
What’s the present problem with the global development?
Richer people get richer while the poor get poorer.
3.What should rich counties do to solve this problem?
Rich countries have a responsibility towards poor countries and must do whatever they can to help others.
Scan the text and see which of the following best express the main idea of the passage? C
A．Different countries have different opinions about development.
B．Equality and fairness are badly needed in the today’s world.
C．The Earth Summit, a way to save the earth.
D．Sustainable development, the future for the world.
1.“Sustainable development ” was brought forth _______. B
A. at the Stockholm Summit B. at the Johannesburg Earth Summit
C. by the World Health Organization D. by China's former Premier Zhu Rongji
2. Which of the following is the main cause of millions of deaths in rural areas ? C
A. Lack of drinking water B. Poor sanitation
C. Air pollution D. Freezing cold
3. Which is the best way to make developing countries prosper ? D
A. Holding conferences like the Earth Summit
B. Richer countries offer much help
C. A better understanding of the environment
D. International cooperation
4. Which of the following best expresses the main idea of the passage ? C
A. Different countries have different opinions about development
B. Equality and fairness are badly needed in the today's world
C. The Earth Summit , a way to save the earth
D. Sustainable development , the future for the world
5. Which of the following statements is true according to the passage ? D
A.The Earth Summit was once of great help to China
B. The Earth Summit is the best way to solve all kinds of problems
C. Without poverty , war or violence we can develop the world successfully
D. Our willingness to take action is necessary for the protection of our environment
Compare with your partner and decide what you think each part of the text will be about
Introduction (para 1) Introduction of the Earth Summit
Body (para 2-6) Major problems facing the world
Conclusion (para 7) What we can do to solve the problem
Introduction (Para 1)
Fill in the form
The Earth Summit
Time Place Theme
1972 Stockholm The Human Environment
2002 Johannesburg Sustainable Development
Step2.Read the text carefully.
Para.1 Read it quickly,and answer the questions.
In 2002, the Earth Summit was held in Johannesburg in
South Africa. One of the main themes of the summit was Sustainable development
What does “sustainable development” mean? D
A.Developing the nature. B.Developing economy.
C.Taking better care of the earth. D.Developing the world without damaging the environment
Para2. Listen to the tape .
What does the “big three” refer to?
Contaminated drinking water, poor sanitation, air pollution.
Try to find these sentences true or false.
The three big killers in the world are poverty, war, and violence.
Air pollution is a big problem only in rural areas,especially in developing countries.
20% of the people on earth have no clean drinking water.
Read Para.4---Para.6. Do the following exercises.
1.What one of the visitors said shows that____. C
A.There exist serious problems at present.
B.It is difficult to save the earth.
C.The earth summits make people understand the environment.
D.All of us have realized the importance of protecting the environment.
2.What’s the earth summit? C
A.It’s a place to find problems.
B. It’s a place to discuss how to develop economy.
C.It’s a place to find solutions to how to develop without damaging the environment
1.Which of the following statements is not true according to the passage? B
A. Farmers are increasing the numbers of their cattle.
B. Farmers are limiting the numbers of their cattle.
C. Heavy rains and strong winds are destroying the valuable soil.
D.Fewer trees are left to hold the soil in place on the hillside.
2.Air pollution doesn't cause _______. D
A. the destroying of forests B. the killing of fish in lakes
C. illnesses and injuries to people D. the spreading of clouds of radiation
3.What is the possible reason why the Mediterranean can’t clean itself? D
A.One quarter of the shores are polluted. B. A lot of diseases are present in the water.
C. It lies between Europe and Africa. D. It has only one narrow entrance to the ocean.
4. The 1st part of the passage is mainly about ________. A
A. the reasons why the area of desert is growing
B. the numbers of cattle farmers should keep
C. the valuable soil strong winds blow away
D. the damage rains and winds bring about
5. If people change their habits, pollution _______. B
A. can be completely stopped B. will become less and less
C. can do less damage to people D.will do no harm to people
6. According to the text _________ are the worst enemy of nature. B
A. cattle B. humans C. deserts D. chemicals
Now, please read the passage carefully. You should pay attention to some detailed information in the passage . After that .Please answer these questions.
1 .What are the “big three”?
The “big three” refers to contaminated drinking water, poor sanitation and air pollution.
2 . Why are conferences like the Earth Summit important?
Because they help people understand that there exist serious problems and that there’s still time to take action. They can tell us what we can do to help, too.
3 .What issues are discussed at the Earth Summit?
Contaminated drinking water, poor sanitation, air pollution, poverty, wars and violence.
4．What is the key to the problem according to the text? Why?
Education 1. To build a better society and put an end to the death and suffering caused by the big three
2. To wipe out much of the poverty.
3. To see less violence and fewer wars.
summary
Accidents I. Time : 1986
Place : at a nuclear power station in Russia
Results : 125,000 die
Accidents II Time : 1984
Place : at a factory in the town of Bhopal in India
Results : 2500 be killed; many lose sight
Fact causes results
Earth desert grow every year cattle ; trees be cut down have less farm land
Air be polluted; chemical rain smoke from; accidents forests be destroyed; fish be killed ;
do harm to people
water be polluted; diseases waste from ; accidents living things be killed ; have less
drinking water ; nowhere to swim
Discussion
If you are one of the representatives at the Earth Summit, What proposal will you offer to solve the problems on the earth?
Unit 10
Step 1 Lead in
1.What’s the weather like today?
2.Do you often care about the weather?
3.How do you hear about it?
4.Have you ever heard of typhoon?
5.What words can you think of to describe the typhoon weather?
heavy wind (blow hard) storm roaring thunder
Also roaring forties: part of the Atlantic Ocean, often very stormy, between latitudes of 40 and 50 degrees south.
6. What will you feel in such kind of weather?
frightened, scared, terrible, happy (why?)
7. What about the hurricane? Have you everheard about it?
8. What about volcano?
9. Look at the picture. Find out as much as you can to describe it.
Eruption lava
10. How is a volcano formed?
The rocks under the earth becomes hotter and hotter and erupted from the mountain.
11. Where is the most possible place that a volcano may erupt? Near the oceans
12. Do you know how a volcano works,if you do, describe it?
Gas vapour, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, sulphur, etc.
Solid bits of rock and volcanic ash, etc.
Liquid lava
Step 2 Pre reading
the town of Pompeii (relics) two thousand years ago 18 hours
Skimming
Main idea of each part:
Para.1 General introduction to the letter.
Para.2 When and where the volcano erupted?
Para.3-6 What Pliny did when the volcano erupted?
Para.7 Conclusion to the letter.
Decide whether the following sentences are true or false.
1.A volcano erupted on the 24th of August in 79 BC in southern Italy.
2.My uncle planned to save his friend’s wife Rectina.
3.My uncle went to rescue Pompy after saving Rectina. T
4.The flames came from the homes of farmers who had left in a panic with the kitchen fires still on.
5.They decided to try the open air instead of staying in the house. T
6.It was night when the volcano erupted
Divide the text into several parts and tell the main idea of each part.
Step 3 While reading
Scan the text and answer the following questions.
1.What did Tacitus ask the author to do?
Ask him to write him sth about the death of his uncle Pliny.
2.From whom was the letter which the author’s uncle brought?
From his friend’s wife Rectina.
3.Where was Rectina’s house?
At the foot of Vesuvius.
4 What did the captain urge the author’s uncle to do?
He urged the author’s uncle to turn back.
5 Why did the author’s uncle ask to be taken to the baths?
Because he wanted to help the other to calm down.
6 When was the author’s uncle’s body found?
When daylight came again two days after he died.
7.What is described in the following passage?
The eruption of the volcano called Mount Vesuvius.
8.When and where did it happen?
On the 24th of August in 79 AD in southern Italy.
9.Who is the writer of the letter?
Pliny, the younger.( The author of the letter is Pliny’s nephew.)
Read the text carefully & fill in the following form.
Date: On the 24th of August in 79 AD in southern Italy.
What happened: The eruption of the volcano called Mount Vesuvius.
First A cloud of unusual size & shape rising from a mountain drew my uncle’s attention and he wanted to see it from closer at hand.
Next After receiving a letter from his friend’s wife Rectina, he changed his mind to save her.
Then In spite of the danger, he turned back to rescue his friend Pompy and help calm down the other people
Finally My uncle wanted to get out of the danger but failed. He was dead.
Arrange the following statements according to the right order.
1.He decided to rescue his friend Pompy.
2.Some people watched an unusual cloud rising from a mountain.
3.Rectina begged him to save her.
4.He ordered a boat made ready.
5.Two slaves helped him stand up and immediately he fell down dead.
6.He bathed and had dinner.
7.A rain of rocks was coming down.
2 4 3 1 6 7 5
Read the text again and explain what the words in bold refer to.
it: a cloud of unusual size and shape rising from a mountain
the one: the wind
the other: my uncle’s friend Pompy
their: flames
They: scared people
The eruption of Mount Vesuvius
Time What happened
on the 24th of Aug. in 79AD, between 2 & 3p.m. a cloud rose from the mountain
afterwards some of the cloud was white and dark
after dinner broad sheets of flame were lighting up many parts of Vesuvius
the next day shower of rock, darkness
This passage mainly tells us________. C
A To tell sth about Volcano happening in 79AD
B To tell sth about the death of Uncle Pliny
C To help Tacitus to recall what happened to Uncle Pliny
D To be in memory of Uncle Pliny
篇5：高二英语unit11全套教案(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)
I. Teaching Goal
1. Talk about science and scientific achievement.
2. Practise expressing intentions and wishes.
3. Learn about word formation (1).
4. Write a persuasion essay.
The First Period
Teaching Aims:
1. Learn and master the following.
(1)New words
engineering, solar, significant, mankind, constitution
(2) Everyday English s
If I got the money，I would……
My plan is to……
I hope that……
I want/wish/hope/intend/plan to……
I'd like to……“
I'm thinking of……
2. Train the students' listening abilities.
3. Talk about science and scientific achievement, urging the students to further understand the significance of science and scientific achievement and encouraging them to work hard at their lessons.
Teaching Important Points;
1. Finish the task of listening to train the students' listening ability.
2. Practise expressing intentions and wishes to train the students' speaking ability.
Teaching Difficult Points;
1. How to help the students talk in English about science and scientific achievement freely.
2. How to help the students finish the tasks of listening and speaking smoothly.
Teaching Methods;
1. Listening and speaking to train the students' ability to use English.
2. Individual, pair or group work to make every student take an active part in class.
Teaching Aids:
1. the multimedia
2. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures;
Step I Greetings and Lead-in
Greet the Ss. Then teacher turns on the multimedia. First, show the students a recorded programme in which the students can see the hard life people lived in the past. Then show them a programme in which people live a happy and modern life. After that, teacher asks some Ss up to describe what they saw in the programmes. Last, write the following on the boackboard.
(Bb: Unit 11 Scientific achievement)
First, let's learn some new words. Please look at the screen. (Teacher shows the screen and deals with them with the whole class.)
engineering／ / n.工程，工程学，设计，建造
solar / ／adj.太阳的，日光的
significant // adj.意义重大的，重要的；有意义的
mankind／/ n.人类
Neil Armstrong／ /尼尔 阿姆斯特朗（美国宇航员）
Alexander G Bell／bel / 亚历山大贝尔（美国发明家）
Ray Tomlinson／ / 雷 汤姆林森（美国计算机工程师）
constitution / / n．宪法
:Aeureka /ju'ri:k/ interj. 我找到了！
Step II Warming up
Ask some Ss to tell us what scientific achievements they think have changed the world?
(Teacher writes all the scientific achievements mentioned above on the blackboard and says the following. )
Step III Listening
The listening material contains two parts. You are going to hear some words said by some famous people at the time when they achieved success.
Look at the chart in Exercise 1 at the top of Page 2 quickly. Then play the first part of the tape for the Ss to complete it. After that, check their answers. (After checking the answers to Exercise 1, teacher goes on to deal with Exercise 2)
Now, listen to Part 2 and complete the sentences in Exercise 2, If necessary, play it twice for Ss to finish or check their answers.
At last, teacher deals with Exercise 3.
Step V Summary and Homework
T. In this class, we've mainly talked about scientific achievement. Centering on this topic, we did some listening and speaking. This way, we've learnt more about science and scientific achievement. Moreover, we've learnt some useful expressions to express intentions and wishes, .such as ”If I got the money, I would……; My plan is to…… (Teacher writes them on the blackboard. ) After class, try to practise using them and preview the reading part.
Step VI The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard
Unit 11 Scientific achievement
The First Period
I . Scientific achievement:
electricity, cars, aero planes, radio and television, the Internet, cloning, genetic engineering, the Theory of Gravity，nuclear science, solar energy
II. How to express intentions and wishes:
If I got the money, I would……
My plan is to……
I hope that……
I want/wish/hope/intend/plan to……
I'd like to……
I'm thinking of……
The Second Period
Speaking
Ss work in pairs and discuss their intentions and wishes..
The following structures are helpful to students:
1. My plan is to…….
2. I hope that…..
3. I want/wish/hope/intend/plan to…..
4. I’d like to,,,,
5. I’m thinking of ….
6. It is likely that…
Here are four scientists who want to get money to complete their project. Each scientist will have to introduce his or her project and explain why it is the most important. Now, the teacher put the students in groups of five to have a discussion. Four group members represent scientists tone member will listen to all the scientists and ask questions. At the end of the discussion, he or she must decide who will get the money and why..
(Teacher and the students go through the expressions. After that, teacher puts the students in groups of five and gets them to prepare for a few minutes. At the end, teacher asks one or two groups to report their work to the rest of the class. )
A sample dialogue;
Organizer: Now, everybody is here. Who'd like to be the first to make a statement on this project? Dr Wilson: I and my team are working on a cure for AIDS. As you know, the number of people
infected with AIDS is keeping increasing at an astonishing speed. Some of them are facing death. As a result, we have to find a way to solve this problem as soon as possible. But, right now, the lack of money is a big problem. If we got enough money, we would complete the first stage of our project in the near future.
Organizer: I see. Dr Jones, how about you?
Dr Jones: At present, we are also facing the same problem of lacking money. My research project is about cloning and how to use new technology to cure disease. Today, more and more patients are expecting to get organ transplant in order to prolong their lives. I wish what I am doing could help them.
Organizer: I understand. Dr Smith, could you please give me your opinions on your project?
Dr Smith: For humankind on the earth, food is a fundamental factor, and as the population keeps growing, per capitation resource of people is becoming less and less. My plan is to develop new technology that will make it possible to grow food with very little water. However, currently, the shortage of money prevents my work from further going. I hope you can give me a hand on my project,
Organizer: It sounds a good idea. Dr Winfrey, it's your turn now.
Dr Winfrey: It’s ceaseless for human beings to explore the universe. That's why we are urgent to know what the Mars looks like and if there is any life on it. I'm thinking of sending a manned spaceship to Mars. Nevertheless, this huge project will surely cost a large sum of money. And I don't think we can get to the aim without your support.
Organizer: So, everyone has finished their statements on their own project. Frankly speaking, they all sound tempting to me, but I'm more inclined to the project suggested by Dr Smith. From my point of view, it's more closely related to the daily life of people and in accord with the actual condition of our country. I'd like to pour money into his project.
The Third Period
Teaching Aims:
1. Learn and master the following words and phrases.
likely, zone, private, grasp, master, perfect, arrange, set foot (in), rely on, failure，locate，valley
2. Train the students' reading ability.
3. Get the students to learn about Zhongguancun - China's Silicon Valley.
Teaching Important Points;
1. Learn to use the following:
(1) Phrases:
in store, set foot in(on), rely on, come to life, put forward
(2) Sentence patterns;
It is likely that……
……makes it clear that……
2. Improve the students' reading ability.
Teaching Difficult Point:
How to help the students understand the reading material exactly.
Teaching Methods;
1. Discussion before reading to make the students interested in what they will read.
2. Fast reading to get a general idea of the text.
3. Careful reading to get the detailed information.
4. Pair or group work to make every student take an active part in class,
Teaching Aids:
1. the multimedia
2. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures;
Step I Greetings
Greet the whole class as usual.
Step II Revision and Pre-reading
Yesterday, we talked about science and scientific achievement. We know scientific achievements can not only make our life better, but also change the world. Science makes the world become a smaller place. Science and scientific achievement promote the development of mankind and society. However, to achieve success in science research is not easy. It needs to work whole-heartedly. It also needs support and good environment. Now, please look at the questions on the screen and work in pairs or groups to discuss them. Let's go through them first. (Teacher shows the following on the screen. )
1. If you wanted to do research or start a company, what kind of support and environment would you need?
2. What is it that makes a scientific achievement important?
3. Why do scientists spend so much time trying to achieve something?
Teacher shows the new words on the screen and deals with them as usual.
likely / / adj. 很可能的, 合适的, 可靠的, 有希望的
economic / / adj. 经济的；经济学的，有实用价值的
zone / / n．区；区域．地带
hi-tech／‘haitek/ n．高科技，高技术（=high technology)
private／ / adj. 私立的；私人的；非公开的
technological / / adj.技术（学）的；工艺（学）的
overseas／ / adj.（在）海外的; (在）国外的
adv. 在海外；在国外
grasp / / vt．掀住。抓牢，理解
master／／n．硕士；（男）主人；能手
perfect／ / adj.完美的，理想的．绝对的
arrange／ / vt．安排书筹划；整理；布置
set foot (in) 到达；进人．踏上
IT /ai 'ti:/ abbr.（= information technology)信息技术．信息产业
Lenovo / li 'nuv / n．联想公司：
Founder／ / n．方正公司：
rely / / vi．依靠;依赖; 信赖; 指望：
rely on依靠；依赖，信赖，指望
failure / / n．失败，失败的人（事）；
locate／ / vt．（常用被动语态）把……设置在．使……坐落于；指出……的位置：
silicon／ / n. 硅；
valley／ / n．低凹处（尤指波谷）; 山谷；溪谷
Step III Reading
Page 3, Read the passage-Zhong-guancun quickly in four minutes and find out the answers to the following two questions!
1. What kind of spirit has made Zhongguancun a success?
2. What are the two mottos mentioned in the text for the park? (Teacher writes the two questions above on the blackboard. Four minutes later, teacher checks the answers. )
1. It is the spirit of creativity and scientific skill that has made Zhongguancun a success.
2. One is “Relying on science, technology, and knowledge to increase economic power.” The other is “Encouraging pioneering work and accepting failure.”
Work in pairs to finish the first exercise in Post-reading.
Suggested answers: l. ABC 2.D 3.CD 4. B 5.CD
Explain some phrases and sentences. Please look at the screen. (Teacher shows the following on the screen and explains them to the students.)
1. in store (for sb. / sth. ) : coming in the future; about to happen
e. g. There is a surprise in store for you.
I can see trouble in store.
2. set foot in /on sth. : enter or visit (a place) ; arrive
e. g. Don't ever set foot in this house again!
Who was the first man to set foot on the moon.
3. rely on/upon; depend on……
e. g. Nowadays we rely increasingly on computers for help.
You can rely on it that it will rain this week.
4. come to life: back to normal state, esp. of mind
e. g. As soon as the mother came to life, she cried for her daughter.
After three hours' saving, the injured man came to life,
5. It is likely that--- (Note：likely→ probable)
e. g. It is very likely that she'll ring me tonight.
It isn't likely to rain.
She is very likely to ring me tonight.
6. ……make it clear that……
(Note: make→ cause to be or become……)
e. g. She made it clear that she objected to the proposal.
She made clear her objections.
Step IV Listening and Reading Aloud
Listen to the tape of the passage, paying attention to the pronunciation and intonation. Then read it aloud by themselves and try to understand the phrases and sentences learnt just now.
(Teacher begins to play the tape. )
Step V Summary and Homework
T: In this class, we've learned more about Zhongguancun by reading the passage. As a new center of science and technology, it is known to the world. It is said that it is called “China's Silicon Valley”. After class, use a library or the Internet to find out more about Silicon Valley and then compare the two areas. How are they similar or different? Besides, we've learnt some useful phrases and sentences. Remember to review the use of them.
Step VI The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard
Unit 11 Scientific achievement
The Third Period
I, Zhongguancun
1. What kind of spirit has made Zhongguancun a success?
2. What are the two mottos mentioned in the text for the park?
II. Phrases:
in store, set foot in/on, rely on/upon, come to life
III. Sentence patterns:
1. It is likely that…… :
2. ……make it clear that……
The Fourth Period
Language points.
1．constitution
1) 宪法the Constitution of the United States / the American Constitution
2) 体格，体质He has a weak constitution
3) 构造，构成the constitution of starch (淀粉的构成)
2．achievement (U)取得，完成（C）成就，成绩（V）achieve
development government movement equipment
vt 完成 达到（目的），得到
1） By hard working we can achieve anything.
2） We have achieved success in developing the product.
3．Mankind 人类 manmade (adj) Manly 有男子气概的；刚强的
4．in store(for sb./sth.):coming in the future;about to happen
e.g.There is a surprise in store for you.
I can see trouble in store.
5．Likely 1) be likely to do sth 很可能（发生某种情况）Our team is likely to win the game.
2) it is likely that + 从句
It is likely that we’ll go on a picnic in the forest tomorrow.
辨析：likely, possible与probable
Likely 常用词，指“从表面现象看很有可能”
Possible 指“由于有适当的条件和方法，某事可能发生或做到”，强调“客观上有可能”，但“实际希望很小”。
Probable 语气比possible 强，指“有根据、合情理、值得相信的事物，带有大概，很可能的意思”
Likely 之后常跟不定式（be likely to do sth） 而possible与probable之后通常不跟不定式；
Likely 的主语可以是人，而possible与probable的主语不能是人。
6．set up
1) 建立，成立 Set up home
Edison set up a chemical lab of his own at the age of ten.
2) 树立起来Let’s set up the tent first.
3) 使（自己或他人）从事某职业（as）
He has set himself up as a bookseller. 他开始经营书籍。
set about doing sth 着手做 set out to do sth Set an example
set fire to 点火；放火Set off 出发，动身Set foot in (on) 登上；涉足；访问
set foot in/on sth.: enter or visit(a place);arrive
e.g. Don’t ever set foot in this house again!
Who was the first man to set foot on the moon.
7．Private adj 私人的；私立的；不公开的
Private property Private school
a private door 便门in private 在私下，秘密地in public 公开地
8．grasp vt
1) 抓住 grasp sb by the arm
2) (= understand ) 掌握， 领会
Grasp sb’s meaning
3) n (常用单数) 紧握；把握；理解；理解力
Beyond sb’s grasp 力量达不到 Grasp all, lose all. 样样都要，全数失掉。 Within sb’s grasp 力量达得到
9．Master n 硕士；（男）主人；能手；雇主；大师
Mistress n 女主人 Masterless adj 无主的
Mastermind n 非常聪明的人 Masterkey n 万能钥匙
Masterpiece(masterwork) n 杰作 The master of the house 家长
Master and man雇主与雇工 A master in literature 文学大师
Master of Arts (MA) 文学硕士 Master of Science (MS) 理学硕士
Bachelor 学士 doctor 博士
vt 掌握；精通；控制；统治
Master a foreign language
Man can master nature.
10. perfect adj 理想的；完美的；绝对的；完全的；（动词的）完成的
His reading is perfect.
He is a perfect stranger to us.
The perfect tense
vt 使完美
They worked hard to perfect their dance.
Practice makes perfect 熟能生巧
Be perfect in English 精通英语
11．arrange
vt 安排，筹划；整理，布置
1） We have arranged a party.
2） He arranged the books on the shelf.
n arrangement
(C pl) 安排；准备工作 （U，C）整理；排列；布置
12. have an effect on 对……产生影响
Take effect 开始生效；开始实行
In effect = in fact 实际上
13. rely on / upon : depend on…依赖，依靠；信赖，信任
We should rely on our own efforts. 我们应该自力更生。
You may rely on it that she won’t be late.你可以放心，她不会迟到的。
14．make it clear （that）…表明，讲清楚
e.g. She made it clear that she objected to the proposal.
She made clear her objections.
15．Failure (v fail) 失败(U)，失败的人或事（C）
Failure is the mother of success.
He is a failure as an artist, but a success as an art teacher.他不是一个成功的艺术家，但是个成功的美术老师。
16．come to life: back to normal state, esp. of mind苏醒过来，恢复生气，活跃起来
After three hours’ saving, the injured man came to life.
When I mentioned our plans for a trip abroad, the kids came back to life at once.
17. mark
n 痕迹；符号；商标；分数；特征
an ink mark a question mark full marks make a mark 作标记
vt 做标记；留痕迹于；表明；批分数，评成绩
a dirt road marked with footprints 留有脚印的泥路
be marked with 标着……；(人、动物等身上)具有
Her face is marked with sadness. 她面露悲哀。
mark examination papers.
18. outstanding
1) 杰出的，突出的 （ stand out ）一名杰出的学生 an outstanding student
2) 未完结的；未清的；未付的
Outstanding debts 未付清的欠款
19．Breakthrough n 重大突破，突围；突破性的发现，成就
A military breakthrough 军事突破A scientific breakthrough 科学成就
20．enable
en-使+able能……的
enrich enlarge
strengthen strength(力量)+ en (使) vt 加强，增强 vi 变强
they strengthened the city wall..
the wind strengthened.
deep--deepen
Sharp-sharpen
Wide--widen
21. organ n 器官；风琴；机构，机关
The eyes are the organ of sight.
state organs
a government organ
adj organic 有机物的；有机体的
n organism (C)生物，有机体，有机组织
vt organize 组织
N organization 团体，机构，组织
22. put forward 提出（建议、意见）；推荐，提名
He put forward a better plan.
We put her forward as chairman of the committee.
23. aim (sth) at sth/doing sth (把……)瞄准；目的在于；企图
He aimed his gun at the target.
Those girls worked out every morning, aiming at losing weight.
知识点讲解
1． You and your team are working on a cure for Aids. 你和你的队员正在从事艾滋病的治疗工作。
（1）work on “从事于（某项工作）”；“设法说服” eg:
They worked on the old car late into the night. 他们修这辆旧汽车一直修到深夜。
What are you doing? We are working on some wood-cuts. 你们在干什么呀？我们正在创作一些木刻。
Can you work on him to change his mind?你能说服他改变主意吗？
（2）work at “学习，研究，致力于……” eg:
They have worked at this subject for many years. 他们研究这门科学好多年了。
（3）work out 做出；算出；设计出 eg:
This problem will not work out. 这道题算不出来。
They have worked out a method of sending a spacecraft to Mars.
他们已经设计出一种向火星发射宇宙飞船的方法。
2．extremely adv. to a very high degree 极端地；极度地 eg:
It was an extremely difficult and dangerous task. 这是一项极度困难和危险的工作。
extreme adj. reaching the highest degree 极度的 eg:
extreme patience/kindness 极度的耐心/仁慈 in extreme pain 在极度痛苦中
3． cure (1)n. ①[C] curing or being cured 治疗；治愈。 eg:
His cure took six months. 他的病花了六个月治疗。
②[C]substance or treatment which cures 治疗的药物；治疗法 eg:
Is there a certain cure for cancer yet? 迄今对癌症有治疗方法吗？
（2）vt. & vi. bring sb. back to health; get rid of one’s illness/habits eg:
This medicine will cure your headache. 这药可以治好你的头痛。
A few days’ rest will cure you. 休息几天你就痊愈了。
③（词组） cure sb. of one’s illness or bad habits 治愈疾病，改掉坏习惯 eg:
Moving to the country cured her of asthma. 搬到乡下她的哮喘病就好了。
He was cured of his habit of smoking. 他改掉了吸烟的坏习惯。
4． You are working on sending a manned spaceship to Mars. 你正在从事向火星发射载人宇宙飞船的工作。
（1）manned adj. (of machines esp. in space) having men on board （飞船等）载人的 eg:
the development of manned from unmanned space craft从无人向载人飞船的发展
（2）man-made adj. produced by the work of men; not found in nature 人造的 eg:
The lake is a man-made one. 这是个人工湖。
We have sent up many man-made satellites. 我们发射了多少颗人造卫星。
生词和词组
1．likely adj. (1) that is expected 很可能发生的；有希望的 eg:
Is he likely to win? 他有可能获胜吗？
The most likely result is a draw. 最可能的结果是不分胜负。
(2)that seems reasonable, suitable or right for a purpose 似乎合理的 eg:
That’s a likely excuse. 那似乎是个合理的借口。
(3)be likely to do… 很可能会……
It’s likely that… 可能会（有，发生）…… eg:
He is not likely to succeed. 他大概不会成功。
It is likely that he will be late. =He is likely to be late. 他可能会迟到。
2． grasp vt. , vi. & n.
(1)v. ①seize firmly with hand(s) or arm(s) 抓住；抱住；紧握 eg:
The boy grasped his mother’s hand firmly. 那个小男孩紧握住妈妈的手。
He grasped the rope and pulled it. 他抓紧绳子用力拉。
②understand with the mind 领悟；理解 eg:
I couldn’t grasp the teacher’s meaning. 我没领悟老师的意思。
(2)n. firm hold or grip; power of grasping 紧握；抓紧；领悟力 eg:
He doesn’t have a thorough grasp of the problem. 他没有彻底理解这个问题。
(3)短语：beyond/within a person’s grasp 为某人所不能/能抓到的；为某人所不能/能理解的。
3． master vt. , vi & n.
(1) vt. ①become the master of; overcome 成为……的主人；征服；控制
eg: master one’s temper/feelings 控制脾气/感情
It’s difficult to master nature. 征服大自然是困难的。
②gain as a skill 精通；熟练 eg:
master English 精通英语 master foreign affairs 精通外交事务
He never mastered the art of the public speaking. 他从未掌握当众演讲的艺术。
(2)n. ①man who has others working for him 主人，雇主
②male head of a household 家里的男主人
③captain of a merchant ship 商船的船长
④male teacher 男教师 eg:
the master of the house 一家之长
the maths master 数学教师 a master’s degree 硕士学位
4．arrange vt. & vi.
(1)put in order 安排；排列；布置 eg:
She is good at arranging flowers. 她擅长插花。
Before going away, he arranged his business affairs. 他离开之前，他把业务都安排好了。
(2)make plans in advance 预做计划 eg:
The Tourist Bureau arranged everything for our journey to Rome. 旅游局为我们去罗马的旅行准备了一切。
(3)arrange+ n. +for +n. 为……安排…… eg:
Mother arranged an appointment for me with the dentist. 母亲替我向牙医预约挂号。
(4)arrange sb. to do … 安排某人做…… eg:
I have arranged him to meet her. 我安排他和她见面。
(5)arrange with sb. to do … 约定与某人做…… eg:
We arranged with his team to play a game of baseball. 我们约好和他们队打一场棒球。
(6)arrange that … 商定，安排。 eg:
He arranged that the meeting (should) be put off for a week. =
He arranged for the meeting to be put off for a week. 他安排把会议延后一周召开。
5． failure n.
(1)[U] failing; lack of success 失败；不成功 eg:
Failure is the mother of success. 失败乃成功之母。
(2)[C] instance of failing; person, attempt or thing that fails 失败的事例；失败的人，企图或失败的事物 eg:
He was a failure as a teacher. 他不是个好老师。
Success came after many failures. 失败多次之后终于成功。
6． locate vt. & vi.
(1)discover, show the locality of 找出……的位置，指出……的位置 eg:
locate a town on a map 在地图上找出一城市的位置
(2)establish in a place 在一地点设置 eg:
a new school to be located in the suburbs 将设置在郊区的一所新学校
(3)be located 位于 eg:
Our school is located in the center of the town. 我们学校坐落于市中心。
(4)比较location n.
[U] locating or being located 指定位置
[C] position or place 位置；地方 eg:
The hill is a good location for the new church. 那山丘是建筑新教堂的好地点。
7． organ n.
(1)any part of an animal body or plant 动植物器官 eg:
the organs of speech, the tongue, teeth, lips, etc. 语言器官（如舌、牙、唇等）
(2)organization 组织，机构 eg:
Parliament is the chief organ of the government. 国会是政府的主要机关。
(3)musical instrument from which sounds are produced by air forced through pipes, played by keys pressed with the fingers and pedals pressed with the feet 风琴
同、近义词辨析
1．likely, possible 与probable
（1）三者均表可能性，但意思有别。possible指客观上有可能性，但往往含有希望很小的意味；probable比possible可能性稍大，有“较为可能、大概”，指有实际依据；likely是从外表迹象判断有可能发生的事。 eg：
It’s possible, though not probable, that he will come tomorrow. 他明天可能来，但也不一定准来。
She is likely to ring me tonight. 今晚她很可能给我来电话。
（2）possible 不能用人做主语。possible 常用于下列句型：
It is possible to do sth. It is possible for sb. to do sth.
It is possible that … eg:
Is it possible to say so?可能这样说吗？
It is possible for me to do it. 我可能做那件事。
（3）probable 也不能用人做主语。一般只用于下面句型中：
It is probable that … eg:
It is probable that he will come. 他很可能要来。
（4）likely 既可用人作主语，也可用物做主语。通可用于“It is likely that …”句型中。 eg:
He is likely to come. = It is likely that he will come. 他可能要来。但不能说：It is likely for him to come.
（5）impossible, improbable, unlikely 用法与上述类似。
2．catch, grasp, seize 与snatch
catch是普通用语，用“设法抓住，捉住”的意思； grasp表示牢牢地“抓住”；seize指“突然用力抓住使不逃脱”；snatch 表示迅速的拉扯动作、出其不意地“抓取”。 eg:
The police caught the thief as he ran. 小偷逃跑时被警察抓住了。
He grasped his gun and rushed out. 他抓起枪就冲了出去。
He seized the gun from the enemy soldier. 他从敌人士兵手中夺过了枪。
The thief snatched her handbag and ran off. 小偷抢走了她的手提包就跑了。
知识点补充
1．Whatever great achievements the future may have in store for China, it is likely that many of them will be born in northwestern Beijing. 无论中国将来会有什么样的成就，其中许多可能就诞生在北京的西北部。
（1）in store 就要到来，必将发生 eg:
Who knows what the future has in store for us? 谁知道我们将来注定如何？
（2）in store 也有储存着，备用的意思 eg:
The runner kept some energy in store for spurting at the end. 那名赛跑的人为最后冲刺贮存精力。
2． Zhongguancun was set up as a special economic zone in the late 1990s and quickly became the leader of China’s hi-tech industry. 在20世界90年代末中关村作为高新科技特区被创立并迅速成为中国高科技工业的先锋。
（1）set up-establish 建立 eg:
The government has set up a working party to look into the problem. 政府成立工作组调查此问题。
（2）in the late 1990s 又可写成in the late 1990’s 二十世纪九十年代末
in the early 1980s 二十世纪八十年代初
（3）hi-tech= high technology 高科技，高技术
3． When I got my master’s degree, I wanted to return home but couldn’t find a company where I could use what I had learnt. 当我获得硕士学位时，我想回到家乡，可是我没能找到学有所用的公司。
（1）本句是一个复合句。When I got my master’s degree 为时间状语从句，修饰主句谓语动词wanted。wanted和couldn’t find为并列谓语动词，由并列连词but连接。where I could use what I had learnt为定语从句，修饰先行词company。what I had learnt 为宾语从句。
（2）a master’s degree 硕士学位 a doctor’s degree 博士学位a bachelor’s degree 学士学位
又如：Master of Arts 文学硕士 Doctor of Law 法学博士Bachelor of Science 理学学士
4．I will never forget how happy I was when I set foot in China again and was back with my friends and family. 我永远不会忘记当再次踏上中国土地和我的朋友及亲人团聚时，那种感觉有多幸福。
（1）本句是复合句。How happy I was …为宾语从句。when I set foot in China again and was back with … 为时间状语从句。
（2）set foot in/on 进入，踏进 eg:
She said she wouldn’t set foot in the room until it had been properly cleaned.
她说直到这屋子收拾好了她才住进去。
No man has ever set foot on that deserted island. 没有人曾光顾过那个荒芜的岛。
5． “Relying on science, technology, and knowledge to increase economic power”- makes it clear that science and business can and must work together to build the future. “依靠科学，技术，知识发展经常”，它阐明了科学和商业能够且必须结合在一起共创未来。
（1）此句为复合句。it为形式宾语，代表that引导的宾语从句。
（2）rely on/upon信赖，依赖 eg: He can always be relied upon or help. 他的帮助是永远可依赖的。
You may rely on my early arrival. 你放心好了，我会早到的。
（3）make…clear 表明，讲清楚 eg:
Have I made myself clear? 我讲清楚了吗？
They wanted to make it clear that they did an important and necessary job. 他们想说明他们做着一项重要且必要的工作。
6． …but we are excited about all the new technology and great ideas that are coming to life in Zhongguanzun. 但是我们为所有这些在中关村富有活力的新技术和卓越的想法而感到激动。
（1）that are coming to life in Zhongguancun 为定语从句，修饰先行词ideas。
（2）come to life 苏醒；恢复生气 eg:
We all thought he was drowned, but after an hour’s artificial respiration he came back to life.
我们都以为他淹死了，但经过一小时的人工呼吸后，他又苏醒了。
When I told the students the good news, they all came to life.
当我告诉学生们这个好消息时，他们都活跃起来了。
The Fifth Period
Teaching Aims:
1. Learn and master the following words: brand , luggage , achieve , organ
2. Review the words appearing in the last two periods.
3. Learn about Word Formation.
Teaching Important Points;
1. Learn some words which are closest in meaning,
2. Study the ways of forming a word.
3. Study the meaning of some affixes and stems.
Teaching Difficult Point;
How to help the students master some knowledge of Word Formation,
Teaching Methods;
1. Doing exercises to review the learnt words.
2. Studying and practising to master the ways of forming a word.
3. Pair or group work to make every student take an active part in class.
Teaching Aids:
1. the multimedia
2. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures :
Step I Greetings
Greet the whole class as usual.
Step II Revision
In the last period, we read the passage Zhongguancun and learned much about it. Now, who can tell me something about it? Get some Ss to try it.
Zhongguancun, in Beijing's Haidian District, is the new centre for Chinese science and technology. The centre itself got started in the early 1980s and was set up as a special economic zone in the late 1990s. Then it quickly became the leader of China's hi-tech industry. A growing number of overseas have returned to China and grasped the opportunity to develop their ideas at Zhongguancun. Zhongguancun has had a positive effect on business as well as science. Today, there are more than 8 000 hi-tech companies in Zhongguancun, more than half of which are IT companies. What has made Zhongguancun a success is the spirit of creativity and scientific skill.
We all know Zhongguancun is the leader of China's hi-tech industry as Silicon Valley in the USA. So sometimes it is called China's Silicon Valley. In the last class, I asked you to use a library or the Internet to find out more about Silicon Valley and then compare the two areas. Now who'd like to tell us how similar or different they are?
Both Zhongguancun and Silicon Valley are home to Internet industry as well as hi-tech companies, most of which are founded by students, faculty and staff members from the surrounding universities. However* as a fledgling hi-tech community, Zhongguancun has many differences from Silicon Valley. Silicon Valley has evolved a culture that is tuned to market-driven innovation, while in Zhongguancun, innovation is still largely driven by technology. In addition, investors in Silicon Valley are frequently an integral parts of companies day-to-day operations. While in Zhongguancun. Investors has been used only as a source of financing.
Let's do an exercise.
Please look at the screen.
(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)
Find the right explanation for each word.
1. zone 2. significant 3. institute 4. achievement 5. announce
6. grasp 7. giant 8. perfect
A. something you have worked hard for and done well
B. to say something in public
C. to take hold of something firmly
D. a group of people who want to study a special thing, or the building used by such a group
E. without any fault or bad points
F. large and important; having a special meaning
G. unusually large person, animal, plant, business organization, etc.
H. area or region with a particular feature or use
Suggested answers: l.-H 2.-F 3.-D 4.-A 5. -B 6.-C 7. -G 8. -E
Step III Word Study
Page 5. We'll deal with Word Study. First, Word Study. Then, Word Formation. Look at the exercise in Word Study now. Choose the answer that is closest in meaning to the underlined part. First, do it by yourself. Then check the answers with your partner. In the end, collect the right answers.
Suggested answers:
LA 2.B 3. C 4. B 5. C 6. A 7. B 8. C
Step IV Word Formation
Word formations
1. introduce the main ways of word formation: (the following may be of help during your teaching)
The main Processes of English Word-formation:
a. Prefixation: disagree, unimportant, non-smoker, minibus, overuse, antibiotics, underdeveloped, post-war, pre-school, renew, bimonthly, multi-racial;
b. Suffixation: percentage, girlhood, Londoner, hostess, employee, puzzlement, hopeless, changeable, talkative, deepen;
c. Conversion: desire-v. to long for, to wish/ n. strong longing, earnest wish; hit-v, to give a blow/ n. blow; They downed the tools.
d. Compounding: deadline, above-mentioned, chewing-gum, sun-bather, table talk, fathead, redcap, easygoing, sleep-walk,
The minor processes of English word-formation:
e. clipping or shortening: phone (for telephone), ad (for advertisement), prof (for professor), flu (for influenza), pub (for public house);
f. Acronyms(首字母缩略词): UN, VIP, NATO,DA (Doctor of Arts) , H-bomb (Hydrogen bomb);
g. Blending: branch, motel, Eurasia,
h. Back-formation: to beg from beggar, to baby-sit from baby-sitter, to greed from greedy.
i .Forming new words by analogy:
Moonrise is derived from the word sunrise by analogy.
j. Onomatopoeia:
Bark, giggle, bang, murmur.
2. Ss study examples on p6 and see if they can tell the processes of the words.
Study Word Formation. First, look at the words on the screen. (Teacher shows the following on the screen.)
international = inter-+ national
telephone = tele- + phone :
mankind = man+ kind
broadband= broad + band
extremely = extreme + ly
manned = man+ -ed
hi-tech= high + technology
e-school = electronic school
IT=information technology
CSA = Chinese Space Agency
The Ss are given two minutes to study the words and find out the ways of forming a word. Then ask some students to explain how they are formed.
Look at the stems and affixes on the screen. Match each of them with the right meaning on the
right.
(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)
trans-
-graph
tele-
super-
co-
vis-
bio-
Sub-
-port- carry
see
below
life
together/with
more than usual
far
across
writing
The Ss are given two minutes to prepare. Then check your answers.
Suggested answers:
trans- = across tele- = far co- = together/with bio- = life vis- = see -graph= writing -port-= carry sub-= below super-=more than usual
Please look at the screen. Let's do another exercise.
(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)
Use context clues and what you know about word parts to guess the meaning of the underlined words.
1. ____ Many countries import most of the oil they use.
2. ____ He studied biophysics at college.
3. ____ It is very important to learn how to cooperate with others.
4. ____ All your luggage will be transported to the destination by train. 5. ____ My cousin has an excellent voice. Her dream is to become a
superstar.
(Teacher asks some students to do it. One student, one sentence. )
Suggested answers :
1．进口 2.生命物理 3.合作 4.运输 5.超级歌星
Step V Consolidation
Page 6 and look at Part 4. Read the news article and tell how the words in bold are formed. First, look at the given example to make sure you know how to do it. Then work in pairs to finish it. After a few minutes, check your answers.
Suggested answers
showcase= show+ case breakthrough= break + through
bioengineering = bio- + engineering outstanding = out + standing
enable= en- + able restore = re- + store
indirectly = indirect+-ly strengthen= strength+-en
Step VI Summary and Homework
T. Well. Let's see what we've learnt in this class. First, we've reviewed the words learnt in the last period. Then, we've learnt about Word Formation CD. We've learnt some ways of forming a word, such as derivation, compound and short form. This way, we know how to guess new words according to the meanings of the stems and affixes as well as the context clues. After class, please review what we've learnt in this class and preview the next part in this unit - Integrating Skills.
Step VI The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard
Unit 11 Scientific achievement
The Third Period
Word Formation
Ways of forming a word
a. derivation: international, telephone, extremely, manned
b. compound: mankind, broadband
c. short form: hi-tech, e-school, IT, CSA
The Sixth Period
Teaching Aims;
1. Learn and master the following words and phrases:
boom, put forward, breakthrough, agency, announce, evolution, supercomputer
2. Train the students' integrating skills, especially reading and writing skills.
Teaching Important Points:
1. Help the students understand the passages exactly and master the following words and phrases: put forward, aim at, announce, map out
2. Learn to write a persuasion essay to train the students' writing ability.
Teaching Difficult Point:
How to help the students finish the task of writing.
Teaching Methods:
1. Fast and then careful reading to improve the students' reading ability.
2. Learning tips to help the students learn to write a persuasion essay.
3. Individual, pair or group work to make the students finish each task.
Teaching Aids:
1. the multimedia
2. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures-
Step I Greetings
Greet the whole class as usual.
Step II Revision and Lead-in
(Show the following on the screen. )
Study the sentences and guess the meaning of each underlined word. Explain how the word is formed.
1. The average output of the factory is 20 cars a day.
2. She has written good essays before, but this one is substandard.
3. He is a kind of intellectual superman.
4. The lack of a common language made it very difficult to intercommunicate (with each other).
5. Transplant the seedlings into peaty soil,
6. Have you read an e-book?
7. When did China join the WTO?
8. They helped us to map out a long-term plan.
Suggested answers
1. output = out+ put产量
2. substandard = sub-+ standard低于标准的，不够标准的
3. superman = super-+ man超人
4. intercommunicate= inter- + communicate互相联系
5. transplant=trans-+plant移植
6. e-book = electronic +book电子图书
7. WTO＝World Trade Organization世贸组织
8. long-term=long + term长期的
Today, we've going to read about some scientific achievements in China. First，let's learn the new words.
(Teacher shows the screen and deals with the new words.)
boom /bu:m/.n. (经济、工商业的)繁荣（期），迅速发展期；（营业等的）激增，
put forward提出，建议；推荐’
△rejuvenate / / vt. 繁荣昌盛；使返老还童；使恢复（青春）活力，
breakthrough／/ n．（知识或技术领域的）重大突破；重大进展（发现）
（军事上的）突围；
△impressive / / .adj. 激动人心的；感人的．给人深刻印象的：
agency／ / n.（行政或职能）机构；代理机构
announce／ / vt. 宣布．宣告
△genome／/ n:基因组；染色体组
△element／ / n．元素；要素，组成部分：
evolution, / / n．发展，展开：进化
△byte /bait/，．［计〕字节．比特，
supercomputer / / n．超级计算机‘：
△humanoid／ / adj. 具有人的形状或特点的；类人的。
Step III Reading
Page 7. Look at Reading and Writing. Read each passage quickly and find out the answers to the following two questions on the screen. (Teacher shows the following on the screen.)
1. What plan has helped Chinese scientists make many breakthroughs?
2. Which scientific fields are mentioned in the text?
( After a while, teacher checks the answers. )
1. The plan for “rejuvenating the nation by relying on science and education”.
2. Exploring space, genetic research, computer engineering and medical science.
(Teacher writes the answers above on the blackboard.)
Read the passages again carefully, trying to understand them more exactly and pay attention to some detailed information. After that, work in groups to complete the chart after the passages according to what is tearnt from the text. After four minutes, check answers.
Suggested answers:
Exploring space
Achievements: The Chinese space Agency has developed the highly successful Long March rocket series.
Importance: The rockets are used to prepare for the nation's first manned space flight.
Genetic research
Achievements: Chinese scientists have completed mapping out their part of the international human genetic project,
Importance; It has proved that Chinese scientists are among the world's best. It helps to solve the mysteries of life.
Computer engineering
Achievements: Chinese computer engineers have developed the supercomputer Shenwei.
Importance: The nation's first humanoid robot has been built.
Medical science
Achievements: Scientists have been able to create a chemical element that can fight cancer cells.
Importance: The breakthrough makes the cure of deadly disease possible.
(After that, teacher deals with the language points. )
Now, let's learn some useful words and expressions. Please look at the screen. (Teacher shows the following on the screen and gives brief explanations to make sure the students understand how to use them correctly.)
1. put forward: advance, propose or suggest sth. for discussion
e. g. He is putting forward radical proposals for electoral reform.
2. aim at: intend or try to do sth.
e. g. We must aim at increasing exports.
3. announce : make (sth. ) known publicly
e. g. They announced their engagement to the family.
Have they announced when the race will begin?
4. map out: present sth. in detail
e. g. He mapped out his ideas on the news project.
Step IV Listening and Reading Aloud
Play the tape for the Ss to listen. The first time, listen and follow. The second time, listen and repeat.
(Teacher begins to play the tape. )
Step V Writing
Writing part. The Ss have been asked by the magazine Modern Science to help them choose the greatest scientific achievement ever. Write a short essay, telling them which achievement you
have chosen and explaining why you think that it is the most important. In order that they can write your essay better. They’d better read and study the tips at Page 8 carefully before writing.
Step VI The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard
Unit 11 Scientific achievement
The Fourth Period
I . Areas
exploring space
genetic research
computer engineering
medical science
II. Words and phrases
put forward
aim at
announce
map out
The Seventh Period
Revision:
Go over the important points in this unit once again, and give Ss some additional reading materials if possible.
Zhongguancun Science Park is China's biggest science park with a high concentration of scientific and technological institutions and intellectual resources. Located in this area are 39 institutions of higher learning represented by Beijing University and Tsinghua University. There are 213 research institutions as exemplified by the institutions of the Chinese Academy of Sciences (CAS) and the Chinese Academy of Engineering (CAE) and 37% of the academicians of both the CAS and CAE are living and working in this area. Each year, thousands of sophisticated research discoveries emerge in this area and pour out to all places throughout China. Many state-level laboratories and important engineering and technology centers are concentrated in this area too. Zhongguancun Science Park is the largest software development and production center in China.
Zhongguancun Science Park in fact is composed of five science zones like Haidian Zone, Fengtai Zone, Changping Zone, the Electronic City Zone and Yizhuang Zone. Some ten thousand new and hi-tech enterprises, such as Legend, Stone, Founder, Zhongguancun Science and Technology, Tsinghua Tongfang, Netease, are all doing their business at Zhongguancun. In addition, there are some 1500 R&D centers and hi-tech companies set up by or invested by renowned overseas transnational companies like IBM, Microsoft, Mitsubishi in this area as well as 40 overseas listed companies. At present Zhongguancun has become the most important growth point in the economic development of the capital which makes a contribution of 60% of the total industrial growth of the city. The business income generated from the industry, trade and technology of Zhongguancun Science Park in accounted for 18% of the total income of all the 53 national new and hi-tech parks.
In June , the State Council of China officially approved the “Note of Request to Expedite the Building of Zhongguancun Science Park for the Purpose of Implementing the Strategy of Rejuvenating the Country through Science and Education” by the Beijing Municipal Government and the Ministry of Science and Technology and instructed the Beijing Municipal Government and the Ministry of Science and Technology to speed up the construction process of Zhongguancun Science Park in order to build it into a comprehensive reform trial base for implementing the strategy of rejuvenating the country through science and education and the two essential changes, a model base of international technical innovation with competitiveness, an incubator and radiating center for its scientific and technological achievements with its footing in the capital city of Beijing but facing the whole country and a base for training innovators and a first-class science park in the world. This is the most important trans-century decision made by the central government after its decisions of establishing the Shenzhen Special Zone in 1980s and opening up Shanghai's Pudong area in 1990s.
Beijing People's Municipal Government promulgated “Regulations of the Zhongguancun Science Park” on January 1, 2001, which provides the legal basis and guideline for its future development. The Park is now moving on at vigorous strides in promoting technology innovation in accordance with the principle of “Bold innovation in the areas not banned by the law” with the ambition of achieving great changes every year and make the Park a first-rate science park in the world within 10 years.
Zhongguancun is indeed a place full of opportunities and challenges as well as bright hopes. All domestic and overseas companies and individuals are welcome to Zhongguancun for business development.
篇6：英语教案－At the shop(人教版高二英语上册教案教学设计)
Teaching Aims and demands
本单元通过学习马克吐温的《百万英镑》并改编成短剧形式的课文，学生能初步了解作者的风格。学生应能在教师的指导下，排演这个短剧。通过对话课的学习与操练，学生接触表示坚持个人意见的常用语句，并要求学生运用到实际会话中。学习并初步掌握as if和no matter引导让步状语从句的用法。
Teaching important and difficult points
1．单词
run, choice, note, change, fool, order, pleasant, right, assistant, customer, foolish, insist, tailor depend, favo(u)r , apologize, excited
2．词组
shop assistant, a clothes shop, give back, or else, change…for …, in the sun, try on, depend on, take place, get off, put on, drop in, once upon a time, do up, in fact, keep back, play the part of, next to
3．交际用语
There seems to be something wrong with it.
I would like you to change this blouse.
You sold me a blouse that I can’t use any more.
I am afraid I can’t do that right now.
Why can’t you do something about it?
Is anything the matter?
4．语法
学习as if和no matter的用法。
教学建议
课文建议
在Lesson 38课，建议教师应组织学生1）以节目的形式演出这段对话。2）教师可选取录像或多媒体形式完成此课的教学任务。3）教师把学生分成三人一组，适当准备一些道具排演本课的最后结局的短剧。4）教师要求学生找出能刻画服装店老板人物特征和心理变化的相关语句。如：There’s a customer, Tod, Will you serve him? / No matter what he is wearing , Tod, just show him the cheapest./Come, come. Get him his change, Tod..
对话分析
本单元对话是讲述在服装店调换衣服的经过，学生对其内容较易理解，但一些新单词的用法应掌握，如：customer, run, insist, change…for…。本课中也提供了给学生做相应对话的练习，如：A pair of trousers, A radio的口语练习。
教学重点难点
1.serve的用法
1)serve(sb.) as sth.表示“为（某人）工作，（尤指）当佣人”。
He served as a gardener and chauffeur.他做园艺工人兼司机。
2)serve还可表示“供职，服役”。
He has served his country well.他为国尽职。
3)serve sb. (with sth.). 表示“将（饭菜）端上桌。”
Four waiters served lunch for us.有四位服务员招待我们吃午饭。
4)serve 还可用于“（在商店等处）接待（顾客）或为顾客取货物”的意思中。
Are you being served?有售货员接待您吗？
He served some sweets to the children.他为孩子们拿来了他们想要的糖。
5)serve 还指“（一份饭）够……”。
This packet of soup serves two.这包汤料够两个人食用。
2.judge的用法
1)judge用作动词，表示作“断定，估计，认为”解。其后可带宾语从句，也可带不定式或形容词、名词等引导的宾补成分。
We judge that they have finished.我们估计他们已经干完了。
We judge them to have finished.我们估计他们已经干完了。
She judged him about fifty.她估计他在五十岁左右。
The committee judged it better to start the investigation at once.委员会认为最好立即开始此项调查。
From his letter, we judged his visit to China a great success.从他的来信判断他对中国的访问非常成功。
2)judge用作“判断，断定”解时，还可接wh-分句或wh-加不定式结构。
I can’t judge whether she was right or wrong.我不能断定她是对还是错。
3)judge还可表示“评判，评价”，可说judge sb. / sth.
Don’t judge a man by his looks.勿以貌取人。
4)Judging by / from…（从……来看，据……来判断）是惯用短语，可用来引导独立分句。
Judging from his looks ,he may be sick.从外表看，他或许生病了。
Judging by his accent, he must be from Guangdong.听口音，他准是个广东人。
3.get off的用法
1)get off意为“脱下”。
It’s rather hot today, we must get off the jacket.今天太热了，我们必须脱下夹克衫。
2)注意：get off还可作“下车”；“离开”；“出发”；“起飞”解。
As soon as I got off the bus, I started for the village on foot. 我一下公共汽车，就开始步行到村里去。
We must get off at once or we II be late我们必须马上走，否则要迟到了。
We got off immediately after breakfast.我们一吃过早饭就出发了。
The plane got off on time. 飞机准时起飞。
4．favor的用法
1）in favor (of )表示“赞成、主张”，常用作表语或后置定语。
The students were in favor of reform. 学生赞成改革。
2）do sb. a favor或do a favor for sb. 是个正式的礼貌用语，意思是 “给某人以恩惠，帮某人的忙”。
Would you do me a favor? 帮我一下好吗？
Do me a favor by turning off the radio. 帮我把收音机关掉。
Do me the favor to come. 务请光临。
注：do sb. a favor后接of doing 或不定式时，应将不定冠词a改为定冠词the。
5．put down的用法
1）意为“写下；记下”。
Put down your name and your telephone number.写下你的名字和电话号码。
Put this down in your notebook for future reference.这点记在你的笔记本上，以供今后参考。
2）可作“镇压；扑灭”。
The fire was finally put down by the firemen.大火最后终于被消防队员扑灭了。
6.as if的用法
as if 是连词词组，作“好像”、“好似”解，引导表语从句，用于下列句型中：
It looks/seems as if ....表示“看起来似乎……”。其中It为无人称代词，本身并无词义。looks / seems是连系动词，as if引出表语从句。
It looks as if it is going to show. 看来，要下雪。
It seemed as if the suit was made to his own measure. 这套衣服看来似乎是按尺寸给他定做的。
除此之处，as if也可以引导方式状语从句，修饰主句的谓语，此时从句中的谓语动词常用虚拟语气。关于这一点，暂可不必向学生交代。
The woman loves the children as if she were their mother.这个妇女爱这些孩子，她好像就是他们的妈妈一样。
7. no matter 的用法
no matter作“无论”、“不管”解，用以引导表示让步的状语从句，常用在下列句型中： 句型中的No matter what (who/when etc.)...分别表示“无论何事”、“无论何人”、“无论何时”等，这个从句可以置主句之前，也可以置主句之后。
由no matter + what等引导的让步状语从句。No matter后面接关系代词或关系副词引导状语从句在句中作让步状语。
No matter what you do, you must be very careful.不管做什么事，你都必须非常细心。
No matter之后可用what以外的关系代词或关系副词。例如：
No matter who you are (=Whoever you are), I’ll never let you in.无论你是谁，我绝不让你进去。
No matter which…无论哪一个……
No matter which you choose(=Whichever you choose), you will be satisfied.不论你选择哪一个，你都会满意的。
No matter where…无论何处；不管在哪里……
No matter where I go (=Wherever I go) , I will be thinking of you. 无论我到哪里，我都会想着你。
No matter when …无论何时，不管什么时候……
I’ll discuss it with you no matter when you like(=whenever like). 你什么时候高兴，我愿意同你讨论这件事。
No matter how..不管……如何；无论……多么……
No matter how hard you try(=However hard you try), you will never be successful. 不管你如何努力，你都不会成功的。
8．drop in, drop in on 与drop in at的区别
drop in 意为“顺便走访” He often drops in for tea. 他经常顺便来喝茶。
drop in on 后接人意为“顺便拜访某人”。
She dropped in on me yesterday.
drop in at后接表示地点的名词意为“顺便来（去）某处看看”。
Tom usually drops in at my place on his way home. 答题时要注意drop in后所接的名词表示的意思。
Jane used to ____ the tailor’s on her way home from work.
A. drop in B. drop in on C. drop in at D. drop at
詹妮以前常下班后去成衣店看看。the tailor’s 表示地点，故正确答案为C。
9．run的用法
1）表示“跑，奔跑，赛跑”。
The boy ran off as soon as we appeared.我们一来，孩子们都跑了。
She used to run when she was at college.在大学时她经常练跑步。
2）run还可表示“（火车、汽车、轮船等）往来行驶”
Buses to Oxford run every half hour.去牛津的公共汽车每半小时一班。
The trains don’t run on Christmas Day.圣诞节火车停驶。
3）run可用业表示“（液体）流动”。
Could you run me a hot bath?你给我放盆热水洗澡好吗？
Your nose is running.你又流鼻涕了。
4）run表示“（衣服上的染料或颜色）掉色，扩散”。
I’m afraid the color ran when I washed your new skirt.很遗憾， 我洗你那条新裙子的时候它掉色了。
5）run可表示“融化”。
It was so hot that the butter ran.天太热，黄油开始化了。
The wax began to run. 蜡开始融化了。
6）run还可表示“负责、经营、管理”。
He has no idea of how to run the successful business.他不知道把企业办好的方法。
Stop trying to run my life for me.我的生活用不着你来管。
10．Come, come. Get him his change. Tod. ( =Hurry up. Tod, Give the man his change.) 得了，得了，给他找钱吧，托德。
句中的come用作感叹语，表示“劝导”，“不耐烦”的情绪。come作感叹语用时，在不同的情况下，可以表示不同的感表，如“鼓励”、“惊异”、“命令”等。例如：
Come, come, Alice, you must be patient. 好了，爱丽丝，你得忍耐点。
本句中的change是不可数名词，作“零钱”，“找给的钱”解。又如：
Here is your change. 这是找给你的零钱。
change还可以用作及物动词，作“零钱”，“换钱”解。
Could you change a 10-yuon note, please? 你能换开10元钱吗？
教学设计方案Lesson 37
Teaching aims
1. Practise in pairs talking about buying clothes in a shop.
2. Study the language points in lesson 37.
Teaching procedures
StepⅠRevision
1. Check the homework exercises.
2. Revise articles of clothing by asking questions. Get as many as possible from the students and write them on the blackboard.
Questions for the teacher to ask the students:
1) What words have you learned about clothes ?
trousers, coat, jacket, shirt, overcoat……
2) What color do you like best if you buy a blouse ?
a gray one, red one, blue one, black one, yellow one, white one ……
Step Ⅱ Warming-up
Look at the picture on P 55.
1. Ask the students to say something about the picture. Let the students know a new word: blouse.
Answer: It’s a clothes shop. There are many clothes in the shop. Two women are talking now. They are talking about the white blouse and the red blouse in the shop.
2. Ask the students how different clothes are washed. Make a table on the blackboard if you like
as follows:
HOT WASH white cotton
WARM WASH coloured cotton
COLD WASH silk , wool
Step Ⅲ Listening and reading
Let the students listen to the dialogue once or twice and then answer same questions.
1. What did the customer buy last week?
… She bought, a blouse last weds
2. Whats wrong with the blouse?
… When doe washed the blouse, the color ran.
3. What did the customer ask the assistant to do?
…She asked the assistant to change the clothes or give the money back to her.
4. Did the assistant give the money back to the customer ? Why ?
…No, because the manager of the shop wasnt in. And the assistant couldnt decide whether to give it back to her or not.
Step Ⅳ Practice
Let students fill in the blanks of the dialogue.
SA: Good afternoon. Can I 1 you ?
C: Yea, please. I 2 this radio the day before yesterday. But there is something 3 with it. Last night it just couldnt. I 4 cant use it.
SA: Let me 5 . It scans as if it hasnt been 6 properly. Has it been left in the sun or__ 7_?
C: Of 8 not. How can I be 9 foolish ?
SA: 10 its the 11 of the factory that made it. I think I will send back to the 12 and get it repaired.
C: You may 13 it back to the factory, but I would like my money 14 .
SA: I’m 15 I cant do that.
C: Why cant you do 16 about it ? Id like you to change this 17 or else 18 me my money back.
SA: All right. You can 19 it for another one. Would you please 20 a look at these ones ?
Answers:
1. help 2. bought 3. wrong 4. work 5. see 6. used 7. rain 8. course 9. that 10. Maybe 11. fault 12. factory 13. send 14. back 15. afraid 16. something 17. radio18. give 19. change 20. have
Fill in the blanks.
1．这台收音机有问题吗？
Is there ______ _______ ________ the radio?
2．请把借我的书还我。
Please give me _______ the book that you _______from me.
3．天看上去要下雪了。
It _______ as if it’s going to_______.
4．他坚持要明天去那儿。
He _______ that he _______ there tomorrow.
5．别让孩子站在太阳底下。
Don’t _______ the child stand ________ the sun.
6．我想让汤姆的弟弟去做那项工作。
I would _______ Tom’s brother ________ do the work.
Answers
1. anything wrong with 2. back …borrowed 3. seems…snow 4. insists …go 5. have/ keep …in 6. like …to
StepⅤ Language points
Let students read the dialogue and ask them to pay attention to some key sentences and then the teacher gives some brief explanation.
1. There seem (s) to be…
2. like常见的句型是
like sb. to do sth./ like to do sth./ like doing sth.
3. I’m not that foolish =I am not so foolish.
4.It looks as if + 句子 =It seems as if + 句子
5. insist + that - clause + ( should ) + v
Step Ⅵ Further practise
1.Get good pairs of students to act out their dialogues in front of the class without their books if possible.
2. Provide a few situations for the Ss, let them practise the dialogues by dividing the different groups.
1)You have just bought a pair of shoes from a shoe shop. But later you find that the shoes are not of the same size. So you go to the shop again. Make a dialogue between the shop assistant and you.
2) You have just bought a tape-recorder. But it does not work as soon as you get home. So you go back to the shop and ask for a new one..
Step Ⅶ Exercise
Do exercises Ex 1--3. on Page 118.
A customer brought a blouse in a clothes shop last week. She found that the colours _____when she washed it. Thinking that there must be ______wrong with it, she went back to the shop. The shop_____ asked her whether she did not follow the ______and washed it in hot water. The ______said she was not ______foolish. It seemed that it was the ______of the company that produced it .The customer _______that the shop should give her money back, but the shop assistant refused. Finally the customer decided to change the blouse _______another one.
Key:
ran, something, assistant, instructions, customer, that (so), insisted, fault, for
StepⅧ Homework
1.Do exercises Ex 2--3. on Page 118.
2.Get the students to do the vocabulary preparation in Lesson 38 .
教学设计方案Lesson 38
Teaching Aims
1. Learn lesson 38 to get brief idea of the story.
2.The students are required to answer some questions.
Step I Revision
1）Check the homework exercises.
2）Oral practice.
1．你的手表有问题吗？ 2．我想让你去做这件事。
3．似乎看来这本书被他看完了。 4．我坚持让他把钱还我。
5．对不起，是我的错。 6．你为什么让他一直在田里工作。
Answers:
1. 1s there anything wrong with your watch?
2. I’d like you to do the work.
3. It seems as if the book has been finished reading by him.
4. I insisted that he (should) give me my money back.
5. Im sorry. Its my fault.
6. Why did you have him working in the fields?
StepⅡ Warm---up
Talk about Mark Twain.
1. What is Mark Twain?
Mark Twain is an American writer.
2. In our middle school text books. What articles were written by Mark Twain?
“Run for a Governor.” “A Million Pound Note”
Step Ⅲ Listening and talking
Today we are going to learn a dialogue, which is a part from A Million Pound Note. Listen to the tape and then talk about the pictures on P. 56 & P. 57.
Picture 1: A customer came into a tailors shop. The shop assistant looked at him up and down. From the clothes, the assistant thought he was a poor man.
Picture 2: After the tailor knew the man had one million pound note, he was very surprised. The manager measured him by himself. They changed their attitude to the man completely.
Step ⅣReading
Read the dialogue quickly and try to answer the questions.
1. What did the customer want?
2. How did the customer Tod?
3. What did the shop assistant show the customer?
4. How did the customer want to pay?
5. What made the manager fed excited?
6. What can we learn from the story?
Keys:
1.The customer wanted to buy a suit.
2.He looked poor. And his clothes were old.
3.He showed the customer the cheapest clothes
4.He wanted to pay with a large note.
5.The million pound note made the manager feel excited.
6.We should never judge a person by his clothes.
Step ⅤLanguage points
1.no matter + wh ---引导让步状语从句
2.Is anything the matter? 怎么回事？the matter =wrong
3. do sth. a favour =do a favour for do 帮某人一个忙；答应某人的要求
4.drop in on + 人/ drop in at + 地点
Step ⅥOral practise
Divide the Ss into a few groups to practise a play according to the text.
Step Ⅶ Exercise
Do Exercise 3 on Page 119
A customer went into a tailors shop to buy a new ______. All he had in his pocket was a million - pound ______. His wearies (衣服) were so worn - wit that the shop assistant looked ______ upon him and ______ him the cheapest clothes. In his mind, that was the best ______ for such a poor man.
When the customer ______ him the million - pound note, the shop assistant felt very ______ and didnt know what to do. Just then the manager went ______ to him and asked what was happening. Seeing the note, he got so _______ that he asked the customer to do him a ______ to get those cheap clothes ______ and ______on much better ones. Then he ______the gentleman and picked out nice _____for making a suit ______this mans own measure. The man said that he couldnt ______ the clothes unless they would wait or ______ the note. The manager promised to wait ______ his life. Finally, he told the assistant to ______ down the mans address. The gentleman said it was not necessary because he would drop ______ and leave his new address ______ he found another hotel.
Keys: suit; note; down; chose; choice; showed; surprised; up; exceed; favor, off; put; measured; material; to; order; change; all; put; in; when
Step Ⅷ Homework
1. Retell the story in your own words.
2.Prepare the next text.
探究活动
教师根据对话内容，可让学生设计买其它东西的场景，for example: You have just bought a recorder. But it does not work as soon as you get home. So you go back to the shop and you didn’t want it. 教师让学生自己进行复述发生的经过同时教师给学生提供部分的语句和提示：1）buy a recorder last week 2) It didn’t work 3) either change it or get money back 4)persuade you to change it for another one.
篇7：高中教案(人教版高二必修) 教案教学设计
教学目标：
1． 知识目标：学习运用分论点，并举例论证的方法，领略借古讽今的写作特点。
2． 能力目标：理解：弊、率、完、患、暴、判、速、再、数等词语的意义。
3. 德育目标：得、非、或、相、势等多义词的义项，了解使动用法。
教学重点难点：
本文不同于纯粹论史的文章，它具有很强的针对性，教学重点是理解它的政论目的，即借古讽今，批评北宋政府对西夏、契丹的妥协政策。
教学课时：2课时
第一课时
教学目标：
1． 知识目标：学习运用分论点，并举例论证的方法，领略借古讽今的写作特点。
2． 能力目标：理解：弊、率、完、患、暴、判、速、再、数等词语的意义。
3. 德育目标：得、非、或、相、势等多义词的义项，了解使动用法。
教学要点：了解作者及背景，整体把握课文，研习一、二段。
教学过程：
一、导语设计：
唐太宗李世民在其名相魏征去世后，感慨地说：“人以铜为镜，可以正衣冠；以史为镜，可以知兴替；以人为镜，可以明得失。朕常保此三镜，以防己过。今魏征殂逝，遂亡一镜矣！”如何以史为镜，关键在于发现错综复杂的历史事实之间的内在联系，理出导致王朝兴替的中心线索，才能达到借鉴史实、古为今用之目的。战国七雄，何以演变为秦一枝独秀，且看苏洵是如何抽丝剥茧、层层剖析的。
1． 作者简介： 苏洵（1009-1066），字明允，四川眉山人，与其子苏轼、苏辙合称“三苏”，列入“唐宋八大家”。
苏洵在文学上取得显著成就，是经过一番刻苦读书、认真作文的过程的。据他自述，少年时，他不爱学习，到了二十五岁，才开始知道读书。自以为比伙伴们学得好，但后来取古人之文一读，才觉得古人的“出言用意”都跟自己大不相同，于是下决心将过去所写的数百篇文章全部烧毁。然后，将《论语》《孟子》、韩愈的文章取来，终是诵读，读了七八年，才感到古代文章确实写得好。时间一久，读之益精，自己胸中也“害然以明”，但还未敢自出其言。又经过一番努力，胸中之言日益多，甚至不能控制自己，只好将它书写下来。到了这时，落笔为文，才“浑浑乎觉其来之不易矣”。这就是历史上关于苏洵焚稿、勤奋读书、刻苦作文的美谈。
苏洵为文，成就显著。因此博得他同时代的文坛领袖欧阳修以及著名文学家曾巩的好评。欧阳修指出：苏洵之文“博辩宏伟”。曾巩认为：苏洵之文“其雄壮俊伟，若决江河而下也；其辉光明白，若引星辰而上也”。 三人（三苏）之文章，盛传于世。得而读之者，皆为之惊，或叹不可及，或慕而效之。自京师至于海隅障徼，学士大夫，莫不人知其名，家有其书。 （选自《苏明允哀词》）2．听课文录音，介绍背景，了解写作意图。
在我国历史上战国七雄争霸时代，《六国论》中的“六国”即除秦以外的齐、楚、燕、韩、赵、魏六个国家。秦国本来是个弱小落后的国家，经过商鞅变法的彻底改革，经济和军事实力都强大起来；而原本强大的六国却因宗法势力的强大，因循守旧，经济和军事实力日益衰落。秦强盛起来后，积极向东发展，夺取六国的土地。六国也曾联合起来对抗秦国，这就是所谓“合纵”。但他们各有自己的打算，所以这种联合并不巩固。秦采取“远交近攻”的军事战略。韩、魏、楚三国都紧靠秦国，因此直接受到秦国的威胁和侵略。在秦国强大的军事和外交攻势下，纷纷割地求和，并最早被消灭；齐、燕、赵三国也相继灭亡。六国灭亡，“非兵不利，战不善”，其原因是多方面的，绝不仅仅是因为割地赂秦。苏洵抓住六国破灭，弊在赂秦“这一点来论证，是为其针砭现实服务的。
北宋建国后一百年间，北宋军队与契丹、西夏军队大小六十余战，几多胜少。到北宋中期，军费开支浩大，财政入不敷出，社会矛盾尖锐，政治上专制腐败，军事上骄惰无能，外交上极端软弱。苏洵生活年代（10），契丹大举攻宋，直逼黄河北岸的澶州城下，威胁宋都，宰相寇准力主抗辽，宋找了胜仗，但北宋最高统治者面对 有利的形势却屈辱求和，与之订立“澶渊之盟”，北宋每年要向契丹纳银二十万两，绢三十万匹；向西夏纳银十万两，绢十万匹，茶三万斤。这样贿赂的结果，助长了契丹、西夏的气焰，加重了人民的负担，极大地损伤了国力，带来了无穷的祸患。北宋的这种输币、纳贡求和的办法，与“六国”赂秦而求一夕安寝的政策极为相似。所以，苏洵写了《六国论》，以“六国破灭之道”来进行讽谏，希望北宋统治者改弦更张，勿蹈覆辙。正所谓“前事不忘，后事之师”。
3．正音：
赂（lu） 率 （shuai,全都，一概） 暴（pu，暴露） 厥 （jue，他的）
洎 （ji，及、到） 为（wei，治理）国者无使为（wei，被）积威之所劫
二．对课文进行整理把握。
明确：史论--叙述评论历史事实、总结历史教训、讽喻时政
一至三：对历史事实的描写与评论
四至五：对历史的总结与感慨
1．一、二段中重要词句：
非/兵不利，战不善，弊在/赂秦
六国互（交互，引申为相伴）丧，率（全，都，一概）赂秦也
盖（副词，表猜测原因）失强援，不能独完（形容词作动词，保全）
秦以（相当于“于”，在）攻取之外
较（比较）秦之所得，与战胜而得者，其（这）/实（实际上）百倍
思厥（其）先祖（祖辈）/父（父辈） 暴秦之欲无厌（通“餍”，满足）
至于（到了……的结局）颠覆，理固（本来）宜（应该）然
此言得（符合）之（上面的道理）
2．研习第一段：
提问：全文的中心论点是什么？
明确：六国破灭，弊在赂秦。
问：从几个方面说明这一中心论点的？
明确：A 赂秦力亏，破灭之道也。
B 不赂者以赂者丧。
问：第一自然段在全文中的作用是什么？
明确：提出中心论点，总领全文，引发以下议论。
背诵第一自然段。
3．研习第二段。
提问：能不能用一句话概括第二自然段的中心意思？
明确：“以地事秦，犹抱薪救火，薪不尽，火不灭。”
问：本段从哪几个方面说明赂秦的危害？
明确：A 以地事秦，导致了敌我双方力量对比的变化，刺激了贪欲和扩张的野心。
B 韩、楚、魏三国以地事秦求苟安而不得。
问：本段的中心内容，印证了第一自然段中的哪一句话？
明确：赂秦而力亏，破灭之道也。
4．布置作业：熟读、背诵全文。
完成课后练习一、二。
三.教学回顾：
第二课时
教学目标：
1． 知识目标：学习运用分论点，并举例论证的方法，领略借古讽今的写作特点。
2． 能力目标：理解：弊、率、完、患、暴、判、速、再、数等词语的意义。
3. 德育目标：得、非、或、相、势等多义词的义项，了解使动用法。
教学重点：研习第三、四、五段，小结课文特色，完成练习。
1． 齐读第三段。
A． 重要词句：
迁灭：古代灭掉一个国家，要迁走该国的传国重器，如武王灭商，迁九鼎于洛邑。迁灭即灭亡。下文的“革灭”，革是除旧，也是灭亡的意思。 义（坚守正义，名作动词用）不赂秦斯用兵之效（功效）也 至丹以荆卿（表示对人的尊称）为计 始速（招致，动词）祸焉 向（先前）使（假使）三国名爱其地 胜负之数（命运），存亡之理（道理） 当（应当）与秦相较（抗衡），或未易量（估量）
B． 提问：找出段中表述齐国灭亡的一句话。
明确：“与嬴而不助五国也。”
比较燕赵两国的相同点与不同点。
明确：共同点--形势环境相同，处秦革灭殆尽之际。
军事策略相同，能守其土，义不赂秦。
不同点--对抗秦国的方式不同
燕太子丹招募荆轲刺秦王招致祸患。
赵因李牧被谗言所害自毁长城。
找出第一段中与本段意思吻合的一句话。
明确：“不赂者以赂者丧，盖失强援，不能独完。”
提问：最后一句话在全文中有什么作用？
明确：用“向使”引起假设，总结六国情况，使论证更加深入全面， 中心论点更加鲜明有力，同时又为下文进一步假设作铺垫，从反面将论证推进一层。
2． 研习第四段，齐读。
A． 重要词句
并力西向（进军），则吾恐秦人食之（结构助词，无实义）不得下咽也。 为（治理）国者无（不要）使（让自己）为（被）积威之所劫（胁迫、挟持）哉。
B． 提问：前一层与上一段末句有怎样的关系？后一层有什么作用？
明确：上一段末句从消极方面来说，不该用什么策略；这一层从积极方面说该用什么策略。
以六国灭亡作结，自然引出一般性结论--历史教训
“有如此之势”--承上启下
提问：作者在本段连用了两个叹词，有什么作用？
明确：呜呼--承接上段末尾，提出六国合力抗秦的主张。
悲夫--又回到历史中，感叹六国破灭的可悲结局，抨击六国的政策。提出“为秦人积威之所劫”才是赂秦之根源。
作用：表达作者对历史的思考与感慨，起到连接作用，在历史与现实间快速自由转移，引导读者理清思路。
提问：最后一句语带双关，请说明其含义。
明确：作者对历史事实分析后的议论，明确了六国赂秦的根本原因，同时也切合当时北宋王朝的实际情况，委婉地劝谕当权者面对北方的威胁，放弃屈辱的妥协政策，不要重蹈历史的覆辙。 齐读、背诵。
3． 研习第五段。
A． 重要词句：
而犹（还）有可（可以）以（凭）不赂而胜之（秦国）之（的）势。
苟（假如）以天下之大，而从（追随）六国破亡之故事，是（这）又在六国下矣。
B． 提问：第五自然段在全文论述中起了什么作用？
明确：本段议论的基础建立在作者自己对历史事实的分析上，源于历史，但又高于历史，讽谏北宋王朝面对外来侵略不要重蹈历史覆辙。
4． 小结本文思路。
[板书]
大欲大患
固不在战 强弱
胜负
赂秦力亏 奉之弥繁 不战 韩 魏 楚
破灭之道 侵之愈急 已判
以地事秦
六国破灭 抱薪救火
非兵不利
战不善 齐人与嬴 终继迁灭
弊在赂秦 不赂秦者 不助五国 势所不免
以赂者丧 燕谴刺客 齐 燕 赵
（盖失强援 始速祸焉 智力孤危
不能独完） 赵失良将 战败而亡
用武不终
5． 小结课文特点： 借古讽今，切中实弊。
论点鲜明，论证严密。
语言生动，气势充沛。
6、教学回顾：
游褒禅山记
教学目标：
1．读准下列字词，掌握它们的写法： 褒禅 窈然 仆 碑 怠 胜 相 观
2．学习本文将情／景／理浑然融合的写法；
3．学习本文以事明理的写法及作者的观点和主张．
教学重点：掌握以下实词和虚词：
1. 一词多义----观 得 其 然 文言实词 者 夫 盖
2．学习体会本文将议论／记叙／描写／抒情恰当结合的写法
教学课时：2教时
第 一 教 时
教学目标：1．在熟读课文的基础上，疏通文意；
2．引导学生学习本文的重点文言实词和文言虚词；
教学重点：背诵一、二自然段
一．导入新课：请生回忆初中学习过的一些文言文， 说说有哪些`记'文，这 些`记'文有什么特点． 初中学习过的游记文章有： 核舟记 岳阳楼记 醉翁亭记 `记'是一种文体, 可以记叙, 也可以说明／议论／描写／抒情
我们曾学习过一篇王安石的文章＜伤仲永＞， 你都了解些哪些？
王安石(1021--1086) ， 北宋政治家／思想家／文学家，改革家．
晚号半山．抚州临川人．神宗时，曾推行变法，后因保守派
反对失败后，退居江宁，封舒国公，旋改封荆，也称荆公．卒谥文．
其散文雄建峭拔，被推为`唐宋八大家'之一．其作品今存＜王临川
集＞＜临时川集携带遗等．
2．＜游＞文是王安石矢职回家时，浏览此山后所记．
二．熟悉课文
1．请生朗读课文，尽量做到声音宏亮，句子流利．
2．读准下列字音：
褒 庐 谬 窈 怠 惑 相 胜 圭 父
3．再读课文，初步掌握课文各段内容．
4．从表达方式考虑，课文共五段，各段表达方式有何不同／
第一段叙述，介绍褒禅山的有关情况；第二段叙述，记写游山情
况；第三／四段议论，第五段补记游山的有尖情况．
三．学习第一、二段．
1．根据课文注释及课下预习，翻译第一段．
2．重点词语及句式
⑴ 实词：
唐浮图慧褒始舍于其下－－舍，读社，筑舍定居，名词用如动词．
以故其后名之曰褒禅－－名，命名，名词用作动词．
⑵虚词
盖音谬也－－盖，承接上文，解释原因，有＂大概＂的意思
盖余所至－－发语词，也含有大概之意．
⑶句式
今所谓慧空禅院者，褒之庐冢也－－者也式判断句
今言华如华实之华者，概音谬也－－同上．
唐浮图慧褒始舍于其址－－始舍于其址，即，始于其址舍，介宾
短语后置．
四．作业 熟读全文，翻译全文，背会前二段．
五、教学回顾：
第 二 教 时
教学目标：1．在熟读课文的基础上，疏通文意；
2．引导学生学习本文的重点文言实词和文言虚词；
教学重点：多种表达方式的恰当运用是本文学习的重点．
一．检查复习
1．默写生字词；
2．请生背诵1－2段．
二．重点研读第三段
1．请生翻译本段．
2．掌握下列文言知识：
⑴ 字词 于时－－在这里是文意上的承前启后，可译作＂对于这件事＂．
⑵ 句式
古之人观于山川、草木、虫鱼、鸟兽、往往有得－－倒装句，介宾短语后置．
此余之所得也－－判断句．
3．讨论：
在这一段里，作者一开始就指出古人浏览观赏,＂往往有得＂，
其＂有得＂的原因是什么呢？ 以其求思之深而无不在也．
作者引出古人观赏有得的目的是什么呢？ 借托古人引出自己的观点．
那么，怎样才能做到象古人那样探究思考的广泛而深入呢？作者从哪些方面来发挥的？
讨论归纳： 从五方面阐述：
⑴世之奇伟、瑰怪、非常之观，常在于险远，嘏人之所罕至焉， 故非有志者不能至也－－突出＂志＂的重要性；
⑵有志矣，不随以止也，然吃不足者，亦不能至也－－说明＂力 ＂的重要性；
⑶有志与力，而又不随以怠，至于幽暗昏惑而无物以相之，亦不能至也－－说明＂物＂的重要性；
⑷然力足以至焉，于人为可讥，在己为有悔－－物、力都足以至 而未至，肢有＂悔＂；只有＂尽吾志也，可以无悔也＂－－强调＂尽吾志＂的重要性．
通过以上议论，说明要＂求思之深而无不在＂，要有－－志、力 、物；但一切事物都可能存在其不足之处，当力和物难求时，只有＂ 尽吾志＂，才能做到＂无悔＂、无＂可讥＂．
4．第四段，作者从仆碑发生联想，指出对待传闻应该采取深思慎取的态度．
三．总结全文
1．请生根据课文内容概括本文主题思想．
作者记叙游览褒禅山，抒发秘书的感想： 无论治学处事，都要有百折不挠的意志，才能无讥无悔，也应该有深思慎取的态度．从今天来看，对我们仍有借鉴意义．
四．讨论完成书后练习二，掌握＂其＇的用法及特点．
关于＂其＂的几种用法：
＂其＂的用法主要有两种：作代词和语气助词．具体用法如下：
1．用作代词：
(1) 代第三人称: 可译作 “他的” “他” “他们” “它” ．例： 安求其能千也？＜马说＞
(2) 作物主代词, 表领属关系,可译作 “他(它)的” “他(它)们 的” ．例 “吾视其辙乱，望其旗靡，故逐之．”
(3) 又作指示代词，表近指，译作＂这＂＂这些＂；远指，可译作＂那＂＂那些＂．例：有蒋氏者，专其利三世矣．
(4) 用在数词之前，表示＂其中的＂意思．例：蜀之鄙有二僧 ，其一贫，其一富．
2．用作副词．
(1) 表示推测、估计，可译作＂大概＂＂或许＂．例：圣人之 所以为圣，愚人之所以为愚，其皆出于此乎？
(2) 表示诘问，可译为＂难道＂＂怎么＂．
(3) 表示祈使，可译作＂一定＂．例：寡人欲以五百里之地易安陵，安陵君其许寡人！
(4) 表示未来，可译作＂将＂＂将要＂．例：以残年余力，曾 不能毁山之一毛，其如土石何？
3．用作助词，表示加强语气．
五．讨论完成练习三，学习掌握＂观、名、文、求＂等实词的用法．
六．课后作业
1．完成练习五．
2．完成同步练习各题．
七、教学回顾：
伶官传序
教学目标：
1． 知识目标：学习运用叙事论证的方法，领略借古讽今的写作特点。
2． 能力目标：学习盛、兴、亡等词语的意义。
3. 德育目标：理解叙议结合的写作特点
教学重点难点： 本文不同于纯粹论史的文章，它具有很强的针对性，教学重点是理解它的政论目的
教学课时：1课时
一、导入新课
二、解题
⒈介绍作者和写作背景 ⒉介绍“序”
三、整体感知
⒈朗读课文，扫除字词障碍
2思考：①概括庄宗一生的主要经历。
②本文的中心论点是什么？
四、具体分析
㈠中心论点
⒈庄宗李存勖父亲晋王李克用去世时是9，课下注释中还有三处时间9，923年，926年，参看注释，概括庄宗一生的主要经历。
明确： ①908年，与尔三矢，尔其无忘乃父之志”，受三矢，继父遗命。
②912年，灭燕，“系燕父子以组。”
③923年，灭梁，“函梁君臣之首”，建立后唐。
④926年，后唐亡，“身死国灭，为天下笑。”
⒉庄宗灭敌立国，用了时间；由盛而衰，只有短短的3年。这一盛一衰的关键是什么？用课文的原话回答。
明确：中心论点――“盛衰之理，虽曰天命，岂非人事哉？”
探讨: ①为什么用反问句提出中心论点？
明确：强调 “人事”（政治上的得失）的作用。
②运用哪些论证方法来证明中心论点的？
明确：例证法――后唐庄宗
“得天下”之“盛”→天下豪杰莫能争
对比论证﹤“失天下”之“衰”→身死国灭天下笑
㈡具体论证
⑴ 庄宗得天下用了十几年的时间，而失天下只有三年，作者认为庄宗的“盛”是由于什么原因，而“衰”又是什么原因？用课文中的话来回答。
明确： “盛”--“忧劳可以兴国”“衰”--“逸豫可以亡身”
⑵析“得天下”
a、 课文是如何表现他“得天下”之“盛”的？描述他当年金戈铁马、气吞万里如虎的雄武。
明确： “负而前驱，及凯旋而纳之”
“忧劳可以兴国”﹤“系燕父子以组”
“函梁君臣之首”
b、为什么每次出师征战都要“负而前驱”?
明确：用三支箭激励自己，表明其复报的决心和意志。
c、小结 庄宗不忘世仇，重任在肩，兢兢业业，负矢前行，终得天下，突出强调了“人事”的作用。
⑶析“失天下” a、 庄宗“好俳优”，一些伶人“出入宫掖，侮弄缙绅”，致使“群臣愤激，莫敢出气，或反相附托，以希恩幸，四方藩镇，贿赂交行”，最后终于众叛亲离，不可收拾。课文怎样写其“失天下”之“衰”的？想象庄宗君臣凄然相向、泣下沾襟的悲惨情景。
明确： “仓皇东出”
“逸豫可以亡身”﹤“士卒离散”
“泣下沾襟”
b、小结 庄宗接受遗命，矢志复仇，终如愿以偿，大功告成，便一改初衷，宠幸伶人，以致政纲倾颓，身死国灭。这一“盛”一“衰”、大起大落命运，再次突出“人事”的作用。评曰：“叙唐庄宗处，倏而英俊，倏而衰飒。凭吊唏飒，虽尺幅短章，有萦回无尽之意。”
㈢结论
本来行文到第二部分，论点已得到证明，似乎应结束了，可作者为什么还写第四段?
明确：引出教训，借古讽今
①作者强调使人逸豫亡身的不仅局限于溺爱伶人，如果小看“忽微”，沉溺声色犬马，忘记忧劳兴国的至理，同样会导致身死国灭的下场。
②含蓄批评朝政，讽谏北宋当权者要力戒骄奢，防微杜渐，励精图治。
五、课文小结
本文脉络清晰，首尾呼应，结构紧凑；叙事生动形象，精警有力；抒情以理服人，以情动人。明茅坤《唐宋八十家文抄》卷七十一评：“这等文章，千年绝唱。”清沈德潜《唐宋八大家读本》卷十四评：“抑扬顿挫，得《史记》神髓，《五代史》第一篇文字。”
六、教学回顾：
石钟山记|
教学目标 ：
1、了解苏轼其人
2、熟读课文，初步理解课文大意。 翻译全文。
3、学习作者不轻信前人学说，有疑必察的精神和强调时间、反对主观臆断的态度。
教学重点： 1、了解与苏轼相关的文学常识。
2、读准句读。 翻译全文
课时安排：1课时
第一课时
教学目标 ：
1、了解苏轼其人
2、熟读课文，初步理解课文大意。 翻译全文。
教学要点：1、了解苏轼其人 2、熟读课文，初步理解课文大意。
教学过程 ： 一、导入 同学们，今天我们要来读一篇苏轼的游记散文--《石钟山记》。（板书课题）
二、了解作家和写作背景
苏轼是我国文学史上文豪级的作家，我们有必要先来了解一下苏轼其人。
1、苏轼简介：（阅读《创新课时训练》①第143页的内容，边读边完成如下摘记：①苏轼的基本资料；②苏轼文学成就的具体表现。读完进行交流、明确）
①基本资料：苏轼(1037-1101)，字子瞻，号东坡居士，四川眉山人，我国文学史上杰出的文学家，“唐宋散文八大家”之一，有《苏东坡集》和《东坡乐府》传世。
②文学成就：散文--“唐宋散文八大家”之一，与欧阳修并称“欧苏”，又与其父苏洵、其弟苏辙合称“三苏”；
诗歌--开宋代诗歌新风，与黄庭坚并称“苏黄”；
词--豪放词派创始人，与辛弃疾并称“苏辛”；
书法--北宋“苏、黄、米、蔡”四大家之一。
2、写作背景：
本文是宋神宗元丰七年，苏轼由黄州团练副使移任汝州团练副使时，送他的长子苏迈赴任经过九江湖口，游览石钟山后写的一篇游记。
三、指导学生自读课文（一读）
1、提出要求：
⑴借助书下注释及工具书，了解课文大意。遇到疑问可同座交流、讨论。
⑵轻声朗读课文，注意句内停顿。
2、齐声朗读课文。检查自读情况，及时正音、指导句内停顿。
下列句中的停顿必须注意：
⑴至唐/李渤始访其遗踪 ⑵然/是说也
⑶余自齐安/舟行/适临汝 ⑷舟回/至两山间
四、再读课文（二读）
1、提出要求：
⑴结合“课文思路剖析”②再读课文，理解课文大意。
⑵轻声朗读课文，读准句内停顿，争取读出语气。
2、齐声朗读课文。检查再读效果，及时指出缺点。
3、讨论问题，检查学生理解课文大意的情况。
⑴本文的主旨句是什么？它告诉我们什么道理？ （“事不目见耳闻，而臆断其有无，可乎？”）⑵谁在探究石钟山得名由来的时候，犯了臆断的错误？（李渤）
⑶作者对他是什么态度？（嘲笑）
⑷对郦道元是什么态度？（惋惜）
⑸作者对于自己找到了石钟山得名由来有何感触？（得意、骄傲）从何处可以看出他的得意与骄傲？（“笑谓迈曰”、“而笑李渤之陋也”中的两“笑”）
⑹他为什么有这种得意与骄傲？（1、众人皆错我独对 2、“终士大夫不肯以小舟夜泊绝壁之下”，我独于月夜绝壁之下探寻原因。）
五、齐声朗读课文。（三读）
六、教师小结，布置作业 。
熟读课文1、2两段，试着进行翻译，标注出有疑难的地方。
七、教学回顾：
[高中教案(人教版高二必修) 教案教学设计]
篇8：省略句 教案教学设计(人教版英语高二)
Ⅰ、状语从句中的省略用法
一、如果从句的主语和主句的主语一致，且从句的谓语含有be动词的某种形式（am/is/are/was/were），可同时省略从句的主语和be动词的某种形式。
1、when，while引导的时间状语从句
e.g. Do be careful when (you are) crossing the street.When/While (I was) on my way to work, I met her.
2、if，unless，once引导的条件状语从句e.g. If (it is) properly treated, waste will do no harm to the environment.
I’ll not go to the party unless (I am) invited.
Once (you are) caught stealing in a supermarket, you will be punished.
3、though，although，whether，no matter whether/what/how/who等引导的让步状语从句
e.g. He was happy, though/although (he was) poor.Whether (she is) sick or well, she is always cheerful.
No matter how/However hard the task (is), we must fulfill it in time.（注：从句的主语和主句的主语不一致时，只省略从句中的be动词形式）
4、as if，as though引导的方式状语从句
e.g. He rubbed his eyes and yawned as if/though (he was) waking up after a long sleep.
He stood up as if/though (he wanted) to leave.（as if/though + to do表示一个将来的动作）
二、than，as引导的比较状语从句中的省略用法：
当不同的主语进行比较时，一般省略从句中的谓语；当从句中的主语与谓语（be动词除外）和主句中的主语与谓语相同时，通常省略从句中的主语和谓语，只保留比较部分。
e.g. He is taller than his brother (is).
I have as much as confidence in you as (I have confidence) in him.
三、以if从句为代表的状语从句中的特殊省略用法：通常省略了it is，that is，there is/are。
e.g. If (it is) possible/necessary, this old temple will be rebuilt.
If (that is) so, I will call you back at 5:00 pm.
There are only a few books in our school library, if (there are) any.
Ⅱ、定语从句中的省略用法
关系词的省略 关系代词that，which，whom等在限制性定语从句中充当宾语且不位于介词之后时，可以省略；in which或that在先行词way后作方式状语从句时可省略。
e.g. The man (that/who/whom) you visited last night is my grandpa.
I don’t like the way (in which/that) you treat the girl.
Ⅲ、虚拟语气中if及should的省略
1、当条件状语从句中有were，had，should等时省略if，把它们提至句首，形成倒装句。
e.g. If I were a teacher, I would be strict with my students.= Were I a teacher, I would be strict with my students.
2、Suggest，insist，order，require等表示建议、要求、命令的动词后接的名词性从句中，谓语动词常用“should+动词原形”，should可以省略。e.g. The doctor suggested that he (should) try to lose weight.
Ⅳ、不定式符号to的省略
1、感官动词see，hear，feel，watch等和使役动词have，make，let等后接不定式作宾语时，不定式省略to。
2、do nothing but，can’t help but等结构常接省略to的不定式。
e.g. We didn’t do anything but stay at home watching TV yesterday.
Hearing the news, she couldn’t help but cry.
3、在特定语境中为了避免重复，当不定式再次出现时，在want，wish，hope，try，plan，like，love，hate后往往只保留to，而省略后面的动词。但不定式后有be，have时，也保留be和have。
e.g. My parents encouraged me to go to college, but I didn’t want to.
Ⅴ、So和not的替代性省略
用于避免重复前面所说过的内容，替代词so/not替代肯定或否定的名词性从句。可与believe，do，expect，fear，guess，hope，say，speak，suppose，think，I’m afraid等连用
e.g. – Do you suppose he is going to attend the meeting? – I suppose not
Ⅵ、日常交际中的省略
在情景会话中，答语常常省略不会引起歧义的主语、谓语或宾语部分，而只保留对方希望了解的内容。在复合句或并列句中，也有省略主、谓、宾的情况。
e.g. – How many copies do you want? -- (I want) Three copies, please.
-- Have you ever been to the Great Wall? -- No, (I have) never (been to the Great Wall).
省略句用法专项练习
1、-Lucy，could you please spare me a few minutes?
-____，but I hope “a few minutes” won't turn into a few hours.
A. It doesn't matter B. That's kind of you C. I'm afraid not D. I guess so
2、-Hey，taxi!-_____-I want to go to the dentist's.
A. Good morning, sir. B. Nice to see you, sir. C. Where to, sir? D. What are you going to do, sir?
3、The doctor expresses his strong desire that the patient_____immediately.
A. be operated on B. operated on C. was operated on D. would be operated on
4、When he came back, he found the bag he had____over the seat was gone.
A. left to hang B. left hanging C. left hung D. to leave hanging
5、Liu Xiang spoke slowly to the Special Olympic competitors so as to have them____.
A. understand him B. to be understood C. be understood D. to understand him
6、-Are there any English story books for us students in the library?
-There are only a few, ____.A. if any B. if have C. if some D. if has
7、Francis, ____born in Kentucky, lived and practiced law in Missouri.A. was B. he was C. although D. but
8、-Does Betty know where her violin is?
-She saw somebody walking off with one, but she doesn't know____.
A. whose B. it C. whom D. which
9、-Aren't you the manager?-No, and I ____.
A. don't want B. don't want to C. don't want to be D. don't
10、-How are you getting on with your work?
-Oh, I'm sorry. Things aren't going so well as____.A. plans B. planning C. planned D. to plan
11、-What's the matter with you?
-I didn't pass the test, but I still____.A. hope so B. hope to C. hope it D. hope that
12、The doctor did what he could ___ the boy, but in vain.
A. save B. to save C. saving D. saved
13、-You look happy today, Mary.
-I like my new dress and Mother ___, too.A. likes B. does C. is D. do
14、-What happened to the boy? He was making so much noise.
-He wanted to play football, but his mother warned him ____.A. not B. to C. not to D./
15、____ for your brother, I would not have gone to see Mr. Wang.
A. If it is not B. Were it not C. Had it not been D. If they were not
参考答案：1-5 DCABA 6-10 ACACC 11-15 BBBCC
篇9：高一（下）全套教案(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
高一（下）教案
Unit 13
Teaching Aids：Individual,pair or group work to make every student work in class.
1.Aims of knowledge: Learn and master the phrases
2.Ability aims:
1．Train the student’s reading ability.
2．Develop the students’speaking ability by describing, talking and discussion.
1. Moral aims:
Enable the students to understand the best way to make sure that we will fell and look fine is to develop healthy eating habits by learning the reading text.
Teaching important points:
1. Improve the student’s reading ability.
2. Master the following phrase: keep up with, too much, make choices, be harmful to, lose weight, be prepared for.
Teaching difficult points:
How to make the students understand the reading material better and answer some questions on the passage.
Teaching Aids:1.a tape recorder2.a slide projecto3.a computer for multimedia use
Teaching steps:
Step 1 Lead-in
Six essential nutrients:
1. protein
2. carbohydrate
3. fat
4. vitamins
5. minerals
6. water
Do you know them and their functions?
Step 2 Tell the key meaning of each paragraph. (Find out the topic sentence of each paragraph.)
Para 1 Snacks give us energy.
Pa 2 When we choose what to buy and eat, we had better think whether the food will give us the nutrients we need.
Pa 3 Many people today make choices about their eating habits based on what they believe.
Pa 4 It is probably better if we spend our time and money on buying good food and keep a balanced diet.
Pa 5 The best way to make sure that we will feel and look fine is to develop healthy eating habits.
(Para1. Sentence1
Para2 Sentence2
Para3 Sentence2
Para4 Sentence3
para5 Sentence1)
Step 2 Fast-reading
1.What does the “fuel ” mean in the first paragraph?
(It means different kinds of materials, such as protein, Calcium that we need to keep healthy.)
2.What do we have to consider when we choose to buy or eat?
(What kinds of nutrients that the foods contain.)
3.What made our eating habit changing?
(Many things: what people believe, advice from companies and stores.)
4. How can we feel and look fine?
(We ought to learn about our body and the fuel it needs to keep fit.)
Explain the language points if necessary.
5. What are the causes of people’s choice of eating habits?
Based on Nutrition: protein, calcium, etc.
what they believe-vegetarians / vegans
how the products are grown or made ---- organic vegetables
6.What’s enviornmentally friendly food?
Eco-food. It is produced by companies who have tried to use green and clean ways to grow it.
7.What are organic vegetables?
Vegetables grown without chemicals that can be harmful to human beings or the enviornment.
8.Why do some people become vegetarians?
Because they believe it is healthier not to eat meat or because they think we should not kill animals for food.
9..What’s the difference between vegetarians and vegans?
Vegetarians don’t eat meat but vegans will not eat any animal products at all.
10. According to the passage, how can we keep fit?
Spend our time and money on buying good food and keeping a balanced diet. Eat healthy food in the right amounts.
11. what’s “crash diets” ?
It is something that some companies say will make us lose weight fast.
12.According to the passage, how can we lose weight?
Try to eat less fat and sugar and exercise more.
Step 3.Skimming
Paragraph 1 (T or F)
1.Choosing what to eat is not as easy as it once was any longer.
2.Our eating habits have changed while our way of life has not changed.
3.21-century people prefer traditional food very much.
4,we had better learn to make right choices about food to keep up with the high pace of modern life.
Para2.
Nutrients Function Sources
protein Good for our muscle Fish, meat and beans
calcium Good for our bones Eggs, milk and other dairy products
Carbohydrates Main fuel for our body Bread, rice and noodles
Vitamins fiber ,minerals Fight disease, keep our functioning well Vegetables, fruits, fish and milk
Step 4 Carefully-reading
--How many parts can be divided into
--Three parts.
--What’s the main idea of each part?
1.our eating habits are changing.
2.why the eating habits are changing the best way to develop healthy eating habits？
Step 5 Post-reading
1 what does the word “fuel” and “ green” mean in the text?
Fuel here means the food we need to keep our bodies healthy and active. Green foods are organic foods ,that is, foods are grown and produced naturally.
2. How have our eating habits changed?
We are busier than in past years so we now have less time to eat than before.
Work in pairs and discuss the following questions
1 ) Why do people go to fast food restaurants?
People go to fast food restaurants because they are quick and convenient.
2) Why is it not good for you to eat much sugar and fat?
Too much sugar and fat will make you as big as a whale.
Step 6 Retelling the text
no longer, as easy as, change, keep up with, make the right choices give the nutrients , build our body, be good for keep our body functioning well, fight disease Make choices, based on, become part of become vegetarians, how the products are grown Choose from, give advice, keep a balanced diet instead of, exercise develop healthy eating habits, be ready for
Step 7 Homework
1. Finish Period 2 in Winner.
2. Recite the following sentence.
1) You ought to be careful with fruit.
2) Take this medicine three medicine three times a day.
3) I advise you not to eat fruit that is not ripe in the future.
3.Finish Post Reading exercises at Page 4
Unit 14
Step 1 Lead-in
THE BIRTH OF A FESTIVAL
We have known many festivals,such as Christmas, Spring Festival, Mid-Autumn Day, and so on.
Step 2 Pre-reading
1. Make a comparison of Chinese Spring Festival and Christian Christmas.
T: Which is the greatest and the most important festival to Chinese people? (the Spring Festival) And which is the greatest and the most important festival to Christian people in western countries? (Christmas)
Both of them are quite popular in the world. What are the differences between them?
Festival
aspects Chinese Spring Festival
Christmas
Time From the 1st day to the 15th day of the first Chinese lunar month On Dec. 25
Preparation Do spring cleaning, do Spring Festival shopping (new clothes, delicious food, fireworks, New Year paintings, etc.), decorate the houses with Spring Festival couplets, paper cuts, Chinese knots… Do cleaning, do Christmas shopping (gifts, cards, sweet, cookies, etc.), decorate the houses with Christmas tree and colored lights…
Special Food New Year’s cake, dumpling ( jiaozi) , sweet dumpling (tangyuan)… Candies, cookies, pudding…
Gifts Anything (foods, fruits, clothes, drinks…) Anything (foods, fruits, drinks, desserts,Christmasdecorations)
Major Activities Have family reunion dinner on New Year’s Eve, pay New Year’s visits, recreational activities (dragon dance, lion dance, stilt-walking…) Family reunion, have a big dinner on Christmas Eve…
purpose Bidding farewell to the old year and welcoming the new year, hoping for the best and the good future. Celebrating the birth of Jesus Christ
Note: The italicized words in the form above are suggested answers.
Step 3 Reading
T: Do you know there is another festival which follows Christmas Day in America. It is an important festival to African Americans. Is there any one who knows the name of the festival? SS:Kwanzaa.
1.Fast reading: Read the text on page 10 fast and try to get a general idea of Kwanzaa from the text.
What’s the topic sentence of the paragraph 1?
Kwanzaa is a seven-day festival celebrating the culture and history of African Americans.
T can present a diagram of the information about Kwanzaa to help Ss to finish this task.
Questionnaire: When is Kwanzaa celebrated? How long does it last?
Who created the festival of Kwanzaa? (Dr Maulana Karenga) Who usually celebrates Kwanzaa? Why is it celebrated? What are the characteristics of Kwanzaa?)
Step 4 Careful reading:
Get Ss to read the text carefully to get more details. After reading, Ss are asked to do True or False exercises.
1) African Americans have a long history and a rich culture, so Kwanzaa is an old festival. ( F ) (a young festival)
2) People created Kwanzaa to celebrate American culture. ( F ) ( to celebrate African culture)
3) The word Kwanzaa means first fruit in Swahili, one of the largest languages in Africa. ( T )
4) The African first-fruit festivals are completely different from each other. ( F ) ( to have many things in common )
5) Kwanzaa is celebrated on Christmas Day. ( F ) ( from Dec. 26 to Jan. 1 )
6) Kwanzaa is based on old African festivals. ( T )
7) People who celebrate Kwanzaa light a candle for each of the seven principles. ( T )
Do you know any festivals for black people or African Americans?
Questions:
1What’s the name of the festival?
2When did the festival begin?
3What time do people celebrate it every year?
4What’s the meaning of the Kwanzaa?And which language did the name come form?
5How many principle does Kwanzaa have?
6.What things did the African first-fruit festivals have in common?
People would get together to celebrate their harvest,to give thanks for their harvests and for life, to honour their ancestors, celebrate their past, and the group or society they lived in.
Step 4 Discussion
Topic1: Do you agree festivals can help us understand our history and culture? How do they help us understand our history and culture?
Topic2: Nowadays more and more festivals have been created in my cities for various purposes, such as developing local economy, making the city well-known, etc. Our city Linhai created the Festival of the Great Wall in the South. It has been celebrated for three years. However, some Linhainese think holding such a festival causes some problems to the city. What effects does the Festival of the Great Wall in the South bring to us? Make a list
Good Effects Bad Effects
。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。
Step 5. Homework
1. Oral Work: Read and recite the new words learnt in this class.
Read and recite some beautiful and useful sentences in the text.
2. Written Work: Suppose you are the journalist of Huipu Sunshine Magazine. You are going to write a passage about Kwanzaa.
3. Finish Period 2 in Winners
Unit 15
Teaching Aims:
1.Learn and master the following words and expressions: have a good time,without luck,pay off
recognize,ball,continue,diamond,jewellery,necklace,palace,francs,after all,call on,bring out,try on,
2.Improve the students' reading comprehension through reading activities.
Teaching Important Points:
1.Learn the language in the play,especially in dialogues.
2.Learn the usages of some words and expressions.
3.Get the students to improve their reading comprehension.
Teaching Difficult Points:
1.How to use the tenses correctly in a dialogue.
2.How to tell the differences between“after all,in all and above all”.
Teaching Methods:
1.Question-and-answer method before reading to make students interested in what they will learn.
2.Fast-reading to get the general idea of the text.3.Individual,pair or group work to make every student work in class.
Teaching Procedures:
Step Ⅰ. Greetings:Greet the whole class as usual.
Step 2. Revision
T:Yesterday we practised making up some short plays.Now I'll ask some students to act out them before class.
SS:Teacher asks two or three groups to act.
Step 3. Lead-in
1.What kind of plays do you like best?
2. Have you ever acted in a play? What role did you play?
3.what should be included in a play?
Step 4. Pre-reading
T:Now let's watch the play together.Watch carefully and then I'll ask you some questions.
(Teacher plays the TV set for the students to watch.After that,teacher asks the students some questions.)
T:When and where did the story happen?
S3:It happened in a park in Paris,one afternoon in 1870.
T:Who can tell me something about the play?
S4:It's a play about a necklace.And it tells us a story about Mathilde Loisel,who borrowed a diamond necklace from her friend Jeanne.They were good friends then.When they met in a park ten years later,Jeanne didn't recognize Mathilde at first and then Mathilde told Jeanne what had happened to her.
T:Yes,you are right.
Step 5 Listen to the tape and answer the following questions:
1.What is the relationship between these three characters?
Mathilde, the young lady and Pierre, the young man are couple Jeanne is Mathilde’s friend.
2.What is the mood of Mathilde in scene one ? Why? Mathilde sound tired and upset.
3.How does she feel in scene two?
She is on one hand very excited for the ball , on the other hand she is worried because she has no new dress and no jewelry for the ball.
Step 6 . Reading
When and where did the story happen?
A park in Paris , one afternoon 1870
Scene 1 :
Time: One afternoon, 1870
Place: A park in Paris
Who Methilde Jeanne
What Met each otherMethilde looked older.
Parts: Marthilde, Jeanne
General idea: Marthilde tells Jeanne about her ten years of hard life.
Choose the best answer
When Jeanne met Mathilde in the park, she said she didn't know Mathilde, because ______ . D
A.they hadn’t met for ten years B.Jeanne no longer liked Mathilde
C.Mathilde looked younger than before D.Mathilde had changed a lot
She had been working very hard for ten years , so she looked older than her age.
Answer the questions after watching scene 1
1.When did the story happen? ( 1870 )
2.Why Jeanne could not recognize Mathilde?
Mathilde changed a lot and became so old.
3.What made Jeanne think that Mathilde was ill?
She doesn’t look well.
4.Why Jeanne was so surprised when Mathilde mentioned the necklace?
It happened ten year ago and maybe she has forgotten
Scene 2:
When: Ten years before(1860)
Where: The home of Mathilde and Pierre Loisel
Who: Mathilde and Pierre Loisel
What Got an invitation to a ball and got ready for it.
General idea: Pierre and his wife were invited to the ball at the palace.They decided to borrow some jewellery from Jeanne.
Choose the best answer
1.Why was Mathilde worried when her husband told her the invitation? A
A. Because she hadn’t got an evening dress.
B.Because she didn’t want to attend the ball.
C.Because she have no time to the ball.
2. It can be learned from scene 2 that to be invited to the palace ball ____. C
A. meant working hard day and night in the future B. meant spending a lot of money
C. was a great honor D. was not wonderful news
3. Mathilde did not want to wear a flower to the ball because_____ . C
A. she didn't like flowers B. people were not allowed to wear a flower at the ball
C. it would look shabby（寒酸的） to wear a flower D. flowers would bring her bad luck
Answer the questions after watching Scene2.
1.Why did Pierre say it was wonderful news?
He was invited to the ball.
2.What kind of feeling did he have when Pierre was the only person in his office to be invited?
Maybe he was glad and pride.
3.Why didn’t Mathild want to wear a flower?
Because everyone would wear jewellery
4.What decision did they make finally? They borrowed jewellery from their friends
Scene 3:
When: Ten years later(1870)
Where: In the park
Who: Mathilde, Jeanne
What The story of the lost necklace.
General idea: Mathilde lost the necklace at the ball. So she and her husband worked ten years to pay for it. But ten years later, Jeanne told her the necklace was not a real diamond necklace.
Characters Description of each character
Mathilde vain, glad, sad, scared, old, responsible…
Pierre happy, careful, scared, responsible…
Jeanne surprised, kind, friendly…
Choose the best answer
1. How much money did they spend in returning Jeanne’s necklace? B
A. It cost her over four hundred francs. B.It cost her about thirty-six thousand francs.
C.It cost her about five hundred francs. D.It cost her about fifty-six thousand francs
What was the real price of Jeanne’s necklace? C
How much did Mathilde’s dress cost her ? A
2. Which sentence expresses the main idea of the story? A
A.Mathilde lost the borrowed necklace and had to work hard for ten years to pay it back.
B.Mathilde worked hard to buy a new jewel for her friend.
C.Mathilde lost her borrowed necklace.
D.Mathilde found she was cheated（欺骗）.
3.What do you think of Mathilde ? A
A.A vain （虚荣）woman B.A hard-working woman
C. A greedy（贪婪） woman D.A pretty and rich woman
4. What’s the author’s writing style? A
A.irony （讽刺） B.humour C.sorrow D.delight
5.The story is told _____. C
A.in inverse (反转） order B.in narration order（叙述）
C.in flashback order（倒叙） D.in time order
time order：Getting the invitation ----- Borrowing a necklace -----Losing the necklace ----- Buying a new necklace ----- Returning the necklace----- Learning the truth
Questions to scene 3
1.What happened on their way home after the ball ?
Mathilde found that the necklace was lost. They returned to the place to look for it but didn’t find it.
2.What did they do for Jeanne ?
They borrowed money to buy Jeanne a diamond necklace which looked exactly like the lost one.
3. What did they do in order to pay off the debt ?
They both worked day and night for 10 years
STEP 7 True or False
1.Mathilde borrowed an evening dress and a diamond necklace from her friend for the palace ball.
2. Mathilde was the only woman who was invited to the palace hall.
3. Pierre promised to buy Mathilde a nice evening dress which cost about 400 francs T
4. That evening at the ball was the happiest in their lives because they had a lot of fun and Mathilde was the centre of people’s attention. T
5. They rushed back, looked everywhere for the lost necklace and they found it.
6. They had to apologize to Mathilde’s friend Jeanne for that and promised to work for her to make up for the loss.
7. They bought a diamond necklace which cost only 500 francs and returned it to Jeanne .
8. They bought a real diamond necklace and returned it to Jeanne . Then they had to work night and day for 10 long years to pay off the debt . T
9. Jeanne didn’t recognize Mathilde at first because she changed a lot in the past ten years. T
10. Mathilde looked older than her age because she was ill.
11 They lost the necklace on the way to the ball in the palace.
12. Mathilde attended the ball wearing a flower.
13. Finally they paid off all their debts. T
Step 8 Summary of each scene
Scene1
Mathilde meets her friend, Jeanne in a park and begins to explain to Jeanne why she looks older than her age.
Scene2
Mathilde recalls the events ten years before that changed her life.
Scene3
Jeanne remembers what happened. Mathilde reveals that she lost Jeanne’s necklace and replaced with another one. Jeanne tells Mathilde that the necklace she borrowed was a fake one.
Step 9 Structure:
Borrow a necklace: Why an invitation to a ball
When Ten years ago
Whom Her friend Jeanne
Lose the necklace when At/after the ball
Where Palace/ way
Return the necklace How Buy a new one
How much 36,ooo francs
How long Ten years of hard work
Learn the truth Not a diamond but a glass one
Step 10 . Post-reading
T:Now listen to the tape again.This time you should pay attention to your pronunciation and intonation.
(Teacher plays the tape.After that,teacher gives students a few minutes to read the text aloud.At last students do an exercise for consolidation.)
T:Now suppose Mathilde returned to the palace where the ball was held to ask about the necklace.She answered some questions asked by the workers in the palace please read these sentences and match them.
(After a while,teacher checks the answers with them.)
Suggested answers:1.E 2.C 3.B 4.F 5.A 6.D
Step 11 Discussion
If you are Mathilde, and you find the necklace is gone after the ball, what will you do?
Unit 16
一、明确教学目标
1. Develop the students reading ability, especially their reading comprehension.
2. Read the reading passage and know about
3. Enable the students to know the serious attitude to science.
二、教学过程
Step 1 Presentation（整体感知）
Do you know the names of some famous scientist? What are they famous for?
Einstein Darwin Newton Edison Marie Curie Franklin
Relative theory Evolution Gravity Electric Bulb Radioactivity Kite experiment
Today we come to the Reading. It s about As we all know ,Benjamin Franklin is a famous politician．But today, we will read a passage about him as a scientist. His serious attitude to science .Let’s see how Franklin made his famous electricity experiment by flying a kite．
Step 2 Pre-reading discussions
We all know that it is the scientists’ great effort that makes the great achievement on science. Could you name some scientists’names? And what are they famous for? Try to fill in the blanks of the following form, if you。Can’t, ask your classmate to help you．Form: in the 18th & 19th centuries scientists all over the world made many important discoveries．Give some example．／Physics／Medicine／Chemistry／Biology
Some famous scientists are:
Archimedes: mathematics and physics: he discovered pi (π)
Darwin: biology: he discovered that the ancestors of people were monkeys
Curie: physics: she discovered radium and radioactivity
Newton: physics: he discovered why all things fall down to earth.
Physics Medicine Chemistry Biology
√ Madame Curie √ Florence Nightingale √Watson & Crick √Beatrix Potter
(Radioactivity) (Pie charts) (DNA) (“seeds” of mushrooms)
√ Isaac Newton √ John Snow √Gay-Lussac √Charles Darwin
(gravity) (spread of disease) (Gas laws) (Evolution)
√ Lord Kelvin √ Louis Pasteur √ Mendeleev √ Carl Linnaeus
(lowest temperature) (germs) (Periodic Table of elements) (Naming plants)
Step 3 Reading Fast reading
Listen to the tape and answer the following question.
1. Was the experiment done in June 1752 successful?
Yes, the experiment was successful
2. What did this experiment prove?
This experiment proved that light- ing and electricity were the same.
Read the text carefully again, and give the students some explanations.
Get the students read the test and then decide if the following statements are true (T) or false (F).
1．In 1752 scientists already knew what electricity is. T
2．Franklin was helped by a friend to do the experiment.
3．Franklin made the kite of silk because wet silk does not conduct electricity.
4．A condenser was used in the experiment to store electricity. T
5．The key tied to the string was put into the door to stop he kite from flying away.
6.Franklin conducted the kite experiment in sunny days.
Read he passage and then find out the main idea．
Paragraph 1 Introduction of Franklin’s experiment．
Paragraph 2-3 The process Of the experiment．
Paragraph 4-6 The tip of doing the experiment．
Aim: To show that lightning and electricity are the same.
Materials: Some wooden sticks, a piece of silk, some rope, a very sharp piece of metal, a silk ribbon, a key, a condenser, a small shed, a thunderstorm with lightning.
Instructions: Paragraphs 5 and 6. Description: Paragraph 3.
Results: The electricity stored in the condenser can be used to do other Experiments, which proves that lightning and electricity are the same.
Discussion: None.
Step 4 Listening to the reading passage
Play the tape for the students to listen and follow. Pay attention to the pro- nunciation and intonation.
Step 5 Post-reading
Answers to Exercise 1:1 True 2 False 3 False 4 True 5 False
Suggested answers to Exercise 2:
1 He wanted to prove that lightning and electricity are the same thing.
2 A silk kite will last longer in bad weather than a paper kite.
3 Yes. Franklin's experiment was very dangerous be cause if something went wrong he could be killed by the lightning.
Answers to Exercise 3:1 Incorrect 2 Correct 3 Incorrect 4 Correct
Extension 1 Franklin said, “You can collect and store the electricity with the condenser and use it for other experiments.” Ask students what other kinds of simple experiments could be done using the electricity stored in the condenser. Benjamin Franklin conducted many experiments in his life. You might want your Ss to go on the Internet to find out what they were and report back to the class. '
Step 6 Summary
the purpose of the experiment To show the lighting and electricity are the same:
Time:: June 1752 People: Franklin, his son Place: a shed in the fields
Weather: Thunderstorm, rainy day
Four things needed for the experiment: a strong kite, a key, bad weather, a condenser
Three important steps to prepare for the experiment: fix, fasten, tie
Step 7 Homework：
1．Introduce a scientist hay you admire most。
2．Finish Winners Period 2
Unit 17
一、明确目标
1. Develop the students reading ability, especially their reading comprehension.
2. Read the reading passage and know about the great woman Helen Thayer.
二、教学过程
Step 1 Presentation
Today we come to the Reading. It is freezing cold in the North Pole and the South Pole.
T：Look at the picture and think it over：Could the polar bear meet the penguin in life？
S：Never， because the polar bear lives on the North Pole， while the the penguin lives on the South Pole. So it’s impossible for them to meet each other in life, except in zoos.
T:Few people, in the world have ever been there. However, there was a brave woman who had traveled alone to the North Pole and the South Pole. Do you know who she was? Right, Helen Thayer. She was the first woman who traveled alone there. Today we are going to read about the great woman the great woman, Helen Thayer.
Step 2 Pre-reading discussions
Suggested answers:
Question 1: A warm coat, gloves, a cap, wool pants, long underwear, boots, dark sunglasses, rope, a backpack, skis or snowshoes, a tent, sled, a radio transmitter, a cellphone, dried food, compass, maps, a sleeping, bag, a small stove, matches, cooking fuel, an ice pick, flags, etc. All of these items are needed to keep warn, to provide shelter and food, to give directions, and to explore safely on snow and ice. What does not need to be brought? (Drinking water)
Question 2: Countries that are part of the North Pole: Norway, Sweden, Russia, Finland, US, Canada, Greenland (which is part of Denmark).
Countries that are part of the South Pole: Chile, Argentina, South Africa, Australia, New Zealand
Question 3: Some animals that live on the North Pole: polar bear, wolf, snow fox, seal, walrus, reindeer, moose, killer whales
Some animals that live on the South Pole: penguin, seal, walrus, whales,
Imagine you are traveling alone to the South Pole. What will you take with you? Why?
Step 3 Reading
Read the text carefully again, and give the students some explanations. First show the students some pictures of Antarctica in order to arouse the student’s interest there.
Then ask some questions about the lonely continent.
Fast reading
Read the title, the first paragraph and the last one quickly to get the main idea of the whole passage :
Helen Thayer’s travel alone to Antarctica
Her _expedition_to the South Pole
Scanning: Find out how many parts the text can be divided into.
Part1(Para.1) A journey of challenge and danger to Antarctica began
Part2(Para.2-7) What happened on her way to Antarctica
Part3(Para.8) Making a decision
Careful-reading :
Task1: True or False
1. She traveled to Antarctica with her dog team to pull her sled. (F)
2. During the first week, the weather was always fine. (F)
3. Although the winds were getting stronger and stronger, her tent was not blown away. (T)
4. Thanks to all the training she had had before, she was able to get out of danger. (T)
Task2: Questions for Details:
1.What did she do at 50?
2. How did Helen plan to celebrate her 60th birthday?
3.What was the weather like?
4.Why did Helen want to make Nov. 12th special? How did she celebrate the day?
5.What happened when she was moving forward over slope ?
6.How did she rescue herself?
7.How did she hurt herself ?
8.What’s the result of the accident ?
9.What was her decision ?
10.Do you think Thayer’s trip was a failure ?Why?
Part1 A journey of challenge and danger to Antarctica began
1.What did she do at 50? To travel alone to the North Pole.
2. How did Helen plan to celebrate her 60th birthday?
She went to the South Pole, Antarctica to celebrate her 60th birthday.
Part2 On her way to Antarctica
3.What was the weather like?
Time Weather
The first days good weather;icy but not strong wind;bright sunshine
The third day stormy weather;stronger wind
4. Why did Helen want to make Nov. 12th special? How did she celebrate the day?
Because it was her birthday. She thawed a frozen cake over her fire, placed a candle on the top, lit it and sang “happy birthday to me” at the top of her voice.
5. What happened when she was moving forward over a slope ?
She had fallen into a hole and was hanging on the ropes tied to the sled
6. How did she rescue herself?
She used the way of self-rescue practiced many times in the mountains.
7. How did she hurt herself ?…have a bad accident with … and hurt …
8. What’s the result of the accident?…couldn’t stand on …, be woozy …
Part3 Making a decision
9. What was her decision ? She decided to give up .
10.Do you think Thayer’s trip was a failure?Why?
I don’t think it is a failure . She had met the challenges of solo travel in an extreme climate.
Step 3 Revision
On Nov 1st, , I began my s___ travel to A_____ in order to c_____ my 60th birthday. The first days the weather was very good and there was b_____ sunshine.But changes were ___ __ ____.Soon,the day was cold and s____. I traveled slowly because of the bad weather. On Nov 12th, I celebrated my birthday __ a special way.During my e_____, I came a____ some accidents: I once dropped out ___ ___ my skis and ___ ___ a hole; I couldn't s___ __my left leg and my head was woozy ___ hitting the ground and so on. However, I o______ those difficulties thanks __ my training I had had. I ___ ___ the expedition at last w____ regret. It is an experience I shall never forget and shall v___ for the r___ of my life.
Keys: sole; Antarctic; celebrate;bright;around the corner;stormy;in;expedition;across;from;under;fall into;from;overcame;to; gave up;Without;value;rest
Step 4 Discussion
What kind of woman is Helen Thayer ? Describe her in a few sentences.
What can you learn from her?
Step 5 Rle Play:
Imagine Helen were invited to Wenzhou TV Station. One student acts as Helen and the other a reporter . Make up an interview between them.
Step 6 Summary 小结
Step 7 Homework :
1. Write down your own interview.
Retell the passage with the help of the following pictures.
“Winner” Period 1 in Unit 17.
Unit 18
一、明确目标
1. Develop the students reading ability, especially their reading comprehension.
2. Read the reading passage and know about New Zealand.
二、教学过程
Step 1 Lead in
How many continents and oceans are there in the world?Asia ,Europe , America, Africa, Oceania Pacific, Indian, Atlantic, Arctic
Today we come to the Reading. It’s about New Zealand. Today we are going to read about New Zealand, as we know, New Zealand is an island. Do you know where it is? Now, well look at the map and New Zealand and the seas surrounding it, (the Pacific and Tasman Sea)
Step 2 Pre-reading discussions
Get the students to look at the map of the world and write down the names of five islands and describe where they are. Then ask the students to compare the notes with the partners. At the end collect the answers from some of the students.
Answers to Exercise 1:
Name of the island Location
Taiwan Taiwan Island lies off the east of the mainland of China.
Hainan Hainan Island lies off the southern coast of the mainland of China, in the“ South China Sea.
The Philippines The Philippines lie(s) in the South China Sea, southeast of Hong Kong.
Hawaii ”Hawaii lies in the middle of the Pacific Ocean.
New Zealand New Zealand lies off the east coast of the mainland of Australia.
Great Britain Great Britain lies off the northwest coast of Europe. The nearest countries are France and Ireland, which is also an island.
Answers to Exercise 2:
The capital of Taiwan is Tapei, which lies in the north of the island.
The capital of Hainan is Haikou City, located in northern part of the island.
The capital of the Philippines is Manila, which lies in the south on the second largest, northern island. Honolulu, in the northwest, is the capital of Hawaii. Wellington, on the southwest coast of the North Island, is the capital of New Zealand.
London, the capital city of Great Britain, lies in the southeast.
Answers to Exercise 3:
For all destinations, students may answer that they can be reached by air from the nearest city with an airport. However, the exercise will be more interesting if students describe in detail how they would travel, which cities they would pass through and the exact locations of these cities. Instead of air travel, encourage students to describe journeys over land and sea voyages.
Step 3 Skimming
Read the text carefully again, and give the students some explanations. Ask the students to read the text silently and fast to get general idea of each paragraph
Paragraph 1 location or geography
location: lie off the eastern coast of Australia
Size The same as Japan
Capital: Wellington (on the North Island)
Cities: Auckland (north) ; Christchurch (south) ; Queenstown (further to the south)
Paragraph 2; climate
Temperature: Mild sea climate; subtropical
Rainfall: Rain a lot
Season: Summer ( Dec.-Feb.) Winter (June-Aug.)
Paragraph 3: natural resource
Seas: Deep blue
Cities Lie on a bay & a natural deep harbor
Beaches Clean
Mountains Dead volcanoes
Hot springs Throw hot water high into the air
National bird Kiwi (can not fly)
Paragraph 4 history
1000 years ago The Maori (earliest
1421 Chinese sailors
1642 Dutchman Abel Tasman named the islands
1769 Captain James Cook took possession of the islands
1840 Europeans (British) signed an agreement; National holiday (6th Feb.)
Paragraph About Title
Paragraph 1 Location Geography
Paragraph 2 Climate Climate
Paragraph 3 Landscape Nature
Paragraph 4 History History
How to describe a country or a region
First paragraph the population, ethnic groups and the languages
Second paragraph the culture of one or more ethnic groups that are native
Third paragraph the agricultural products that the place is famous for.
Fourth paragraph things people like to do in their free time in that place.
True or False
1.The other name for New Zealand is Aotearoa. T
2.North island is colder than South Island.
3.The south island is famous for hot springs.
4.New Zealand is a French-speaking country.
5.Besides the kiwi, there are other types of birds that only live in New Zealand.
6.No Chinese people live in New Zealand.
Step 4 Scanning
Answer the following questions.
1. How many islands is New Zealand made up of and what are they?
It is made of two large islands. They are North Island and South Island.
2.what and where is the capital of New Zealand?
The capital is Wellington and lies on the North Island.
3.What do you know about the weather in New Zealand?
New Zealand has a mild sea climate, while the north is subtropical. It rains quite a lot. The warnest months are December to February. The coldest months are June to August.
4. What kind of animal do you think only lives in New Zealand? Kiwi
5. Who were the earliest people to come to New Zealand and how did they get there?
The Maori were the earliest people to come to New Zealand.
They traveled In narrow boats and brought dogs, rats and plants with them.
6.What is the official language in New Zealand? English and Maori.
7. For the Maori, what are special days called? Huis.
8. When are the school main holidays? Mid-December till early February
9. What do you know about weather in New Zealand ?
A mild sea, subtropical in the north
Step 5 Choose the right answer.
1. From the passage we can figure out Maori people are about _____ more than Asians living in New Zealand. B
A. 532,000 B. 304,000 C. 340,000 D. 228,000
2. In New Zealand, a public servant may offer services ______ . D
A. in many languages B. only in English
C. only in Maori D. either in English or in Maori
3. Maori people believe that _____ C
A. not all the people have spirits. B. one’s spirit will never leave his body.
C. one’s spirit will not die when he dies. D. one’s spirit will disappear the moment he is dead.
4)The cities whose rainfall changes least from winter to summer are___ . D
A. Queenstown & Wellington B. Auckland & Christchurch
C. Auckland & Wellington D. Christchurch & Queenstown
Step 6 Summary
New Zealand:
location: lie off the eastern coast of Australia
climate: have a mild sea climate and subtropical
natural beauty: have natural deep harbors clean sand beach beautiful landscape hot spring、special plants and animals
history: 1,000 years ago the Maori
around 1421 Chinese sailors
in 1642 the Dutchman
in 1769 Captain Cook
by 1840 Europeans, the Maori
Politics: women’s voting pension
Agriculture: cattle sheep deer goat
Sports & free time: sailing swimming horse-riding rock-climbing
Wildlife: flightless birds (kiwi)
Step 7 Find out what the words in bold refer to:
It New Zealand
Which hot springs
this heat the heat near the earth’s surface
these settlers Europeans / British settlers
it England
Step8 Post-reading
Answers to the exercises:
1 I It refers to New Zealand.
2 which refers to hot springs.
3 this heat refers-to the heat near the earth's surface.
4 these settlers refers to European I British settlers.
5 it refers to England.
2 I History I Fourth paragraph
2 Climate I Second paragraph
3 Natural beauty I Third paragraph
4 Geography I First paragraph
3 A New Zealand lies in the Pacific Ocean.
B The Tasman Sea lies to the west of New Zealand.
C Wellington, the capital of New Zealand, lies in the southeast of the North Island.
D Auckland lies on the northeastern coast of New Zealand.
E Christchurch lies to the east, on the South Island of New Zealand.
4 I B 2 B 3 D 4 D
5 New Zealand has mild summers with lighter rain and cold winters with heavier rain. Nights in both seasons are cooler than days but not so much cooler. The graphs don't give any information about the climate and weather in autumn and spring. The graphs also don't give any information about the number of hours that the sun shines.
6 The climate on the North Island in New Zealand is like the warm climate in Southern China although the rainfall is less. The climate of the South Island can still be called mild, and is like the climate in southwestern China although it does not get as much rainfall. Perhaps on the whole, China is a bit warmer in summer and a bit colder in winter.
（四）总结扩展
Step 9 Summary 小结
Step 10 Homework：
1、Finish half part of Period 2 in Winners of Unit 18
Unit 19
一、明确教学目标
1. Develop the students reading ability, especially their reading comprehension.
2. Read the reading passage and know about the differences between traditional agriculture and modern one in China meanwhile any necessary common knowledge about the importance of keeping the balance of nature.
3. To encourage the students to learn more for the future green agriculture of our country and the importance of protecting of environment.
二、教学过程
Step 1 Presentation
1.Who is the man in the picture? He’s Jia Sixie.
2.What do you know about him?
Jia Sixie, author of China’s first agricultural encyclopedia (百科全书), was one of the leading agronomists in Chinese history. In the late years of the Northern Wei Dynasty (386-534), he wrote Qimin Yaoshu (Essential Skills for the Common People). It is the earliest and most complete agricultural encyclopedia still in existence in China.
Today we come to the Reading. It’s about the differences between traditional agriculture and modern one in China meanwhile any necessary common knowledge about the importance of keeping the balance of nature. Let’s look at the pictures and reconstruct the text by comparing traditional and modern farming.
Step 2 Pre-reading discussions
Answers to Exercise 1:
The first picture shows a farmer sitting in the courtyard, in front of the house. There is a basket in front of her and two chickens that eat from the basket. On this farm, chickens can walk freely in the yard.The picture below shows a large building in which thousands of chickens sit in small cages. On this farm, chickens sit in cages inside a building.
The second picture shows a pile of animal shit (manure). The picture below shows a bag of chemical fertiliser.
The third picture show a farmer working on the land with two animals. The animals pull the plough to work the land.
The picture below shows a tractor. In this picture, the farmers use the tractor to work the land.
The fourth picture shows dry, barren land. The earth is so dry that nothing can grow there.
The picture below shows a greenhouse, where plants grow in a building .made of glass.
Answers to Exercise 2:
Ask the students to discuss the advantages and disadvantages of modern farming; they can also think of the advantages and disadvantages of the old ways of farming.
Raising chickens
Small scale Large scale
The farmer can keep only a few chickens. The farmer can keep thousands of chickens.
It does not cost a lot to keep the chickens. It costs a lot of money to keep the chickens.
It is not a lot of work to keep the chickens. It's a lot of work to keep the chickens: feeding, cleaning etc.
The chickens don't have many problems. If chickens get ill, many die or must be killed.
The chickens are not so fat. The chickens are big and fat.
The eggs and meat taste very good. The meat and eggs do not taste so good.
The chickens are free. The chickens are not free.
The farmer can sell the chicken dung
Fertilisers
Natural fertiliser (manure; also dung) Chemical fertiliser
It's free or can be bought at low prices.
It is a lot of work to mix it with the soil.
It has a bad smell.
It takes a lot of place to store.
It is difficult to transport. It's expensive.
It is not a lot of work to mix it with the soil. It has no smell.
It takes little place to store.
It is easy to transport.
Animals (buffalo; also ox) Machines (Tractor) Horsepower
They are not so expensive. They are expensive.
The “fuel” is cheap (grass, hay etc). The fuel is expensive (gasoline).
They don't pollute the air. They pollute the air.
They can be used on different terrain; eg hill slopes or wet ground. They can only be used on flat (level) and dry terrain.
They need to rest sometimes. They don't need to rest.
You can use them for about 10-20 years. You can use them for 5-20 or more years if you can get enough spare (repair) parts.
If they get young ones, you get more for free.
If they totally “break down”, you can eat them.
Climate control
Open air Greenhouse
If the weather conditions are bad you can loose the crops.
The landscape is more beautiful.
The land must be good for farming (arable land).
Weather conditions are controlled, so they cannot damage crops.
It is expensive to build and operate (gas, water, electricity) a greenhouse.
If there is a power failure, you may lose crops.
The landscape is ugly:
Greenhouses can be built where the land is not suitable for farming.
1950s - 1980s 1980s - present
The use of machines eg tractors The use of greenhouses
The use of electric pumps for irrigation To make vegetables bigger or better
The use of chemical fertilisers To change vegetables so they can grow on poor
The use of insect killers soil
The use of special seedbeds Knowledge from abroad
IT technique and technical are words that mean something with
technology FORM machines, then technology must be the noun to match these two
words meaning new machines or doing things that are based on
modem knowledge.
agricultural FORM IT cultural is the adjective for culture, then agricultural must be
the adjective for agriculture, meaning to do with agriculture.,
Step 3 Scanning:
Q1:What is the biggest problem to Chinese farmers?
China is a country with the largest population in the world,but only seven percent of the land can be used for farming.
Q2:What does GM mean?
“G” stands for “genetically” from the world “genes”.M” stands for “modified”,which means “changed”.
Step 4 Skimming
Read the whole text .Find out the topic sentence in each paragraph.
Para.1: For thousands of years traditional agriculture in China did not change very much.
Para.2: Over time, many farming techniques have been modernised.
Para.3: Not only is food production important but also taking care of the environment.
Para.4: Using the latest technologies, Chinese scientists grow vegetables in greenhouses.
Para.5: Another technique tries to create plants that produce more and bigger fruit.
Para.6: The tomoto is one of nearly 4,500 different plants thet are genetically modified.
1.What helps Chinese farmers produce enough food for the largest population in the world?
High technology.
2.When was more advanced technical information brought in from abroad? In the 1980s
3.What does “which ” refer to in the last two lines ? “Which” refers to “golden rice”
4. What is the other name of “golden rice ” in the text ? GM rice
5.How much does arable land take up in China? Only 7 percent.
6.How many ways are mentioned to make the land produce more? What are they?
4. Fertilisation; irrigation; 2 or more crops are planted each year where possible; more advanced technical information.
7.What does new techniques mean?
Those that are used to increase agricultural production without harming the environment.
8.When did scientist start to develop new techniques? From the early 1990s.
5.How many unusual ways are mentioned to deal with the shortage of arable land?
2. Grow vegetables in greenhouses; GM.
Step 5 Scanning
1: What’s the biggest problem to Chinese farmers?
The shortage of arable land.
2: What does GM mean?
“G” stands for “genetically” “M” stands for “modified” (changed)
3.What is important for future agriculture ?
Both food production and taking care of the environment are more important .
4.What should future agriculture depend on?
Future agriculture should depend on high technology as well as traditional methods
Read the text carefully again
What advice does Jia Sixie give farmers?
1. Farmers should do things at the right time of the year.
2. Farmers should examine the soil carefully.
3. If the conditions of the soil is not good, farmers should improve it.
4. Before sowing or planting crops, farmers should clean rough ground and remove weed.
5. Farmers should let sheep or cattle (cows) walk on the land before sowing or planting crops.
6. Farmers should plough the land, so weeds are destroyed.
7. When ploughing the land, farmers should plough deep the first time and less deep the second time.
8. Farmers will get the best results if they change crops in their fields.
9. If farmers plant rice in a field one year, and wheat in that field the following year, they will harvest good crops
10. If farmers plant wheat close together, they will have better results than when they plant wheat leaving space between the plants.
11. It is good to grow different plants next to each other in the same field.
Step 4 Listening to the reading passage
Play the tape for the students to listen and follow. Pay attention to the pro- nunciation and intonation.
Step 5 Post-reading
Choose the best answers.
1 In China only seven percent of the land is used for farming. This is _______. D
A because farmers don’t need more land to produce food for the whole population
B because China needs more & more land to build cities
C because there are not enough farmers to work on the land
D because the other land can’t be used for agriculture
2 Fertilisation is a technique that is used to ______. A
A make poor soil better B make wet land drier
C make dry land wetter D grow vegetables with their roots in water instead of earth
3 Modern agriculture means finding ways to ______________.C
A increase irrigation & stop using fertilisers
B stop irrigation & using fertilisers
C increase production & be friendly to the environment
D produce the same amount while taking better care of nature
4 In the sentence “ … they are protected from the wind, rain & insects”, “they” means _______. C
A greenhouses B roots C vegetables D tomatoes
5 In GM “M” stands for “modified”, which means “changed”. What changes is _____________. C
A the way in which poor soil is made better
B the way in which Chinese farmers work on their land
C the way in which crops develop from seed
D the way in which farmers take care of the environment
6.What should future agriculture depend on according to the text ? D
A. High technology B. Traditional methods
C. High technology or traditional methods
D. Not only traditional methods but also high technology
7.How do farmers in China make their land produce more? D
A. They have long used techniques such as fertilization and irrigation
B. More advanced technical information was brought in from abroad
C. Technology and machines are imported
D. All above
8. Which of the following statements is not true ? C
A. It saves time for the farmers to plant two or more crops every year where possible
B. Scientists began to develop new techniques to increase agricultural production without harming the environment
C. Food production is more important than taking care of the environment
D. Only 7% of the land can be used for farming in China
9. The biggest problem of Chinese farmers is ____. A
A. the shortage of arable land B. lack of labor force
C. lack of technology D. lack of money
10. Scientists have started to develop new technology to increase agricultural production without harming the environment since _____. C
A. the 19th century B. modern times
C. the early 1990s D. the 1980s
11. New techniques are those which can ____. D
A. increase agricultural production B. protect the environment from being harmed
C. bring in great profit
D. not only increase agriculture production but also be friendly to the environment
12.The text is about ____. B
A. farmers in China
B. the development of agriculture in China
C. advanced technology in China
D. genetically modified plants in China
13. Which of the following is most probable in future agriculture according to the text ? D
A. Only high technology is used
B. It will greatly harm the environment
C. It will depend on only traditional methods
D. It will depend on both high technology and traditional methods
Answers to Exercise 2: Sample:
Answers to Exercise 2: Sample:
Kind How would you change it? Why do you want to change it in this way?
Fruit Watermelon Grow them like blocks instead of balls Easier to store, takes less space
Vegetable Onion Make sure they don't hurt your eyes anymore EasIer to peel, and cut
Animal Sheep To have red wool Looks funny and then we don't need to dye wool to make clothes
Step 6 Summary 小结
Step 7 Homework:Write a short passage about how we should protect our environment and build a green world.
Finish Post-reading in SB
Unit 20
一、明确教学目标
1. Develop the students reading ability, especially their reading comprehension.
2. Read the reading passage and know about Laughing Matter.
3. Learn to interview a person.
二、教学过程
Step 1 Leading in
Who can say something about comedians? Comedians are people, especially professional entertainers, who tell jokes or do amusing things to make people laugh and think. Look at the pictures . Do you know who these comedians are? What make them funny to you?
Step 2 Pre-reading discussions
Pre-reading
1. Who is the main character in the film? Charlie Chaplin
2. Do you know any comedians both at home and abroad? Please name some. Charlie Chaplin
The comic duo of the 1930s “Laurel and Hardy”. The thin one is called Stan Laurel, the stout one Oliver Hardy. They are funny because they are each other’s opposites: one fat and one thin; one is clever and one is silly etc.
Get the students to read and practice the dialogue in the text.
Work in pairs. Ask one student play the part of a journalist the other a circus down. Make up a dialogue referring to the questions and pictures.
Practice the useful expressions in pairs first, and then act out at class using dialogues or making sentences.
Sample answers for Question 1
Photo 1: The comic duo of the 1930s “Laurel and Hardy.” (The thin one is called Stan Laurel, while the stout one is called Oliver Hardy.) They are funny because they are each other's opposites: one fat and one thin; one is clever and one is silly etc.
Photo 2: Mr Bean. Although Mr Rowan Atkinson acts as different comic characters he is most famous around the world as Mr Bean. Mr Bean is funny because he makes funny faces, he acts silly, he seems to be quite stupid, and the things he does are strange.
Photo 3: Dustin Hoffman in the film Tootsie (1982). In this film Hoffman acts the role of a woman, and many . people agree that his performance was so good that you often can't tell the difference. But in the film of course there all kinds of funny moments.
Photo 4: Ma Ji is a well-known artist of crosstalk shows in China. His numerous crosstalk shows always make his audience roar with laughter. Ask the students to talk about Ma Ji themselves in pairs or groups.
Sample answers for Question 2:
Photo 1: Other comic duos are for example, Abbott and Costello, French and Saunders, Wallace.& Gromit or Beavis and Butthead.
Photo 2: Other comedians acting as clowns are for example, Charlie Chaplin, Buster Keaton or Austin Powers.
Photo 3: Other famous comedians who dressed up as women are for example, Dame Edna (Australia), Milton Berle (USA) and Eddy Izzard (UK).
Photo 4: Other famous crosstalk artists are Jiang Kun, Hou Yuewen, Feng Gong, Ma Sanli, Tang Jiezhong, etc.
Sample answers for Question 3:
1 I have seen some films of Laurel and Hardy and I think that they are very funny.
2 I find Mr Bean always very funny.or: I know some people think it is funny, but I think Mr Bean is very silly.
3 I don't think I ever saw this comedian. I am not sure if I would like it.
4 I once heard Hou Yuewen on the radio and I had to laugh so much that my stomach hurt and I had tears in my eyes.
Listening
Listen to the tape of the text and answer the question.
How many types of humor are introduced in the text?
Comedies clowns Laughing Matter crosstalk comedians
Laughing matter : 1.comedies 2. clowns 3.comedians 4-5.crosstalk
What is the text about?
1,The title is a bit of a puzzle to me and there are no other clues to find out what the text is about. I suppose it will be about something to laugh about.
2,If it’s about laughing or humour, it can be about jokes or funny storied.
Read the text again , try to divide the text into several parts and find out the main idea of each part:
Part 1: Comedies
Part 2: Clowns
Part 3: Comedians
Part 4: Crosstalk
PartⅠ Comedies
1. How do the writers of comedies often use to make people laugh?
Cross-dressing
Making fun of ….
Telling an amusing story
Acting out stereotypes
Speaking foreign language with an accent
Word play
2. Why is Dustin Hoffman so famous? C
A. He is famous for his works. B. He is famous for his foreign accent.
C. He is famous for his role acting as a woman. D. He is good at playing on words.
3. What techniques are used by the writers of comedies to make the audience laugh? _________. D
A. Stereotypes of nationalities or people doing certain jobs. B. Word play.
C. Cross-dressing way. D. Both A, B and C
4.“Funny plays often have characters that are stereotypes of nationalities or people doing certain jobs.” Which of the following has the same meaning with “character”? A
A. Mathilde Loisel is one of the characters in the play “The necklace”.
B. Chinese character is hard to learn for most of the foreigners.
C. His character is different from his wife’s.
D. The picture shows us the character of the desert landscape.
Part Ⅱ Clowns
1. In what ways do clowns make us laugh? What about comedians?
Clowns make people laugh by acting alone or as a pair
not using any words
using clothes, make-upand the way they walk
2. What is the writer’s opinion on clowns? _____ C
A. They would like to reach a wide audience.
B. They only have children in mind.
C. They are funny not only for children but also for adults.
D. They can help people forget their problems for a long time.
Part Ⅲ Comedians
Comedians make people laugh by body language and their face
acting out a sketch
playing with words.
Effect of comedians’ performance on people:
Make people not only laugh
but also think about life
True or False
1. Comedians are different from clowns because they don’t use body language or facial expressions in their shows. F
2. The show of a comedian is more profound (深刻的) than that of a clown T
3. The show of a comedian is more like that of a comedy. T
4. The situations comedians act out in their shows just look like comedies. F
Part Ⅳ Crosstalk
Crosstalk shows make people laugh by playing with words
making many jokes and funny conversations
dressing up a little or acting out small sketches
using rhythm and rhyming words.
using tongue twisters.
Step 3 Reading
Read the text carefully again, and give the students some explanations. Do a little quiz by speaking.、
1. ----John sends his best wishes. ----________.
A. That’s nice of him B. Oh, he is too police
C. It’s kind of him to say so D. You are really kind to me
2. ---- What do you think sally is like? ----She______
A. isn't in good health B. doesn’t’ like eating too much
C. likes to eat fish D. is very pretty
3. ---- Do you mind my taking this seat? ---- _______
A. Yes, sit down please B. No, of course not
C. Yes, take it please D. No, you can't take it
4. -----Leaving for Chicago? ------_______.
A. Soon B. Lately C. Late D. Sooner
5. -------Excuse me, have you got a light? ______. I don’t smoke.
A. Don’t mention B. Never mind C. I'm afraid not D. Thanks a lot
1. A 2.D 3.B 4.A 5.C
Step 4
Para. 1: Comedies:
- Ask students about famous Chinese and Western comedies.
- Ways of dressing or behaving.
- Stereotypes of people from different countries (including China)
- Funny accents (foreign, local or in certain jobs)
- Examples of word play.
Para. 2: Clowns: - Ask about different Chinese and Western clowns
- Ways of dressing, make-up
- Examples of jokes, fun
Para. 3: Comedians: - Ask about different Chinese and Western comedians.
- Mime, body language, facial expressions
- Retell famous sketches for comedy shows.
Para. 4: Crosstalk: - Ask about different crosstalk shows.
- In which way do crosstalk artists make people laugh?
Ask students to give some famous ex amples of rhyme, rhythm and tongue twisters from Chinese crosstalk shows (in Chinese).
Step 4 Listening to the reading passage
Play the tape for the students to listen and follow. Play the tape for the students to listen and follow. Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.
Step 5 Post-reading
1. How long has the tradition of crosstalk existed in China?
The tradition of crosstalk has existed in China for more than 2,000 years.
2. Give three examples of techniques that writers of comedies often use to make people laugh.
cross-dressing stereotypes word play
3.Why are some of Shakespeare’s comedies not so funny for us?
Some of Shakespeare’s plays are not so
篇10：高一(上)全套教案(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)
Unit 1
Teaching Aims：
1.Learn and master the following words and phrases
Survive, item, hunt for, make a fire on board,hammer,mirror, saw,care about,parachute
2.Important Ss’reading ability
3.Enable Ss to value the friendship between friends by learning the reading text
Teaching Important Points:
1.Important Ss’reading ability
2. Master the following phrases
Hunt for,make a fire,care about, on board
Teaching Difficult points:
How to make Ss understand the reading text better
Teaching Methods:
1.Discussion before reading to make Ss interested in what they will learn
2. Discussion after reading to make Ss understand what they’ve learned better
3. Fast reading to get a general idea of the text
4. Careful reading to get the detailed information in the text
Teaching Aids:
1.a recorder 2. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Greetings and Revision
Yesterday we learned some self-introduction . We know how to describe yourself and your friends in English . Now who can give us self-introduction in English?
Step 2 Pre-reading
Ok. Thank you for your self-introduction . We all know that we have lived with our parents, since we were born. We have never been left on a plane without your parents , brother or sister, friends and all the things we use in our daily life . Yes or No ?
Step 3 Fast reading
First I’ll give five minutes to read the text and then summrize the main idea of each para.
Par. 1 : Chuck’s plane lands on a deserted island
Par.2: Chuck has to learn to how to survive on the island
Par.3: Chuck learns a lot about himself when he is alone on the island
Par.4 Chuck has made an unusual friend on the island
Step 4 Careful reading
Read the text again in three minutes and then answer the following questions and choose the best answer
Questions:
1.Does Chuck Noland always have time to get together with his friends?why?
2. Where does he land after the crash?
3. What things must he learn to survive?
4. What is the most difficult for him.
5.Who is Wilson?
6. What does Chuck learn about himself when he is alone on the island?
7. What does Chuck learn from his experience on the deserted island?
8. What can we learn from Chuck’s experience?
9.If you were alone on a deserted island,what would you do in order to survive?
10. Imagine that four people are in an airplane that is going to crash. One is a policeman, one is a doctor, one is a teacher, and one is a scientist . There is only one parachute. Decide who should get the parachute and explain why.
Choose the best answer
1.Tom Hanks _____________ . C
A.is a successful businessman B. doesn’t have much free time
C. is the main actor in the movie Cast Away D. had a plane accident over the Pacific
2．A deserted island __________ . C
A. has no post office on it B. lies in the middle of the Pacific Ocean
C. is an empty place where nobody lives D. is a plane crashes are most likely to happen
3.. To be short of _______ is what makes it most difficultfor chuck to live on the island. C
A. volleyball B. fresh water C. friendship D. enough food
4. After 5 years alone on the island , chuck would probably disagree that _______ . A
A. a good friend should never think about himself
B. people can make friends with some unusual things like animals
C. friends are the people who can share your happiness and sorrow
D. as a good friend ,you must give as much as you take
5. which can be learned from the last paragraph of the passage ? B
A. Everyone need an unusual friends
B. Friends can learn from each other
C. A friend in need is a friend indeed
D. Animals and things can make better friends than human beings
Step 5 Repeat the story according to the following.：
plane crashed deserted island make friends with（Key words: learn to realise the lesson from Chuck friendship an unusual friend）
Step 6 Language points
1. ① manager n. 经理,管理者,经营者
这家公司的经理 the manager of the company
manage v. 控制, 管理, 经营 (口语:应付得来,做得来
Manage a business 管理商务 I can’t manage it alone.我一个人办不来.
2 crash n. 坠毁,碰撞,碰坏,哗啦啦地倒塌
他于飞机失事中丧生 He was killed in an air crash
v. 撞击, 坠毁, 冲入 公共汽车撞在树上了 The bus crashed into a tree
那架飞机坠毁了 The aircraft crashed
3. deserted adj. 无人居住的 , 荒废了的, 被抛弃了的
a deserted village/island 荒废的村庄/荒岛
4. develop v. 发展, 开发,(使)成长;(使)发育
植物由种子发育而成. eg.Plants develop from seeds
工农业飞速发展. Agriculture and industry develop very quickly
A developing country 发展中国家
A developed country 发达国家
With the development of 随着…….的发展
5.On the island,Chuck has to learn to survive all alone.
Alone与lonely的区别:
Alone adj,adv.作为adj时,只能用作表语,不能做定语. 意为”独自一人” 作为adv时,表示”独自,单独” 用在名词,代词之后,意为”只有”
lonely adj. 表示人 “孤独的, 寂寞的”.也可表示地方”荒凉的:, “人烟稀少的”,既可以做定语,也可以做表语.
虽然我独自一人,但是我并不寂寞 I am alone, but I don’t feel lonely.
他独自一人在荒岛上呆了四年 He lived alone on the lonely island for four years
6.In order to survive, Chuck developed
In order to 引导表示目的的状语,意为”为了”
他早起为了赶第一班车 He got up early in order to catch the first bus.
Unit 2
Teaching Aims：
1.Learn the text “English around the world”
2. Get Ss to master the useful expressions in the text
3. Train ss to read the text with correct pronunciation and intonation
Teaching Important Points:
1. How to improve Ss’ ability to read an article
2. How to get Ss to masterr the useful expressions
Teaching Difficult points:
The use of some useful expressions
Teaching Methods:
1. Fast-reading to train Ss’ reading speed
2.Reading comprehension to help Ss grasp the main idea of the text
3. Preactise getting Ss to master what they’ve learned
Teaching Aids:
1. a recorder 2. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Lead-in
From the text we learned yesterday, we know that English is used widely around the world. People in many countries speak English as their first language, and among those countries are America and Britain. Then let’s look at two pictures. Can you tell me which one belongs to America and which one belongs to Britain?
The sceneries were so beautiful
But do you know that American English and British English are not the same. Then let’s have a revision of some differences between British English and American English.
e.g. a. Meaning: bathroom b. Spelling: color & colour
c. Pronunciation: hot d. Words: fall & autumn
I think most of our students are interested in the differences between American English and British English. Do you want to know more about it? Today we will learn the text named
Step 2 Reading Comprehension
ⅠFast Reading
Read the text quickly and answer the following question, then summarize the main idea of each para.
Question: Are the differences greater in the written language or the spoken language?
Answer: The differences are greater in the spoken language.
the main idea of each para.
Para.1 English is spoken as mother tongue and as a second language
Para.2 Many people learn English as a foreign language
Para.3 Many people communicate in English every day
ⅡCareful Reading
Questions:
1. When did American become independent?
2. When did the language begin to change?
3. Which country did the British take “Typhoon” from?
Which country did the Americans take “Tornado” from?
4. Who wrote the first American dictionary?
5. What was his purpose?
6. What are the main three reasons for the differences?
Step 3 Practice
ⅠRead aloud the text
ⅡGo through the text and deal with some language points
1.come about: happen e.g. How did the accident come about?
2. at first e.g. At first she was afraid of water,but she soon learned to swim.
3. while e.g. Some people are rich while others are poor.
4. just as e.g. Just as you say, he is a honest boy.
5. end up with e.g. At the dinner w usually begin with soup and end up with fruit.
6. except for e.g. You composition is good except for some spelling mistakes.
Ⅲ Answer the following questions by choosing the best answer.
1. America stopped being a part of England in _______. C
A 1707 B 1828 C 1776 D 1911
2. Which of the following statements is true? D
A After 1828 American English and British English stayed the same.
B After 1828 British English changed but British English stayed the same.
C After 1828 British English changed but American English stayed the same.
D After 1828 both British English and American English changed.
3. British English is different from American English because________. C
A British decided to change the spelling of many American words
B American English changed but British English stayed the same
C the Americans and British took different words from other languages
D America is a bigger country
4. Noah Webster was_______. D
A an American president B a Spanish farmmer C a British teacher D an American writer
5. Which of the following statements is true?D
A In the future both American English and British English will stay the same.
B In the future American English will change but British English will not.
C In the future British English will change but American English will not.
D In the future both British English and American English will change.
Step 4 Consolidation
Retell the text according to key words:
differences, come about, change, borrow, Noah Webster, spelling, pronunciation
Step 5 Homework
Write a short passage about the differences between British and American English, mainly the reason and some examples of the differences.
The Design of the Blackboard
American English & British English
ⅠDifferences Ⅱ Keywords
a.Meaning: bathroom differences
b. Spelling: color & colour come about
c. Pronunciation: hot change
d. Words: fall & autumn borrow
Noah Webster
spelling
pronunciation
Unit 3
Teaching Aims：
1. Learn and master the following words and expressions:
Adventure simply rafting equipment paddle get away from get close to
2. Train Ss’ reading ability
Teaching Important Points:
1.Improve Ss’ reading ability
2.Enable ss to understand the text better
3.Master the following phrases:
get away from get close to instead of be careful (not )to do sth
Teaching Difficult points:
Master sentence structures
1. Yet there are other reasons why people trave
2.It is done rives and streams where the waster moves quickly
Teaching Methods:
1.Discussion before reading to make Ss interested in travel and adventure travel
2. Fast reading to get a general idea of the text
3. Careful reading toanswerthe detailed questions in the text
Teaching Aids:
1. a recorder 2. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Discussion:
1.Do you like traveling? Why or why not?
2.Where would you most like to travel? Why?
3.What is adventure(冒险) travel?
Step 2 Reading
Today we’ll read a text “adventure travel”and know something about it Read the passage quickly to get the general idea
Para.1 adventure travel
Para2 Hiking
Para3 Rafting
Answer the following questions
1.Why do many people travel?
see other countries visit places that are famous, interesting or beautiful. meet new friends try new kinds of food experience life in other parts of the world get away from cold weather
2.Why do people enjoy hiking?
…get close to nature and take exercise at the same time.
…is easy to do and doesn’t have to be very expensive.
The basic equipment you need for hiking is simple.
…anywhere you like.
3.Why do people enjoy rafting?
…exciting adventure?
…a good way to experience nature?
4.If you want a normal rafting, what should you do?
If you are looking for more excitement, …try whitewater rafting.
5.What should you think about if you want to go for a rafting?
…safety; …good clothes; …learn the basic skills of rafting; such as how to handle the raft, how to paddle and how to…
You should also know how to swim.
…wear a life jacket.
HIKING
1).What is hiking?
2).Why is hiking a kind of adventure travel?
3).Where can you go hiking?
RAFTING
1).What is rafting?
2).Where is rafting done?
3).Why is rafting a kind of adventure travel?
Step 3 Careful reading
Read the text again and fill in the below form
Safety tips for hiking:
1.tell someone your destination 2.Bring some necessities
3.Watch out for possible dangers 4.Take some protectors
Benefits of hiking
1.Fun and exciting 2.Get close to nature 3.Take exercise
Safety tips for rafting
1.Learn some basic rafting skills 2.Know how to swim
3.Wear good and strong clothes 4.Wear a life jacket
Benefits of rafting
1.Give excitement 2.Experience nature 3.Take adventure
Compare hiking and rafting.
Similarities: Both are examples of adventure travel.
*Both take place outdoors.
*Both are fun and exciting.
*Both make people get close to nature.
*Both have safety tips.
Difference:
Places: Hiking : In the mountains,in a forest,along a river,in a city
Rafting : On rivers and streams
Equipment: Hiking : good shoes, clothes,backpack map, water, sunscreen, cell phone, hat, etc.
Rafting: Boat,paddle,good clothes,lifejacket
Cost: Hiking : Inexpensive
Rafting: Somewhat expensive
Skills needed: Hiking: Good walking skills
Rafting :Good rafting and swimming skills
Possible dangers: Hiking: Getting lost,sunburn,poisonous animals or plants,hunger and thirst
Rafting: Hitting rocks, trees,falling into water
Step 4 POST-READING
Choose the correct answers.
1 Adventure travellers want to ______ A
A experience fun and excitement B meet new friends
C try new kinds of food D visit famous sites or beautiful places
2 Hiking is a kind of adventure travel because ______ B
A it is not expensive B it is exciting
C you need a lot of equipment for it D you will often put yourself in danger
3 While hiking or rafting, it is important to think about ______D
A cost B excitement C fun D safety
4 Before you go to rafting, you do not have to _____ D
A learn rafting skills B know how to swim C put on a life jacket D wear leather shoes
5 Which of the following is the most difficult? _____ C
A Normal rafting B Stream rafting C Whitewater rafting D Rock rafting
Unit 4
Teaching Aims：
1.Improve Ss’ reading ability
2.Learn how to organize ideas in a text using “First” “ Next ” “Then ” “Finally ”
3. Master some important words and expressions
Teaching Important Points:
Help ss to understand the passage better
Teaching Difficult points:
How to improve ss’reading ability
Teaching Methods:
1.Discussion to let Ss know something about natural disasters
2.Fast reading to get the general idea
3. Careful reading to help ss understand some detailed information
Teaching Aids:
1. a recorder 2. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Pre-reading
1.What natural disasters do you know? Flood drought typhoon earthquake volcano fire
2.Have you ever experienced a natural disaster?
Can you describe what it was like and how you feel?
Step 2 Fast reading:
1.What were Flora’s first two feelings when she turned around and saw the water coming?
She felt surprised and wondered/frightened
2.Why was Jeff looking for the chimney? Because chimney is the strongest part of the house and he thought it would stand in the flood
Step 3 Careful reading
1.Jeff was waving his arms___________. D
A.to ask flora to look around B.to make Flora think twice
C.to make Flora t hear a loud noise D.to warn Flora of the advancing water
2.Put the following things in right order. B
a.Flora turned around and saw Jeff waving his arms. b.Jeff dragged Flora toward the house.
c.Flora climbed the stairs. d.Flora started crying. e.Jeff opened the hall door.
f.Jeff seized Flora’s arm and told her to run.
g.Flora struggle in the water and managed to get on her feet
A.a,b,g,d,e,f,c B.a,f,b,g,e,c,d C.a,g,e,b,f,c,d D.a,e,c,f,b,g,d
In the garden
Flood: roar/a wall of water/swept down/swallow / wave/cold as ice/ flow
Reaction: Jeff: wave arms/seize/dragged ..towards /pull her up/hold onto a tree /
Flora: struggle / get on her feet / hold hands / fought for life / pull…up
Feelings: surprised / wondering/frightened
On the way to the house
Flood: go down / great roar / flowed around their legs
Reaction: Jeff: shouted / ran to the steps / opened the hall door
Flora: couldn’t move/ran / got to the steps
Feelings: anxious / frightened
Inside the house
Flood: water: wave/like a sea/swept past/wild/ cut down trees /deep / swept away
House: cracking noise /strange sounds/ moved / falling down
Tree: went down / cut down by water
Garden: completely destroyed/swept away
Reaction: Jeff: looked for the chimney
Flora: climbed the stairs / ran upstairs/ listened / started crying.
Feelings: scared / panic / anxious
Next to the chimney
Flood: house: noise/gone down/moved up and down
Chimney: stand like a tower
Reaction: Jeff: found the chimney / saved themselves
Flora:
Feelings: relieved
Step 4 Pairs work:
1.Find out the words and expressions that the writer used to describe the terrible flood.
She heard a loud noise,which……..
There she saw a wall of water……..
The next moment the first wave swept her…….
The water moved up like a sea.
Below,the water swept past the house……
A terrible noise went through the house.
2.Find out the words and expressions that the writer used to describe their struggle.
Step 5 Pro-reading
Work out what the underlined words refer to(指代）
1.Before she could move, she heard a loud noise, which grow to a terrible roar. A loud noise.
2.There she saw a wall of water that was quickly advancing towards her. Behind her
3.She wanted to watch it. A wall of water that was advancing towards her.
4.Flora, whose beautiful hair and dress were all cold and wet, started crying. Flora’s.
5.For some moments both were silent. Jeff and Flora.
Step 6 Discussion
1.Who do you think is braver, Jeff or Flora? Why?
2. How can we rescue ourselves in a flood?
3. How will the disaster change
Jeff and Flora’s future life?
Step 7 Retell the story in your own words with your partner,
using the following words: First…… Next……. Then……. Finally……..
Unit 5
Teaching Aims：
1.Train Ss’reading ability
2.Learn the following words and phrases:
Creat, acript,academy, work on ,take off, cut…in pieces go wrong follow-up win over in the end
Teaching Important Points:
1.How to make Ss understand the reading text better
2.Learn and master the following phrases:
work on ,take off, cut…in pieces ,go wrong ,follow-up, win over, in the end ,owe to
Teaching Difficult points:
1. The differences between the following pairs of words or phrases:
2.be afraid of doing sth / be afraid to do sth ,high/highly
Teaching Methods:
1.Fast reading to get a general idea of the text
2.Question-and-answer activity to get the detailed information in the text
3. Explanation
Teaching Aids: 1. a recorder 2. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Meryl Streep
1.When and where was Meryl Streep born?
2.How did he begin to act in plays?
3.When did she began to act in her first film?
4. What about his family?
Keanu Reeves
1.When and where was Keanu Reeves born?
2.Where did Keanu Reeves grow up?
3.What about the time when he was young?
4. What did make him famous?
INTERVIEWING
Useful expressions
You studied/worked/acted at different…
First…and then… What did you do next?
Finally you found a job as … Later on…
What roles did you act? How long have you been working as…?
Four parts of the text
1.The first part (the first paragraph)
Steven Spielberg is a passionate about film from a very early age.
2.The second part (the second paragraph) –
He could not go to the Film Academy but later his career began to take off.
3.The third part (the next four paragraph) it is about several of Steven Spielberg’s successful films.
4.The forth part (the last paragraph) What Steven Spielberg has said and written.
Reading
Step 1 Lead-in
Do you know who is the director of the two film? Steven Spielberg
Talk about Spielberg.
Do you know the director ?
Do you know something about Spielberg?
Step 2 Read and fill in the chart.
Name Steven Spielberg
Age 57
Gender(性别) male
Year of birth 1946
Place of birth A small town in America
Name of his first film Firelight
Why are these years important for Spielberg?
1946--------- He was born in this year
1958--------- He made his first real film
1959--------- He won a prize for a short film
1962--------- He made a film called Firelight.
1975--------- He made a real blockbuster , Jaws
1982--------- He made another blockbuster, ET.
1993--------- He made the movie , Jurassic Park.
What are the movies about?
1. Jaws(1975) is about a big shark that attacks and eats swimmers.
2. ET(1982) is about a little creature that comes from outer space and wants to go home.
3. Jurassic Park(1993) is about an island where a very rich man keeps all kinds of dinosaurs.
4. Schindler’s List(1993) is about the cruelty of war/a German who saved thousands of Jewish people from being killed in the war.
5. Saving Private Ryan is also about the cruelty of war/an American captain who led his team to search for a soldier named Ryan.
Step 3 Read the text again and then summarize the main idea of each part
Three parts:
Part 1. (1-2) Talking about Spielberg’s earlier works and his live.
Part 2. (3-6) Talking about some of his films. Such as Jaws (1975), Jurassic Park (1993), Saving Private Ryan (1998) and so on.
Part 3. (7) Talking about Spielberg’s career and happy family.
Details for part 1
Childhood:
1946 born in a small town in American
1958 made his first real film
1959 won a prize for a short film
1962 Made his first film named FIRELIGHT
Youth Got a small job at a film and began his career
Details for part 2 & 3
Works: Jaws (1975) E. T. (1982) Jurassic Park(1993) Schindler’s List (1993)
Saving Private Ryan(1198)
Career: now is one of the top directors in the film industry
Family; met his wife when he was working and got married with her after seven years. Now they have seven children and live a very happy life.
Step 4 Ask and answer
1.Why did Spielberg study English instead of film?
Because his grades were not enough to go to the Film Academy.
2.why were people who saw the film Jaws afraid to swim in the sea?
Because they are afraid of the big shark in the sea
3.How important is his family to Spielberg’s career.
Spielberg says that he owes much of his career to his family.
4.What was Spielberg’s dream?
When he was young , his dream was to go to the Film Academy.
5.What is his wife’s name? Cate Capshaw ,a famous actress
6.What have you learnt from reading about Spielberg?
Working hard and believing in your dream will make your dreams come true.
Step 5 Multiple-choice:
1. How old is Steven Spielberg? ( A )
A 57 B 12 C 16 D 49
2. Why couldn’t Steven Spielberg go to the Film Academy as he wished? ( C )
A Because his family was too poor B Because he was too young to be accepted
C Because his grades were too poor D Because he hadn’t got enough experience
3. Which of the following are Steven’s war films? ( B )
A Fire&Jaws B Schindler’s List&Saving Private Ryan
C Jurassic Park&Schindler’s List D Jaws&Jurassic Park
4. This passage mainly tells about______ . ( A )
A Steven Spielberg’s life as a film director B Steven Spielberg’s life as an actor
C Steven Spielberg’s successful films D Steven Spielberg’s family life
Not One Less
Characters: Mr. Gao, Mr. Tian, Minzhi, Huike Some other pupils
Story: This film is about a 13-year-old girl, called Wei Minzhi, who takes care of the village school when the teacher, Mr. Gao, is away for a month. She has to make sure that all the students stay in the school. When one of them – Huike runs away to the city, she follows him and bring him back, together with the people from the TV station.
Comments: Many people like this film not only because the story itself is moving, but also because most of the people in the film use their real names and play themselves
Unit 6
Teaching Aims：
1.Learn some useful words and expressions
2.Train Ss’ reading ability
3. Get Ss to learn about table manners in western countries
Teaching Important Points:
1.Learn and master the folowing useful expressions:
Make a good impression, be close to a little bit ,start with ,keep silent ,ask for ,at table ,all the time ,drink to , too much
2.Help Ss understand the passage better
Teaching Difficult points:
How to help Ss understand the passage exactly ,especially the following sentences;
Teaching Methods:
1.Discussion to compare table manners in China with that in western countries
2.Fast reading and careful reading to understand the passage exactly
Teaching Aids: 1. a recorder 2. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Lead-in
Please tranlate this sentence “ Do in Rome as Romans do”into Chinese Today we are going to read a passage about table manners at a dinner party.
Read the text fast and silently, find the answer to the question,
“Which of the following can be found in the text?”
how to place those things./ how to lay the table
Chinese table manners
how some Chinese start eating
the order of dishes
how to cook western food
how to use a napkin
things to pay attention to at dinner table
Step 2 Fast reading
Read the text quickly and summarize the main idea of each part
Part1 (Para1) laying the table and good table manners
Part2 (Para2-5) the order of dishes and good table manners
Part3 (Para6) table manners changing over time and places
Step 3 Careful reading
Read Para.carefully and answer the questions.
1.what can be found on a Western dinner table? What about on a Chinese one?
Is laying the table for a dinner party in Western countries and in China the same?
2. How is the table laid in Western dinner party?
Things found on a Western dinner table
a small plate; a large plate; a napkin; a small basket with a roll of bread; a glass for red wine;
a glass for white wine; a glass for water; two pairs of knives and forks of different sizes; a soup spoon; a dessert spoon
Things found on a Chinese dinner table
a bowl; a Chinese spoon; a pair of chopsticks; a small ornament to rest the chopsticks on; a small tray with a damp cloth; a napkin; a small glass fot spirits, a glass for beer of soft drinks.
How is the table laid ? a small,bread roll,glasses,knivesForks, plate, two spoons, napkin )
How to use the napkin at a western dinner party?
You can take your napkin , unfold it and put it on your lap when you sit down at the table .
Step 4 Read Para2-5 carefully and answer the questions.
1.Please number the follow dishes be served at a dinner party with the right order.
dessert 4 drinks 5 main course 3 starter 1 soup 2
What are good table manners ?
Pray and keep silent for a moment .Then say
“enjoy your meal”to each other and start eating .
Keep the knife in your right hand and the fork
in your left .
Never ask for a second bowl of soup.
Use your fingers when eating chicken or other birds.
Finish eating everything on your plate .
Speak quietly and smile a lot .
Raise your glasses and take only a sip.
Step 5 Read Para6 carefully and answer the questions.
1. What will you do if you are not sure what to do? You can always follow your hosts.
2. Why is it difficult for people to follow good table manners?
Table manners change over Time and places.
Competition
1)You eat with little noise and movement. ( )
2)Use the napkin to wipe the silver or china. ( F )
3)Wait until all dishes are served. ( F )
4)Try every kind of new dish and appear to enjoy it. (F )
5)Bread is taken by a fork. ( F )
6)A soup spoon should be left on the table. ( F )
7)Do not put much food in your mouth at a time. ( )
8)Try not to get your lips greasy when drinking. ( )
9)Do not drop any food on the table cloth. ( )
10)Do not make any noise when you eat. ( )
11)Talk when there is food in your mouth. ( F )
Step 6 Discussion
A friend from Britain named Jack invites you to have a dinner at his home at 7:00 pm.
What will you do if you want to leave a good impression?
Arrive on time . Say thanks and goodbye Follow table manners Knowing the manners will help you make a good impression
Step 7 Summary
1.How do you use forks and knives at the table in Western countries ?
We keep the knife in our right hands and the fork in our left.
2. What table manners does the text tell about ?
How to lay the table How to use forks and knives etc. How to behave to the table.
How to eat. How to toast and drink
Step 8 Useful Expressions:
pay a visit to sb./sth.=Pay sb./sth. a visit 拜访某人/某地
2. make /leave a …impression on sb. 给某人留下……印象
3. be/sit at the table 坐在桌边 at table 在吃饭
be at table 正在吃饭 sit at table 入席,坐下吃饭
4. start with = begin with
5. drink to…=drink a toast to… 为……祝酒,为……干杯
drink (to) one’s health 为某人的健康干杯
e.g. Let’s drink to our friendship. We drank (to) each other’s health.
6. too much much too
e.g. I’m afraid I’ve put you too much trouble. I’m afraid the gift may be much too expensive.
Unit 7
Teaching Aims：
1. Master the following words and expressions:
Restore,replace,recreate, in ruins, under attack, give ,in pieces,bring…back to life ,come true
2.Learn the following sentence patterns:
It is true that…
3. Improve Ss’reading ability
4. Enable ss to be aware of the significance of protecting cultural relics
Teaching Important Points:
How to improve ss’reading ability
Teaching Difficult points:
1.How to grasp the main idea of a paragraph
2.How to help the Ss masterthe use of some useful words and expressions
3. How to enable the Ss to use the sentence patterns correctly.
Teaching Methods:
1. Discussion method to make the Ss understand what they’ve learned in class
2. Pair work or group work to get every student to take part in the teaching-and-learning activities
Teaching Aids:
1.a recoeder 2. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Study the title and guess
What is the difference between “A City of Heroes” and “Heroes of a City”?
“A City of Heroes” focuses on (着重；强调)a city, and there are many heroes; while “Heroes of a city” focuses on heroes, who live in a city.
Step 2 Read the text fast and answer:
What makes the city very great?
A. the people of the city. B. the location(位置）of the city. C. the cultural relics of the city.
Step 3 Read the passage again, and find the topic of each paragraph.
Para1: the building of the city.
Para2: the destroying of the city.
Para3: the rebuilding of the city
Para4: the present situation of the city.
Step 4 True or false(P46 Ex.2)
1.The city of St Petersburg was rebuilt by Peter the Great. F
2. The Germans attack St Petersburg a hundred years ago. F
3.A portrait of Peter the Great was destroyed by Germans.
4.It was difficult for the people to rebuild the palaces.
5.Workers and painters used old photographs to help them rebuild the city.
6. St Petersburg will never be as beautiful as it was before. F
Step 5 Answer the following questions:
1.Who built the city? When and where ? Peter the Great Three hundred years ago
2. Who wanted to destroy the city? When? The Germans. In 1941.
3. What damage did they do to the city?
They burned many of the palaces and St Petersburg was almost in ruins: building were destroyed, and paintings and statues lay in pieces on the ground.
4. How long did the attack last? What did the people of the city do?
900 days They never gave up; they tried their best to protect the city
5. After the attack, what did the people of the city do? They rebuilt the city.
6. Was it very hard to finish the work? How did they do it?
Yes. They did it with the help of old paintings and photographs.
Step 6 Read the text carefully and answer the questions of each Paragraph
Paragraph 1
1.By whom was St Petersburg built? The Russian Czar, Peter the Great.
Where and when was St Petersburg built?
In 1703,St Petersburg was built on the banks of the Neva River.
Paragraph 2
Why has the city become an important part of Russian culture and history?
St Petersburg has been the centre of many important events in history. The events is the reason.
Paragraph 3
What is the paragraph about?
Rebuilding the great city was difficult, but the people of St Petersburg succeeded
Paragraph 4
The people of St Petersburg are heroes of the city, why?
Why is the city a city of heroes? (多选题）
A: the events. B: the people of the city C: Czar peter D: the building
Step 7 Summary
St Petersburg:: was builded over 300 years ago on the bank of Nave River
Builder: Peter the Great
Destroyer: the Germans
Protectors: the people of the city
The people of St Petersburg are the modern heroes of Russia.
Peter the Great: 1. the Russian Czar 2. strong, proud, built a new capital city
3. Many new beautiful palaces like something out of a fairytale were built during his lifetime.
the Germans: 1. Tried to destroy the city in 1941 2. Burned many of the palaces as they left
3. St Petersburg was almost in ruins when they left.
the people of the city: 1. never gave in facing the attack by Germans for 900 days.
2. not gave up restoring the city and its cultural relics though it seemed impossible.
3. A lot of work was done on rebuilding the city and its culture though it was very difficul.
Unit 8
Teaching Aims：
1. Imporove the Ss’reading ability fast-reading and reading
2.Enable the Ss to master the new words and expressions , as well as the language points
3. Train the Ss to love and take an active part in the sports
Teaching Important Points:
1. How to improve the Ss’ reading ability
2.How to write a summary
Teaching Difficult points:
1.How to grasp the main idea of a paragraph
2.How to use some useful words and expressions
Teaching Methods:
1.Discussion method to make the Ss understand what they’ve learned better
2.Pair work or group work to get every Ss to take an active part in the teaching-and-learning activities
Teaching Aids:
1.a recorder 2. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Lead-in
What do the five rings stand for?” Europe Africa America Asia Oceania
1.What is the themes (主题）of the Olympic Games?
The themes of the Olympic Games is the international friendship and world peace.
2.Which team enters the main stadium first, and which team enters last?
The Greek team enters first and the team of the host country enters last.
3. Where is the torch lit? It is lit in Olympia, Greece
Step 2 Fast Reading
When and where were the first Olympic Games in modern times?
Step 4 True or False
1.Both the summer and winter Olympics are held every four years. T
2. The modern Olympic Games began around the year 776 BC.
3. In the old times both men and women were allowed to take part in the Olympics Games.
4. The 27th Olympics were held in Los Angeles.
5. In Barcelona the Chinese team won 16 medals.
6.The 28th Olympic Games will be held in Beijing.
7、The first modern Olympic Games happened in the year 383 AD.( )
8、The Olympic Games were born in Greece.( T )
9、The 24th Summer Olympics were held in Barcelona in Spain.( )
10、Horse-riding is one of the unusual sports in the Olympic Games.( T )
Step 5 Careful Reading
Both the Summer and Winter Olympics are held every four years.
Time City
Atlanta
Sydney, Australia
(Winter Olympics) Salt Lake
Athens
Beijing
Step 6 Reading carefully and fill in the below form
Para2---4 Time Place Competitors Sports
the 1st old Olympics 776 BC Greece Olympia young men
women x (why?) (one item, one day)
the old Olympics running jumping wrestling….
393 AD stopped when Greece came under the rule of the Roman Empire (罗马帝国)
the 1st modern Olympics 1896 Greece Athens 311 (13 countries) many items
the 25th Summer Olympics 1992 Barcelona 8000 (150 countries) 250 (sailing,horse-
riding,shooting)
Step 7 Read Para5 and Listen to the tape
The Olympic motto : “Swifter, Higher, Stronger” “A nation(国家,民族）with a strong body
is the base(基础) upon which a society (社会) can be built into prosperity (繁荣) ”
Para 6: To hold the Olympic Games is a rich prize for a country.
Every country wants to be the sponsor(主办)of the Olympic Games. Why?
much richer ,stronger show national power(国力) famous
carry forward( 弘扬）the spirit of the Olympic Games
Step 8 Read the text again and Summary the main idea of each paragraph
What’s important Olympic events happened/will happen in the following years?
In 776BC: The ancient Olympic Games began
After about the year 393AD: the Olympic Games stopped.
In 1896: The first Olympic Games in modern times happened.
In 2000: The 27th Olympic Games was held in Sydney
In 2008: The 29th Olympic Games will will be held in Beijing
Summary the main idea of each paragraph
The 1st: The Olympic Games are held every four years.
The 2nd: Something about the old Olympic Games.
The 3rd: Something about the Olympics in modern times and the 27th Olympic Games.
The 4th: The Olympic motto and something about the track star: Carl Lewis and the Chinese team in Sydney Olympics.
The 5th: Beijing will host and is making preparations for the 29th Olympic Games.
Step 9 Discussion:
The 29th Olympic Games will be held in Beijing in 2008. What shall we Chinese do for the city? What will Beijing look like at that time?
Integrating skills
Fast reading:
Q1. What does Yao Ming do?
Q2. Why is he so famous?
Detail Reading:
Name : Yao Ming Sex : male Nationality: Chinese
Birthplace: Shanghai, China Date of birth: Sept.12.1980 Weight: 134Kg Height: 2.26m
Job: basketball player Position: centre Club: the Houston Rockets
His parents’ job: famous basketball players
His interest as a young boy: learn to play the world’s most popular games
Unit 9
Teaching Aims：
1. Train the Ss’reading ability
2.Learn and master the following words and phrases
Teenager, press, function ,image ,feature, throughout the world ,more than,add…to, remind sb.about sth,obey the rules,stay in touch with,in case of, at least,according to
Teaching Important Points:
1.Learn and master the following phrases
throughout the world ,more than,add…to, remind sb.about sth,obey the rules,stay in touch with,in case of, at least,according to
2.How to make the Ss understand the text better
Teaching Difficult points:
1.Master the difference between the following phrases: no matter wh-/wh-ever ,in case of/ in case
2.Understand the following sentences
(1) Having a cell phone also makes us feel safer , since we can for help in case of an emergency
(2) Wang Mei is one of many Chinese teenagers who live life on the go and use cell phones
Teaching Methods:
1.Discussion to arouse the Ss’interest in the text
2. Fast reading to let the Ss get the general idea of the text
3. Question-and-answer activity to let the Ss get the detailed information in the text
4. Making sentences to have the Ss master some language points
Teaching Aids:
1. a recorder 2. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Lead-in
(Show a mobile phone to the students) Answer the following questions
1.Have you ever used a cell phone? Do any of your classmates have cell phones?
Step 2 Read the passage again ,and try to find the main idea of each paragraph
1.Wang Mei is an example of Chinese teenagers who have cell phones.
2.Cell phones can be used for many things.
3.Cell phones also cause problems
4.There are several reasons why teenager like cell phones
5.Wang Mei explains why she likes her cell phone and what she used if for.
Paragraph 1 Enjoy the life on the go
Paragraph 2 New functions are being added
Paragraph 3 Cellphones can not be used in school.
Paragraph 4 Several reasons why teenagers like cellphones.
Paragraph 5 We enjoy the life with cellphones.
The main idea
It discusses the increasing popularity of cellphone in Chinese society. Cellphones are everywhere and have positive and negative effects on our life.
Step 3 Look at the outline of paragraph 2,3 and 4 and try to fill in the blanks
2.Cell phones can be used for many things.
For example: Cell phones are used as cameras, Radios and electronic calendars, and to send E-mail,surf the Internet,play games and enjoy music.
Step 4 Answer the following questions:
1.What does the title “Life on the go” mean?
It means the high pace of modern life and to the fact that portable devices, like cellphones and laptops, are becoming popular.
2. Why do some schools not let students use cellphones?
Cellphones can distract students in class; cellphones may make students spend more time talking on the phone than doing homework
3. Why do teenagers like cellphones so much?
Safety and the cool factor; the desire to be liked by others.etc.
4.Wang Mei says that cellphones are the most useful? Why?
Step 5 Read the text once again, fill in the blanks below:
1. Tell us some functions of cellphones:
Talking to people
Sending messages and images(pictures)
Playing games
Taking photos
Listening to radios and music
Sending e-mail or surfing the Internet
Reminding you about appointments
(3G cellphone)talking to people face to face
2.Cellphones may cause problems,such as:
In school,cellphones may disturb lessons.
Students may spend too much time and money on phone calls.
3. Teenagers like cellphones because …
1. Cellphones help us stay in touch with friends and family.
2. They can call for help in case of an emergency.
3. They think the cellphone is a way to have fun and be cool.
Step 6 Read through the text and tell if the following statements are true or false:
Wang Mei will be back home 10 minutes later. T
We may talk to anyone who also has a cell phone in his pocket. T
Now cell phones can be used as cameras, but not to send email or surf the internet.
Some important days can be reminded about by the earliest cell phones.
Some students disobey the rules and using their phones in the classroom.
John’s parents gave him a cell phone as a Christmas gift, but don’t let him use it in school
Wand Mei calls her best friend at least once a day. T
Unit 10
Teaching Aims：
1. Do some reading to improve the Ss’ reading ability
2.Help the Ss to know that we mustdo what we can to protect the animals and plants around us
3.Learn some useful words and expressions
Teaching Important Points:
1. Improve the Ss’ reading ability
2.Master the use of some important words and expressions
Teaching Difficult points:
How to help the Ss improve their reading ability and help them to know the importance of environmental protection
Teaching Methods:
1. Fast reading and careful reading to get the general idea and detailed information of the passage
2. Discussion and explanation to help the students understand the passage better
3. Listening and reading to improve the Ss’ pronunciation
4．Pairwork and individual work to make every student work in class
Teaching Aids:
1. a recorder 2. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Listening
What kind of pollution is it? air pollution
What are the causes? Causes: cars, factories, burning coal and oil
What are the effects? Effect: Human beings and animals can not breathe fresh air any more and may be poisoned.
water pollution
Causes: factories and drainage
Effect: Dead fish everywhere. We can not use and drink the water.
waste pollution
Causes: tourists
Effect: The world around us will be ugly, dirty. We will have a really bad environment.
Step 2 Scanning ( T or F )
1.Human beings always do as they say.
2.It’s late for us to take measures to keep animals and plants from dying out.
3.A species may die out if humans or other animals use too much of a plant or kill too many animals.T
4.Planting a tree is a way to create more space for animals.T
5. We often take good care of ourselves and planet .
6.Since many living things have already died out,we must do something to protect other living things.T
7.Plants and animals will be endangered when they can’t adapt to the change of their habitat.T
8.Plants or animals don’t have to change when a new species comes.
Step 3 Intensive reading
1.Why do animals & plants become endangered?
2.What can we do to protect animals & plants that are being endangered?
Main reasons:
Destruction of human beings.
Introduction of a new species.
Overuse of a plant and over-hunt for animals.
Lack of food.
Pollution.
Main idea of the text.
It’s about why a species becomes endangered and what we can do to protect plants & animals from becoming endangered.
Para 1. Many animals and plants have died out and some others are in danger
Para 2. Why do animals and plants become endangered?
Para.3. What can we do to keep animals and plants from being endangered?
Step 4 Listen to Para 1, answer questions:
1. Who is Steve Jones?
2. What does an environmental expert do?
3. Why should we take care of the planet and ourselves?
Listen to Para2, answer questions:
1. Can you explain what the habitat is like?
2. What will happen if the habitat is changed?
3. Why do some original species become endangered if a new species arrives?
Listen to Para 3, answer questions
1. What can we do to protect the animals and the environment?
2. Is it possible that people would be endangered?
Why do animals and plants become endangered?
Habitats are changed
New species arrive
Resources are overused
Animals are are over killed
Environment is polluted
1. Why is it important to make sure that animals do not die out?
If animals die out, our ecosystems will be destroyed and we human beings will die out, too
2.What can we do to help endangered animals?
We can stop people cutting too many trees, killing animals and polluting rivers. We can tell people to protect from now on.
Step 5 Choose the best answers
1.Steve Jones talks to the group ______. B
A. in a lecture hall of a university B. when he ‘s showing them around a park
C. In a zoo in Birmingham D. In a green park in London
2. The environment in which certain animals or plants are used to living is known as their ______. D
A. land B.species C. Park D. habitat
3. How many reasons does Steve Jones list to show how a species become endangered? A
A.3 B.2 C. 4 D.1
4. In what way nature seems to be cleverer than human beings? A
A. it does not drink. B. it always stays calm. C. it is a better recycler D. it never makes mistakes
5. What does “reduce” means? C
A. we must reduce the amount of food we eat. B. we must smoke less.
C. we must throw away less rubbish. D. we must control the world’s population
6. Which of the following is a way of “respond”?B
A Reply when asked a question B Show others how to protect the environment.
C try not to use harmful things. D Repair things and use them longer.
7. Which can be used as another title for passage 1? C
A. a lecture on the Tour B. Steve Jones
C. The Green park on Birmingham D. Action speak louder than words
8. Which is the best title for passage 2? C
A. Ecosystems B.Air , water and Energy
C.Four ways to care about nature D.Reduce the amount rubbish
Step 6 Discussion:
Think of things you could do to protect the environment. Write a list like Jennifer
Unit 11
Teaching Aims：
1.Train the Ss’ reading ability
2.Improve the Ss’communicating ability
3. Let the Ss know about the different styles of music in the world
Teaching Important Points:
1.Learn and master the following words and phrases
On the radio,in common, combine,variety
2. Improve the Ss’ reading ability and help the Ss understand the passage exactly
Teaching Difficult points:
How to help the Ss further understand the passage and finish the relevant tasks correctly
Teaching Methods:
1.Fast reading and careful reading to train the Ss’reading ability and understand the passage better
2.Discussion to improve the Ss’ability to communicate with each other
Teaching Aids:
1. a recorder 2.the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Skimming
What is the passage about ? It’s a brief look at some of the exciting musical styles from around the world.
Step 2 Read the passage quickly and answer the following questions
1.How many styles of music does the author write about ? What are they?
Six They are blues, jazz, rock, hip-hop, rap, Latin music
2.Why does the author write this passage?
Because he wants to introduce some of the exciting music styles from around the world.
Step 3 Fast reading
3.Who are the two stars of Latin music mentioned in the passage?
Santana and Ricky Martin.
Step 4 Scanning
Read the passage slowly to get some details and then do the following :
I True or False questions and correcting the error
1.( ) There are only a few styles of music in the world.
2.( ) Blues is a new style of music.
3. ( ) Hip-hop and rap are completely different from blues and rock.
4. ( T ) Santana is a well-known Latin music artist.
5. ( ) Rappers sing the words to their music.
6. ( T ) There are many Spanish-speaking people in both North and South America.
Step 5 Intensive reading
kind Where is it from? Where is it popular?What are their characteristics?Famous singers/stars
Blues African songs US A way for…
Jazz Blues music US
Rock Blues music US
Hip- hop US fast/slow, combine
Rap US speak/“rap”
Latin music South/Latin America US/Spanish-speaking countries SantanaRicky Martin
Step 6 Choose the best answer
1. From Paragraph1 we can infer that___. A
A.There are many more kinds of music all over the world than we can hear on the radio or on TV.
B.There are not many kinds of music all over the world.
c.It is probable that few people like pop music.
D.Most of us probably have our favorite performers,stars or bands
2 .What is the most important characteristic of rap music?____ B
A.It combines other styles of music. B.The way it is sung is very special.
C.It can be fast or slow. D.It has something in common with blues and rock.
3.What do we know about Ricky Martin from the text?_______ D
A.He is popular in Spanish-speaking countries.
B.He is an American but speaks Spanish.
C.He is a rap singer.
D.He is not only well-known in Spanish-speaking countries but all over the world.
4.Where do you think Latin Music will be very much liked according to the text?______ B
A.Where there are many young people.
B.Where there are many Spanish-speaking people live.
C.Where there are many English-speaking people.
D.Where many Africans live.
5. Blues music comes from ________ . C
A. Latin America B. North America C. Africa D. Spain
6. The blues was brought to the US by _______ . B
A. African singers B. African artists C. African Musicians D. African slaves
7. The word “rap” in Paragraph 3 means “_______” . C
A. to sing and dance along with the beat. B. to peak the song words and dance along with the beat.
C. to sing and rap along with the beat. D. to speak the song words and rap along with the beat.
8. According to the passage, which of the following statements is true? D
A.Jazz, rock ,hip - hop , rap and Latin music are new musical styles.
B.Now blues is not popular in the US any more.
C.Hip - hop , rap and Latin music are very popular in the US.
D.Hip - hop and rap are completely the same as blues and rock.
9. In the US, where there are many Spanish – speaking , Latin music is a big part of the culture. The culture here refers to ______. B
A.African culture B. Spanish-speaking people’s culture C. Latin culture D. Spanish culture
Step 7 Post-reading
Listen to the tape and then have a discussion of the following questions:
1.Where does blues music come from?
Blues music came from Africa music that was brought to the United States by slaves.
2. What does the word “rap” mean?
To rap is to speak the words of a song along with the beat.
3. Why is Latin music so popular in the Us? Is it popular in China?
Latin music is popular in America partly because of the fact that the US has a large Spanish-speaking population, but also because of the success of such artists as Santana and Ricky Martin. No, it is not very popular in China.
4. What have you learned from the passage?
Different styles of music make the world more colorful.
Step 8 Find out the topic sentence of each paragraph.
Paragraph1: There is a world of music out there.
Paragraph2 Blues music has a long history
Paragraph3: Today’s American music culture contains many different styles.
Paragraph4: Latin music has spread all over the world
Paragraph5 There is a wide variety of new music to be discovered in every corner of the world.
Unit 12
Teaching Aims：
1.Train the Ss’reading ability
2. Learn and master the following phrases
In trouble, come across, fight against, succeed , share ,believe in
Teaching Important Points:
1. Let the Ss understand the text better
2. Tell the differences among the following phrases
Used to do/be used to do/ be used to doing
Teaching Difficult points:
1. Master the following sentence patterns
(1) make sb./sth +adj.
(2) It is +adj.+to do sth
2.Master sentence pattern
Teaching Methods:
1. Question-and-answer activity to help the students to go through with the whole passage
2. Careful reading to find out the detailed information about the passage
3.Pair work or group work to make every student work in class
Teaching Aids:
1.a recorder 2. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Lead-in
Have you seen the film”Harry Potter”? Can you tell us something about the film?
Step 2 Fast reading
Write the letter “T” if the sentence is true. Write “F” if the sentence is false, and then give the right information
1 ( ) Harry Potter is a world-famous writer.
2 ( T ) Harry is a boy with a scar on his forehead.
3 ( ) Harry is very happy before he goes to Hogwarts.
4 ( ) Harry goes to an ordianry school.
5 ( T ) Harry learns a lot about the real world at Hogwarts.
6 ( ) Rowling’s books are about magic and strange creatures, they don’t tell us something about the real world.
Step 3 Read the text again and summary the main idea of each paragraph
Para.1 It is a world of magic and wonders, a world where anything can happen
Para.2 Harry seems like a normal boy , but his life is miserable
Para.3 Hogwarts is an unusual school
Para.4 Harry has to fight against bad wizards and do the right thing
Step 4 Find out the key word of each paragraph as fast as you can. (team match)
JK Rowling , the author of the book and her books
Harry Potter, the hero in the books
Hogwarts , the place where the story happens
Harry’s feeling , which readers share
Step 5 Answer the following questions
1.Why is Harry Potter’s life miserable before he goes to Hogwarts?
Because his parents are dead and the family which he is living with treats him badly.
2.What does Harry learn about himself at Hogwarts?
At Hogwarts, Harry learns the truth about his past, a dark secret that will make his life and his choices more difficult.
3.Why does Rowling use strange creatures in her books?
Rowling uses strange creatures in her books to add to the magic effect of the story.
篇11：高二英语教案Unit 15 Destinations4(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)
Teaching Aims:
1.Learn and master the following new words:
budget,rate,visa,arrangement,passport,cheque,currency,sight,seasoned,accommodation
2.Train the students’ integrating skills,especially reading and writing skills.
3.Get the students to learn how to make a plan for a travel.
Teaching Important Points:
1.Get the students to understand the text exactly,especially the following words and phrases:
rate,make one’s own arrangements,seasoned,travel light,sights
2.Help the students write a travel brochure well.
Teaching Difficult Point:
How to help the students master the ways of writing a better descriptive essay/paragraph.
Teaching Methods:
1.Asking-and-answering activity to check the students’ understanding of the text.
2.Inductive and imitative methods to train the students’ writing ability.
3.Individual,pair or group work to finish each task.
Teaching Aids:
1.the multimedia
2.the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step Ⅰ Greetings
Greet the whole class as usual.
Step Ⅱ Revision and Lead-in
T:Yesterday,we reviewed the use of Non-finitive Verbs-to do,-ing,-ed.Now,let’s do an exercise to see if you have really mastered them.Look at the screen.
(Shows the following on the screen.)
Complete the sentences using to do,-ing or -ed according to the meanings of the first sentences.
1.It is important that you should decide where to go.
→It is important___________________.
2.You didn’t give up the opportunity of going abroad for further education.I think you are wise.
→It is wise___________________.
3.Since he could not find his passport,he could not go on the trip.
→___________________,he could not go on the trip.
4.If they had been given better attention,the cabbages could have grown better.
→___________________,the cabbages could have grown better.
5.As they were influenced by his example,they performed countless good deeds.
→___________________,they performed countless good deeds.
6.When he saw those pictures,he couldn’t help thinking of those memorable days they spent together.
→___________________,he couldn’t help thinking of those memorable days they spent together.
(Teacher allows the students a few minutes to prepare.Then check the answers orally with the whole class.)
Suggested answers:
1.for you to decide where to go
2.of you not to give up the opportunity to go abroad for further education
3.Not finding his passport
4.Given better attention
5.Influenced by his example
6.Seeing those pictures
T:Besides,we’ve learnt a lot of words to describe an international trip in this unit.Which words in the text can help you describe an international trip?
Ss:Beautiful/modern/cultural/historical/perfect/attractive/paradise/breath-taking scenery /
a world-class resort/challenging and exciting/a feast for eyes…(Bb:beautiful…)
T:Yes,so many.Today,we’re going to read another passage about travel.It will provide you some useful travel tips and practical advice.First,let’s learn the new words in this period.
(Teacher shows the following on the screen and deals with the words as usual.)
budget/′bdt/ n.预算；预算案
rate /ret/ n.价格；费用；速度；效率
visa/′v:z/ n.签证
arrangement/′reindmnt/ n.安排；准备工作；整理
passport/′pa:聅p凯聇/ n.护照；过境通行证
cheque/tek/ n.支票
△photocopy/′futukopi/ n.&vt.复印（件）
currency/′krnst/ n.货币；通货
sight/sat/ n.景象，情景；视力，视觉
seasoned/′siznd/ adj. 有经验的
accommodation/km′den/ n.住处；膳宿
Step Ⅲ Reading
T:Well.Now please open your books at Page 38.Read each paragraph quickly and try to find out what tips and advice the writer gives us.See what I mean?
Ss:Yes.
(The students begin to read.A few minutes later,teacher begins to check their understanding of the text.)
T:OK,everyone.Are you ready now?
Ss:Yes.
T:Now,I’ll collect the tips and advice the writer gives us.One student,one tip or one piece of advice,OK?
Ss:OK.
T:Who’d like to be the first?
S1:Find out more about the destination you have chosen before you go to save money and avoid problems.
S2:Consider when and how you want to travel and you’d better ask travel agents for help.
S3:Bring some cash besides credit cards.
S4:Keep your passport and money in a safe place and make photocopies of all important documents before you leave.
S5:Buy foreign currency at home.If you must exchange money during your vacation,do it in banks not on the street or with strangers.
S6:Plan a pleasant,interesting and comfortable trip.Travel light if possible.
T:Very good.Thank you,boys and girls.Now,please re-read it carefully and further understand it.Then work in pairs to finish the Exercises 1~3 after the text.
(The students begin to re-read.Several minutes later,teacher checks the answers.)
Suggested answers:
1.save money and avoid problems
2.experienced
3.travel with as little luggage as possible
Step Ⅳ.Listening and Reading Aloud
T:Very good.You’ve understood the text exactly.Now,I’ll play the tape for you.First,listen and repeat,paying attention to the pronunciation and intonation.Then read it aloud for a while.
Step Ⅴ Consolidation
T:OK,everyone.Stop reading.Now you’ve been very familiar with the text.Here is a question for you to discuss.Listen carefully!Which travel tip do you think is the most useful?And why?Are you clear about that?
Ss:Yes.
T:Work in groups of four and discuss for a few minutes.Then I’ll ask some students to say your opinions.You can begin now.
(A few minutes later.)
T:OK.Are you ready now?
Ss:Yes.
T:Who’d like to be the first to talk about your opinions?Any volunteer?
S1:I think the tip about money is the most useful.It reminds travellers of avoiding bringing too much money.Instead,credit cards could be a better choice.In particular,travellers should not forget to have all important documents photo copied before leaving in case you might lose them.
S2:I think planning and packing is the most useful.For any thing,well-prepared is half of success.You’d better plan it in advance in order to avoid problems and save money or time.
S3:…
Step Ⅵ Writing
T:Well,in order to have a pleasant and interesting trip,you’d better have the tips and advice in mind.Now,please read the travel brochure in writing quickly and find out what information it describes.
(The students begin to read it quickly and answer the teacher’s question as soon as they finish reading it.)
Ss:It describes transport,accommodation,attractions and activities for travelling to Thailand.(Bb:…)
T:Quite right.Now you’ve known how to write a travel brochure.Work in pairs.Choose your favourite destination and write a travel brochure in which you describe the place,suggest activities and provide travel tips.Can you follow me?
Ss:Yes.
T:When you finish your brochure,show it to the rest of the class and try to persuade them to visit your destination.Is everything clear?
Ss:Yes.
(The students begin to work.Teacher may give them advice to help them write a good travel brochure while going among the students.)
Step Ⅶ Summary and Homework
T:In this class,we’ve not only got some travel experience by reading the travel tips and the practical advice,but also learnt how to write a descriptive essay like a brochure.After class,please review what we’ve learnt in this class and preview the next unit.That’s all for today.See you next time.
Ss:See you next time.
Step Ⅷ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard
Unit 15 Destinations
The Fourth Period
Ⅰ.Words to describe an international trip:
beautiful/modern/cultural/historical/perfect/attractive/paradise/breath-taking scenery/
a world-class resort/challenging/exciting/a feast for eyes…
Ⅱ.How to write a travel brochure:
transport,accommodation,attraction,activities,pictures
Step Ⅸ Record after Teaching
篇12：高二英语教案Unit 17 Disabilities2(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)
The Second Period
Teaching Aims:
1.Learn and master the following words and expressions:get around(=get about),fair,guidance,gifted,assist,cooperate,recognition,sympathy,encouragement,productive,visual,impair,motivate,disappointing,adjust to,get used to
2.Train the students’ reading ability.
Teaching Important Points:
1.Improve the students’ reading ability.
2.Enable the students to understand the text better.
3.How to get the students to master the useful expressions.
Teaching Difficult Points:
Master the following sentence structures:
1.…studying together with their disabled classmates is both challenging and rewarding. Living with disability is frustrating and challenging.
2.I am and get used to the fact that while I may not be…
Teaching Methods:
1.Discussion to help the students know something about the disabled.
2.Fast reading to get the general idea of the text.
3.Questioning-and-answering activity to help the students go through the whole passage.
4.Pair work or individual work to make every student work in class.
Teaching Aids:
1.a tape recorder
2.a multimedia
Teaching Procedures:
Step Ⅰ Greetings and Revision
(Greet the whole class as usual.)
T:Yesterday we learned what difficulties and dangers the disabled might face and how to help them in our daily life.Imagine you are disabled.Who’d like to describe the situation(If you were blind/deaf etc.)and tell us how you would deal with them.
S:I’ll try.…
(All the others listen carefully.)
T:Well done.No matter what difficulties he may meet with,we all hope he can enjoy himself.
Step Ⅱ Lead-in and Pre-reading
T:Yeah.We know people with disabilities may have lots of difficulties in their lives,but many of them are determined.They can overcome any difficulty.Please look at the three questions on the screen and discuss them in groups.
(Show the following on the screen.)
1.Do you know anyone who is disabled?
How does he or she deal with the disability?
2.Do you know of any famous people who are disabled?What do they do?
3.Should disabled students be allowed to go to college?Should they get any extra help?Why or why not?
(Teacher gives students five minutes to discuss and collects their answers.)
Suggested answers:
1.Yes.I know a person with disability.He has learnt to do many things without help.He can take care of himself at home,but getting around in the city in a wheelchair is often frustrated.He loves reading stories of young disabled people who have overcome great difficulties.
2.Yes,I do.Beethoven was a great musician,Helen Keller was a great American writer,and Zhang Haidi is also a writer.
3.Yes,they should.Because there are many gifted disabled students,they can make a contribution to the society.
They should get some extra help in their everyday activities.
No,they shouldn’t.Because they need recognition,more than sympathy and help.
Step Ⅲ Reading
T:OK.Today we’ll read a text “Disabled?Not me!”and know something more about it.I think you are interested in it.Please turn to Page 17.Read the passage quickly to get the general idea and answer the questions on the screen.
(Teacher shows the questions on the screen.)
1.What’s the trouble of Zhong Xiaowen?
2.How does she get around?
3.What’s the teachers’ aim in the special college?
4.What do the articles in Literature of Chinese Blind Children talk about?
5.How does Zijie like the magazine?
(Teacher gives students enough time to read the text and collects their answers.)
Suggested answers:
1.Xiaowen was born without the ability to use her legs and she has no feeling below the waist.
2.She uses a wheelchair to get around.
3.Their aim is to help disabled students understand that they can play a valuable role within society.
4.The articles are often about disabled people who have overcome challenges and difficulties and learnt to live a meaningful and productive life.
5.He loves the magazine very much.He thinks it is very important for them to know that someone far away is also struggling as they are.
T:Now read the passage again and try to get as much information as you can.
Step Ⅳ Study for Language Points
T:Now you’ve known the general idea of the passage.Please look at the screen.I’ll explain something to you.
(Show the following on the screen.)
a.treat vt. treat sb. well(badly)
e.g.Don’t treat me as a child.
Which doctors are treating her for her illness?
b.ability n. the ability to do,a man of ability
e.g.Man has the ability to speak.
c.make a contribution to
e.g.We must do something useful and make a contribution to our country.
d.launch vt.
①launch a man-made satellite
②launch a new enterprise
③launch threats against sb.
e.play a …role(in,within)
e.g.He played a leading role in a film.
f.both…and…
e.g.Both you and I are students.
He both fears and hates at once.
g.…studying together with their disabled classmates is both challenging and rewarding.
Living with disability is frustrating and challenging.
In these two sentences,gerundial phrases are used as subject.
e.g.Working with him is a great pleasure.
h.…I am and get used to the fact that while…Here that-clause is used as appositive clause,expressing the fact.
e.g.The fact that he came here was known to us all.
(Write important phrases and difficult sentences on the blackboard.)
T:(After explaining the language points.)
Do you have anything you don’t understand?If you have,please tell me,I’ll be glad to have a discussion with you.
(The teacher answers the questions raised by the students.)
Step Ⅴ Listening and Consolidation
T:Let’s listen to the tape.I’ll play the tape twice.When I first play it,just listen.When I play it for the second time,listen and repeat it.Are you clear about it?
(The teacher plays the tape for the students to listen and repeat.While the students read,the teacher goes among the students to correct the students’ mistakes in pronunciation,intonation and stress.)
T:Now turn to Page 52.There are five questions for you to answer in Post-reading.Try to find the answers in the text.Discuss in groups of four,and then I’ll ask some of you to read your answers.
(A few minutes later.)
T:Are you ready?
Ss:Yes.
T:Now let’s begin.
S1:They have to use wheelchairs to get around and it often takes them a little longer to do everyday things,such as getting out of bed,getting dressed and going to class.
S2:They not only learn how to assist disabled people,but also learn the importance of cooperating to reach their goals in life.
S3:They help disabled students to understand that they can play a valuable role within society,and inspire many of them to believe that they can realize their dreams.
S4:Today there are more opportunities like the special Olympics for disabled people to develop their potential,live a richer life and make a contribution to society.
Because people understand that they can play a valuable role within society,and that they need recognition,more than sympathy and help.
S5:People must make sure that all of us should have equal access to all areas and facilities.People should treat me fairly.
Step Ⅵ Summary and Homework
T:Today we have learned the passage-Disabled?Not me!From the success of the disabled student-Zhong Xiaowen,we learn something important.There is nothing difficult in the world if you stick to it.When you meet with difficulty in your life and study,please don’t lose heart.On the other hand,we should help the students to know how to help the disabled in our daily life.
And we also learn some phrases.After class,you should work hard and master them.
Step Ⅶ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard
Unit 17 Disabilities
The Second Period
1.Important Phrases:
treat sb.,the ability to do,make a contribution to launch,play a …role,both…and…,get used to
2.Difficult Sentences:
…I am and get used to the fact that while…
I may not be able to walk,there are many other great things I can do.
Step Ⅷ Record after Teaching
篇13：高二英语教案Unit 17 Disabilities3(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)
Teaching Aims:
1.Review the words and phrases learned in the last two periods.
2.Learn and master Direct and Indirect Objects.
Teaching Important Points:
1.How to guess the missing word according to the given sentence.
2.Master the interchanges of position on direct and indirect objects in the sentence.
Teaching Difficult Point:
Master the changes of the prepositions in the interchanges of direct and indirect objects.
Teaching Methods:
1.Review method to consolidate the words learned in the last two periods.
2.Explanation and inductive methods to make the students master the interchanges of direct and indirect objects.
3.Individual,pair work to make every student work in class.
Teaching Aids:
1.the blackboard
2.the multimedia
Teaching Procedures:
Step Ⅰ Greetings
Greet the whole class as usual.
Step Ⅱ Word Study
T:In the last two periods,we have learned something about disabilities.As we all know,we shouldn’t look down upon the disabled.We should help and respect them.And we must make life easier for them.All these include some useful and important words and phrases.Now let’s review them.Open your books and turn to Page 53.Look at Word Study.Part 1:Fill in the blanks with the right words.Part 2:Use the correct form of the words in the box to describe the following things or people.You are given ten minutes to do them.Read first,then fill in them according to the meaning of each sentence.Is that clear?
Ss:Yes.
T:OK.First do it by yourself.Then discuss them in pairs.After a while,I’ll ask some students to read the words.
(Teacher goes among the students and the students begin to do it.After a while,teacher checks their answers.)
Suggested answers:
1.①waist ②guidance
③sympathy ④physical
⑤potential ⑥gifted
⑦meaningful ⑧limit
⑨overcome ⑩adjust
2.①frustrated ②challenging
③disabled ④motivated
⑤encouraged ⑥disappointed
⑦rewarding
Step Ⅲ Grammar Study
T:Now I want you to translate two sentences into English.Look at the screen.
(Show the following on the screen.)
1.请把盐递给我。
2.请给我们演奏一些民间乐曲。
T:Here I tell you how to say“民间乐曲”in English-folk music.Now can you translate the two sentences?Who wants to try?Yeah,Zhao Nan,you try the first one,please.
S1:Pass me the salt,please.
T:Good,sit down,please.Now we can also say:Pass the salt to me,please.
(Write the two sentences on the blackboard.)
Now the second one.Who wants to try?OK.Peter,you try,please.
S2:Play us some folk music,please.
S3:We can also say:Play some folk music for us,please.
T:Very good,sit down,please.
(Write the two sentences on the blackboard.)
Look at the blackboard,the verbs“play”and“pass”are followed by two objects.In English,there are some verbs that can be followed by two objects.Who can tell us what they are?
S4:I’ll try.They are send,buy,get…
T:Right.You’ve known some of the verbs.Now I’ll give you a summary.Please look at the screen.
(Show the following on the screen.)
Common verbs that take indirect objects:
①give,show,send,bring,offer,read,pass,lend,leave,hand,tell,return,write,pay,throw,wish,teach,promise,owe,refuse ect.
e.g.I’ll lend you something to read.
Remember to write us a note when you get there.
②make,buy,do,fetch,get,play,save,order,cook,sing,find ect.
e.g.I hope you’ll do me a favour.
Let’s get the children something to drink.
T:Now please notice there are two groups in the diagram.In Group 1,most of the indirect objects are transformed into “to-phrase”.And in Group 2,most of the indirect objects are transformed into “for-phrase”.
(Write the following on the blackboard.)
Compare:
Is that clear?
Ss:Yes.
T:But not all the indirect objects can be replaced like this.
e.g.“Do me a favour”.We can’t transform it into:“Do a favour for me.”
OK.Now let’s do some exercises.Open your books and turn to Page 54.Look at Grammar-Direct and Indirect Objects.Look at Part 1.Tick the right answer.First do it by yourselves.Then discuss it in pairs.Finally I’ll show you the answers.
(After students finish it,teacher shows the following on the screen.)
Suggested answers:
1.√Because his mother bought him a computer.
√Because his mother bought a computer for him.
2.√Do me a favour.Please lend me one 珁uan.
3.√Please take these exercise-books to my office.
4.√Give me the check,please.
√Please give the check to me.
T:OK.In fact,we should pay attention to some special cases.Especially when the direct object is shorter than the indirect object,or when we emphasize the indirect object,we often use such patterns,“Subject+Predicate+Direct Object+to/for+Indirect Object”.
e.g.I took it to the policeman on duty.
Mother bought the ice-cream for you,not for me.
(Write them on the blackboard.)
And there are two special cases you should notice.
Please look at the screen.
(Show the following on the screen.)
1.We must use prepositions before the indirect object following the two verbs “explain and suggest”.
e.g.Could you explain your point of view to us?
I suggest a way out to her.
2.Some verbs are followed by either direct object or indirect object,or both of them.
e.g.I asked John.
I asked a question.
I asked John a question.
The similar verbs are:teach,tell,owe,pay,show
As to this,you should remember them.Is that clear?
Ss:Yes.
T:OK.Let’s deal with Part 2.
(Teacher begins to read the following and explains it if necessary.Summer is coming.You decide to have a different vacation this year.Use the words in brackets to explain what you will do differently this summer.)
Now you are given five minutes to do it.First do it by yourself.Then discuss it in pairs.Now please begin.
(Teacher goes among the students to check their writing and explains some new words that students meet with and ask.As to some difficult sentences,teacher and students can discuss together.At last,teacher shows the answers on the screen.)
Suggested answers:
1.This summer,I want to make my parents less trouble by staying at home.
2.This summer my grandpa wants to buy some books for me.
3.This summer my friends want to send short messages to me.
4.This summer my aunt and uncle want to bring candy to me when they come to visit.
5.This summer I want to teach English to my 6-year-old niece.
Step Ⅳ Practice
(The teacher shows the following on the screen)
Change the position of the direct object and indirect object in the following sentences.
1.I’ll lend you some.
2.He gave his wife a camera for Christmas.
3.We’re going to sing some songs for the heroes.
4.Bring me the book.
5.She made a coat for me.
6.He bought flowers for his teacher.
T:Look at the screen.Let’s practise the interchanges of the direct and indirect object.
(Give the students several minutes to practise them,then teacher may check their practice.)
Suggested answers:
1.I’ll lend some to you.
2.He gave a camera to his wife for Christmas.
3.We’re going to sing the heroes some songs.
4.Bring the book to me.
5.She made me a coat.
6.He bought his teacher flowers.
Step Ⅴ Summary and Homework
T:In this class,we’ve reviewed some new words and mainly done some exercises about direct and indirect objects.After class,review the content,and remember the verbs that can be followed by double objects.Today’s homework:Preview the integrating skills.That’s all for today.Goodbye,everyone.
Step Ⅵ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard
Unit 17 Disabilities
The Third Period
Direct and Indirect Object
1.Pass me the salt,please.
→Pass the salt to me,please.
Play us some folk music,please.
→Play some folk music for us,please.
2.Compare:
3.“Subject+Predicate+Direct Object+to/for+Indirect Object”
e.g.I took it to the policeman on duty.
Mother bought the ice-cream for you,not for me.
Step Ⅶ Record after Teaching
篇14：高二英语教案Unit 17 Disabilities4(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)
The Fourth Period
Teaching Aims:
1.Review the useful expressions learnt in this unit by making sentences with them.
2.Review the common verbs that take indirect objects.
3.Train the students’ integrating skills by reading and writing.
Teaching Important Points:
1.Improve the students’ reading ability by reading the material.
2.Improve the students’ writing ability.
Teaching Difficult Point:
How to improve the students’ integrating skills-reading skill and writing skill.
Teaching Methods:
1.Fast-reading and reading to improve the students’ reading ability.
2.Practice and pair work or group work to have every student master what they’ve learned.
Teaching Aids:
1.a tape recorder
2.the multimedia
3.the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step Ⅰ Greetings and Revision
(Greet the whole class as usual.)
T:Yesterday we learned the grammar-Direct and Indirect Objects.We know there are some verbs that can be followed by objects.Who can tell us what they are?
S1:They are “give,show,send,read,lend…”.
S2:And “make,buy,do,get…”.
T:Right.Sit down,please.We should also notice the usage of “to” and “for” when we interchange them.
Step Ⅱ Test
T:In this unit we have also learned some useful expressions.Have you remembered them?
S:Yes.
T:OK.Now let’s review them together.I speak Chinese,you speak English.
(Teacher writes the following on the blackboard when students say them.)
share with,treat…as,deal with,the ability to do,play a…role,realize one’s dream,get around,adjust to
T:Now I’ll give you a test to see whether you’ve mastered them or not.Look at the screen,please.
(Show the following on the screen.)
Complete the sentences using the expressions on the blackboard.
1.I__________my lunch__________(分享) him yesterday.
2.The police__________his death__________(把……看作) a case of murder.
3.How shall we__________(处理) the problem?
4.The boy has__________(有能力) solve the difficult problem.
5.The teacher__________(起重要作用) in teaching.
6.In order to__________(实现梦想),they worked day and night.
7.The policemen__________(四处走动) and tried to find the thief.
8.It will take you some time to__________(适应) the new surroundings.
Suggested answers:
1.shared,with 2.treated,as
3.deal with 4.the ability to
5.plays an important role 6.realize their dreams
7.got around 8.adjust to
Step Ⅲ Fast Reading
T:We’ve learned something about disabilities.They hope to lead a normal life as we do,so we should provide more opportunities for the disabled to develop their potential,and let them live a richer life and make a contribution to society.We should help them overcome the difficulties.
Today we’re going to read a material“The special Olympics”.Please turn to Page 55.Read the text fast and try to get the general idea.
Step Ⅳ Reading
T:Now read the text again.Read it carefully and discuss the following questions on the screen with your partner.Write your answers on a piece of paper.In a few minutes,I’ll ask some pairs to give us the answers.
(Teacher shows the following on the screen.)
Answer the following questions:
1.How often is the Special Olympics held?
2.Why do many Special Olympics athletes think that “taking part in the Games is a victory”?
3.How do events like the Special Olympics help mentally disabled people?
4.Where was the first Special Olympics held?
5.Why do you think the Special Olympics are becoming more popular?
6.When will the Special Olympics be held in Shanghai?
(The teacher goes among the students,joins in the students’ discussion and answers the students’ questions.)
(A few minutes later.)
T:Have you finished?(Ss:Yes.)Give us your answers,please.One student,one question.Any volunteer?
S1:1.Every two years.
S2:2.Because each athlete had to train for many years and overcome fear and hardship to reach the Games.For them,winning isn’t to be the first one across the finish line or scoring the most goals,but the best you can be.
S3:3.By preparing for and participating in the Special Olympics,mentally disabled children and adults can develop their ability to move,improve their health and gain greater self-confidence.The Special Olympics is also a good way to make friends.
S4:4.In Chicago.
S5:5.Because interest in the Special Olympics has spread across the world and many cities are now competing for the honour to host the event.
S6:6.In .
T:Now look at the screen again.I’ll explain some words and expressions of the text so that you can use them freely.Please listen to me carefully.
1.every two years=every second(other)year
e.g.He comes here every three days/every third day.
2.Athletes at the Special Olympics are fighters in more than one way.
e.g.The travel to Beijing is more than sightseeing.
He has more than twenty yuan with him.
3.fail vi. & vt.
e.g.I failed in persuading(to persuade)him.
Don’t fail to ring me up.
Time failed me to finish my talk.
4.consider +n./pron./doing
e.g.He is considering changing his job.
consider+sb.+(to be)+n./adj.
e.g.They considered themselves very important.
5.participate=take part vi.
e.g.I participated(took part)in the game.
6.compete in;compete in a race;compete for;compete with sb. for sth.
e.g.Cities in the world are now competing for the honour to host the Olympic Games.
T:Do you have anything else you don’t understand?If you have,please tell me.I’ll be glad to have a discussion with you.
(The teacher answers any questions asked by the students.)
Step Ⅴ Listening and Reading Aloud
T:Let’s listen to the tape.When I play it for the first time,just listen to it.When I play it for the second time,please listen and repeat.Then read the text aloud.Are you clear about it?
S:Yes.
(The teacher plays the tape for the students to listen.Then when the students read the text,the teacher goes among the students and corrects the students’ mistakes in pronunciation,intonation and stress.)
Step Ⅵ Practice
T:Now let’s do an exercise.You should do it like this:try to find useful expressions in the text and make sentences with them in groups of four.One student,one sentence.Do it by turns.Are you clear about it?
S:Yes.
(A few minutes later)
T:Now I’ll ask some students to make sentences.One sentence at a time.S1,please give us your sentence.
S1:I’ll make a sentence with the phrase“every four years”.
The Olympic Games is held every four years.
T:Please go on.
S2:fail to do
He failed to pass the English exam.
S3:more than
More than one person has made the suggestion.
S4:consider
We don’t consider Tom to be our best friend.
S5:take part/participate
All the students took part/participated in the sports meeting in our school.
S6:compete
He competed with other players for the champion.
Step Ⅶ Writing
T:Now you’ve known something about disabilities.I think many students will show their love to the disabled from now on.What should we do to help them in our daily life?
S7:If we are organizing an event,we must imagine that people with disabilities may want to come to it.So we must make sure that they can enter and use all parts of the building.
S8:When we design a building,we should provide an entrance suitable for wheelchairs on the ground floor,as well as lifts,suitable bathrooms and toilets.We must also make sure that signs are clear and easy to read.
S9:…
T:OK.It’s very kind of you!After class,please conduct a survey of the public places where you live in.Start with your school:how easy or difficult is it for a disabled person to get around?Visit other public buildings and find out if they are accessible or not.Work in pairs or groups and make a checklist for your survey.Use the results to write an essay.Describe the current situation and suggest ways to improve the situation.
Suggested writing:
After several days’ survey,I found that the government paid a little attention to the disabled and spend much money on new buildings.There is no special road for the blind.The buildings have many steps,and it’s difficult for the disabled to get into them.
A new government programme has been designed to help disabled people.More special schools will be built.Not only will help be given to people to find jobs,but also medical treatment will be provided for people who need it.But the truth is that everyone should take care of disabled people,not just the government.If everyone shows love to them,their life will be much better.
Step Ⅷ Summary and Homework
T:In this class,we’ve reviewed the useful expressions and learned the text“The Special Olympics”.We practise how to write the article on disabilities.After class,go over all the important points learnt in this unit,and write an essay.Prepare for next unit.Class is over.
Step Ⅸ The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard
Unit 17 Disabilities
The Fourth Period
Important Phrases:
share with,treat…as,deal with,the ability to do,play a…role,realize one’s dream,get around,adjust to
Step Ⅹ Record after Teaching
篇15：unit 2全单元教案2(人教版高二英语教案教学设计)
I. Brief Statements Based on the Unit
The activities of this unit, including Warming-up, Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing, center on the subject－news and the media, which are connected with our life closely. It provides the students an opportunity to learn the language in using it.
By talking about news and the media, the students get more knowledge about them－not only know about the important parts they play in learning about the world, but also the ways they are written and made. The students must be very interested in this subject. This way, they can learn the language points easily and freely. They will not only learn some useful words and phrases about news and the media, but also learn to express opinions.
Besides, the study of the Grammar－the Past Participle can help the students use the language more exactly. By finishing each task provided in the textbook and the workbook, the students' skills to use language can be well developed.
Ⅱ. Teaching Goals
1. Talk about news and the media.
2. Practise expressing opinions.
3. Learn about the Past Participle (1): used as Attribute and Predicative.
4. Write a comparison paragraph.
Ⅲ. Teaching Time: Four periods
IV. Background Information
1. RADIO
In ancient times the only way that men could send messages from village to village was on foot. When men learned to use the horse, communication became much quicker. However, compared to the modern world communication was still quite slow. Many parts of the world had no knowledge of events in other places. Later, the post was introduced and horse riders carried letters. This meant that communication was further improved. Horses drawn coaches could move people from town to town in quite a comfortable way. At the beginning of the last century the steam train was invented and for the first time really fast communication became possible. Not only could letters be sent easily from one part of a country to another, but travel was made easy, too. At about the same time, steam ships helped communication between countries.
The invention of the telegraph in the middle of the last century further increased the speed at which messages could be sent. In this system electrical signals, in code, are sent along metal wires. These signals travel so fast that they could go nearly eight times round the world in one second. A special device is needed to send the code. At the other end another device is used in order to receive the code. By this method messages can be sent over distances of several hundred kilometres. With the invention of the telephone the human voice could be sent over long distances. Because of this the telephone system replaced the telegraph for quick communication over long distances. The telegraph is still used, however, by newspapers in order to send news and for other purposes too.
At the beginning of this century radio was invented and in a few years communication was again improved. The main difference between radio and telephone is that radio uses no electrical signals which travel long distances along wires. Instead invisible waves, moving at the same speed as electrical signals, are used. A few years ago there were not many radio stations in the world. Today there are many hundreds of radio stations broadcasting in different languages and in all countries. The invisible radio waves can easily travel from one country to another. This means that listeners in one country can listen to programmes broadcast from another country. In this way information travels from country to country. Radio is often used by policemen to communicate with one another. In addition, police forces in one country can communicate with those in other countries in order to catch criminals. Ships at sea use radio so that they know exactly where they are. Aeroplanes use radio for the same reason and this makes it easier for them to find their way from place to place.
In the modern world there are many methods of communication. As well as radio there is television, for example. This enables information in the form of a picture to be broadcast from one place to another. Radio is often used as part of a telegraph system where distances are very large. Of the many modern methods of communication, radio probably remains the most important.
2. How the Program Is Broadcast?
We turn on the radio and a program comes to us from a broadcasting station miles and miles away. We know that words and music themselves haven’t traveled all that distance through space, but something certainly is bringing the program from the station. What is this silent carrier?
The answer is radio waves. We can not see radio waves or feel them or even hear them. In fact, nobody knows exactly what they are. But we do know that they are made by electricity, and we have learned how to use them.
At the broadcasting station people talk or sing, instruments (乐器) play, doors slam(砰) ,and all of these make sound waves. The sound waves reach the microphone, and here they are changed into electricity. Then from a tall tower called the broadcasting aerial (天线) ,electricity sends radio waves. The waves travel in every direction, and some of them reach our radio aerial. Now a wonderful thing happens. The radio waves start an electricity current (电流) in our aerial like the one that was first made in the broadcasting station. Finally, the loudspeaker in our set changes electricity into sound, and we hear the program.
The First Period
Teaching Aims:
1. Learn and master the following words and phrases:
media, reliable, fire, face, difficulty, elect, go up, burn down, injure
2. Practise expressing opinion using the following:
What do you think of…?
What's your opinion?
Why do you choose…?
Perhaps…is more important.
I would rather choose.…
I don't think we should choose…
Maybe it would be better to choose…
Our readers want to know about…
3. Talk about news and the media.
4. Train the students' listening and speaking abilities.
Teaching Important Points:
1. Master the useful words and expressions appearing in this period.
2. Train the students' listening and speaking abilities by talking about news and the media.
Teaching Difficult Points:
1. How to help the students understand the listening material exactly.
2. How to help the students finish the task of speaking.
Teaching Methods:
1. Listening-and-answering activity to help the students go through the listening material.
2. Individual, pair or group work to make the students finish each task.
Teaching Aids:
1. a tape recorder
2. a projector
3. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step I Greetings and Lead-in
T: Good morning/afternoon, class.
Ss: Good morning/afternoon, Miss/ Mr. X.
T: Sit down, please. Being the members of the society, we all cares for/about what happens around us or even what happens at home and abroad. How can you do so?
Ss: By reading newspapers and magazines, watching TV programmes, listening to the radio.
T: Are there any other ways? Think it over.
Ss: By a website.
T: Yes. It’s also a way to learn about the world. What do you call these things which help us know about to the world?
Ss:新闻媒体
T: In English, we call it news media. Today we'll begin to learn Unit 2 News media (Bb: Unit 2 News media). First, let's learn the new words in this period. Look at the screen.
(Teacher first asks some students to read the words on the screen. Correct the Ss' mistakes in prononciation. Then teacher gives brief explanations. At last, let the Ss read and remember them for a while.)
Step Ⅱ Warming up
T: Well, now please open your books at Page 9. Warming up first. Look at each of the pictures and tell me which kind of news media it shows?
Ss: The first picture shows a website; the second one shows radio; the third one shows TV programmes; the fourth one shows magazines; the fifth one shows newspapers.
T: Quite right! Now, please work in groups of four and discuss the five questions below the pictures. A few minutes later, I’ll cotleet your answers. OK?
Ss: OK.
T: You can begin now.
(A few minutes later. )
T: Are you ready now?
Ss: Yes.
T: Which group would like to talk about the first question? Choose one member of your group to answer the question.
S1: I think TV is the most reliable among the news media. TV consists of a series of lively consecutive pictures. For the people who want to know what is exactly happening, a picture responds better to offer the truth of a fact than the mere words upon a page. It can offer an unique function of seemingly on-the-spot feeling, which is not available to the other media.
T: The second question?
S2. I think TV programmes are easy for most people to understand. Radio, can only be heard and sometimes can’t be picked up clearly. Newspapers and magazines are only useful for people who can read. Websites have many different pages, but you should be careful to read some of the pages. who can read. Website have many different pages, but you should be careful to read some of the pages.
T: The third question?
S3 : I will check other sources.
T: The fourth question?
S4: Every morning, the newspaper chief editor and the journalists discuss the main events of the day. Reporters are then sent to cover the events. They usually do some interviews and then check the information. They must work very fast. Later in the day, everything is put together at the news desk. Then the editors read the stories and make any necessary changes and choose a good title for each story. At last, they print them quickly and deliver them. Making a magazine is more or less the same as making a newspaper. But the articles in a magazine are more like stories, which are written by all kinds of writers. Magazines are not published as quickly as newspapers.
T: The last question?
Ss: News broadcast, newspaper, magazine, radio programme, website, report, reporter, editor, interview, write articles…
Step Ⅲ Listening
T: Next, let's come to the Listening. We are going to listen to two parts of conversations. The first part is an interview; the second part is a dialogue. Now, look at Exercise 1: Listen carefully to what is said and tick the information you hear in each part. If necessary, I'll play it twice. (Teacher begins to play the tape, and checks the answers after listening. Then ask the students to finish the rest of the tasks. )
T: OK. Now, please listen to each part once again and then work in pairs to talk about the questions in Exercises 2,3,4 and 5. Are you clear?
Ss: Yes.
(Teacher allows them enough time to talk about the questions. Then ask some students to say their answers.)
Step IV Speaking
T: Well, now it's time for us to be the editors of a newspaper. Here is a list of ten things that happened today. Look at the screen. (Teacher shows the screen and read through the list to the whole class.)
200 people died in an earthquake in Turkey.
China beat Brazil 5-1 in football.
France elected a new President.
Three children from your city were killed.
Someone robbed a bank in Shanghai.
Food prices are going up.
A house in your town burned down. Nobody was injured.
2 000 people in your city were happy today and moved into new buildings.
A Chinese scientist has invented a new car engine that does not pollute the air.
There is a rumour that a large company wants to build a factory in your town:
(Bb :go up, burn down)
T: Now, you've known the ten things, but you only need to report five of them. So, first decide which events you are going to put in your newspaper. Then give reasons for your choices and compare with your classmates. Work in groups of four or five. And the following expressions on the screen can help you with your dialogue. After a while, I'll ask some of you to act out your dialogue.
(Teacher shows the screen. )
What do you think of'…?
I would rather choose.…
What's your opinion?
I don't think we should choose…
Why do you choose…
Maybe it would be better to choose…
Perhaps… is more important.
Our readers want to know about….
(Teacher goes around the Ss and checks their work. If necessary, teacher may join in them. ) Sample dialogue:
A: Hello! How is everything going? Have you finished your work?
B: I'm very busy today. I've chosen five events among ten things that happened today to report in our newspaper. But I'm not sure whether I made the best choices. I need your advice.
C: Tell us more about your choices.
B: The first event I chose is “France elected a new President”. It is an important event these days. I think it may have a great effect on international affairs. The second is “There is a rumour that a large company wants to build a factory in our town.” What is your opinion?
A: I agree with your first choice, but why do you choose the second one? We should report something true to our readers, not rumours. Maybe it would be better to choose “A Chinese scientist has invented a new car engine that does not pollute the air.” It shows our country's science advancement.
B: Good idea. Then I'd rather choose “2 000 people in our city were happy today and moved into new buildings. “ and” China beat Brazil 5-1 in football. “They are both exciting news. They also reflect the improvement of people's life and the achievement in sports.
D: I think you made a good choice. What about the fifth one? Have you decided yet?
B: I think two events are suitable. I really don't know which is more important. It is hard to choose. They are “Food prices are going up. “ and ”200 people died in an earthquake in Turkey.”
D: Perhaps the former is more important. Our readers want to know more about their life. And this thing is related to everybody's life.
B: It sound reasonable. Let's think them over. Thank you for your advice.
Step V Summary and Homework
T: Up to now, we've talked a lot about news media. By listening and speaking, we've become more familiar with news media. At the same time, we've learnt some useful words and phrases. You should remember them and practise using them freely and exactly. After class, please collect more information about news media and talk about them with your classmates. Besides, don't forget to preview the contents of the next period. So much for today. See you tomorrow V
Ss: See you tomorrow.
Step VI The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard
Unit 2 News media
The First Period
I : Five news media
website, radio, TV programme, magazine, newspaper
Ⅱ. Useful words and phrases
words., reliable, fire, face, difficulty, elect, injure
phrases., go up, burn down
Step Ⅶ Record after Teaching
篇16：高二英语教案学案一体化 unit 3(人教版高二英语上册教案教学设计)
教学目的和要求
课程标准要求掌握的项目
目
标 1．Talking about and architecture
2．Talking about architects and their works
3．Talking about works ofaIt
4．Talking about preferences
词
汇
architecture architect preference design furniture taste sofa honey modem convenient block apartment style old-styled stand passage ugly construct construction steelconcrete impress roof balcony fantastic create seashell sail stadium net nest belong
paint aside rent development
功
能
句
式
偏爱(Preference)
I'd rather… I wouldn't feel happy if…
I prefer something that．．． I’m much more interested in…
I'm not very interested in… I like seeing something．．．
In my opinion… I don't get very excited about…
What I like is… I really prefer…
If Vou ask me．then… I Can't stand…
语
法
过去分词(短语)作宾语补足语
We noticed the mailbag carried onto the train．
Everyone was surprised t0 see the buildings∥nished so soon．
Please keep me informed oj how things are going．
They weFe happy to hear the work alrea匆如.
课文听力
S:Can I help you? what is it you are looking for? Furniture
for the bedroom, the kitchen or the living room?
D: We're looking for a fewthings, but we aren't very sure yet. We bought a new flat, and we already have some furniture, but the new house is so big. We can use a few more things, and perhaps replace some very old pieces.
A: I think we need a kitchen table, one that is large enough to have dinner with five or six people.
S: Very well. Ifyou would like something modern, I suggest you think of something like this. The legs of the table are silver coloured while the table top is made of thick glass. Very beautiful and very easy to clean.
D: Yes, I really like that.
A: No. 1 don't like such cold and hard things. I think a table made of wood would look much nicer. Wood is warm, and makes you feel comfortable.
D: Honey, I knowyou like that, but I'm afraid it'll be too expensive.
S: That's no problem. I can show you some really nice modern tables that look as if they were made of wood.
A: Great! We are also looking for something on the wall. There's a big piece of white wall over the sofa.
S: Were you thinking of a painting or perhaps a poster or something ...
D: Yes. Could you show us something?
S: Something classical?
A: Oh, no. You can show us something modern. I like classical things in the kitchen and the bedroom, but our living room is quite modern, isn't it, Danny?
D: By the way, we are also still looking for two comfortable chairs, something modern and classic at the same time. Would you have anything like that?
S: Oh dear! Oh dear! What do you mean by that?
A: Well, something classic and fine but also cool, you know.
Answers to Exercise 1:
kitchen table, wooden tables
Answers to Exercise 2:
True: 4, 5
Answers to Exercise 3:
1 things, replace, pieces 2 wood, would
3 warm, comfortable 4 wall, sofa
5 something moderm
课后听力
The history of architecture in China and most European countries is very different. As a result, the way people look at art and architecture has also developed along different lines.
Much of China's ancient architecture was constructed of wood. Only the Great Wall and city walls were made of large bricks. Earthquakes have occurred quite often in China's history. Besides that, many temples were destroyed by fire. Sometimes the fires were caused by accident. However, it also happened that emperors would destroy temples and architecture that were built in the past. They wanted to get rid of all architecture that reminded people of the former emperor. After burning the old temples and palaces, the emperor would have everything built new in the style that he preferred. That's why all over China we find many temples that were
rebuilt or restored about 250 to 300 years ago, during the age of Qianlong. Few temples are left over from earlier times.
Much of Europe's ancient architecture is 300 to 1,000 years old. Architects used natural materials, such as stone and brick to construct their buildings. There weren't many earthquakes, and unlike China, European kings would usually not bum the churches and other architecture built before their time. They constructed new buildings in the style they preferred at other places.
Wood is not a very strong material. Weather conditions make repairs necessary and by the end of about-100 years usually every part of a wooden construction has been replaced. So, although the design can be hundreds of years old, every part of the building may have been made less than a hundred years ago. Stone and brick are strong enough to stand the test of time. These materials do not need to be replaced. So when looking at old buildings in Europe, we are actually looking at what was built many centuries ago. While in China the architecture may be old, what we look at is in fact quite new.
语篇领悟
阅读本单元课文，完成下列各题
(Passage 1 )
1. Why did architects in the 1920's want their buildings un-natural?
A. They didn't like traditional architecture style.
B. They wanted to change people's feelings of beauty.
C. They didn't like building materials such as earth,stone, brick and wood.
D. They like buildings materials such as steel, glass and concrete.
2. In what ways is ancient architecture different from mod-ern architecture?
A. materials, shapes B. roofs, corners
C. size, height D. balconies, windows
3. Which of the following belongs to modern architecture?
A. Taihe Dian.
B. The Temple of Heaven.
C. The Opera House is Sydney.
D. The great European Cathedrals.
(Passage 2)
4. Old buildings are pulled down because
A. they are too small
B. they are too old
C. they are of no use any more
D. people don't like them any more
5. Factory 798 was designed by
A. Germans B. Russians
C. Germans and Russians D. Chinese and Russians
6. Which is NoT the benefit for people working in an old
factory building?
A. The rent is low.
B. It is convenient for artists to make large objects.
C. It is fairly quiet there.
D. People can visit there.
主旨大意
7.Which of the following best expresses the main idea of Passage 1 ?
A. Ancient architecture is popular.
B. Modern architecture is popular.
C. Ancient buildings look more beautiful than modern ones.
D. Different times,different styles of architecture.
8. Which of the following best expresses the main idea of Passag2?
A. Factory 798 is of great value in modern times.
B. People should save architecture from the past.
C. People should build more factories like Factory 798.
D. People shouldn't pull down old buildings.
推理判断
9．From Passage 1 we can infer that
A. the writer prefers ancient buildings to modern ones
B. the writer prefers traditional materials to modern ones
C. the writer doesn't like modern architects at all
D. the writer prefers buildings which look nature that look unnature.
10. From Passage 2 we can infer that
A. Factory 798 was out of use for long
B. people rent Factory 798 because of his German building style
C. in many large cities, people build many factories like factory 798
D. old buildings can be only used as art centres
知识点
1． prefer喜欢；偏好；宁愿(后接名词或代词、不定式、动名词、不定式复合结构、接从句)
Which would you prefer , tea or coffee?
茶和咖啡你喜欢哪一种?
I prefer coffee．我更喜欢咖啡。
Jeffenson preferred to go and see in the people．
杰斐逊喜欢到人民中间去调查走访。
Our families preferred going out west to celebrate
American 200 birthday．
我们全家人宁愿去西部旅行庆祝美国200周年庆典。
I prefer you to stay here with me．
我愿意让你和我一起住在这儿。
I prefer that you can phone me as soon as you arrive at your home．
我更愿意你一到家就给我打电话。
l prefer science to languages．
我喜欢理科而不喜欢文科。
I prefer reading to watching TV．
与看电视相比我更喜欢阅读。
He preferred to die rather than give in． 他宁死不屈 =Rather than give in，he preferred to die．
[考题1] (1)Rather than on a crowded bus,
he always prefers _____ bicyele．(全国高考题)
A．ride：ride B．riding；ride
C．ride；to ride D．t0 ride；riding
[解析] 分析句子结构可知，本题考查prefer to do sth．rather than do sth．的句型用法.该结构中可以将rather than do sth．提前至句首以予强调。[答案] C
(2)一Which would you prefer ，tea 0r coffee?
I'm not thirsty．Thanks anyway．
A．better；Neither B．best；Both
C．more；None D．不填；Neinler
[解析]prefer的含义为like doing sth else better，释义中已含有比较级的意味，因此在实际运用中，不再与比较或最高级连用；从答语的“不口渴”，可知，无论是茶还是咖啡，都不想品尝，因此否定两者用neither，而用来否定三者或以上的副词要用none。[答案] D
2．impress压出印记；印上；给……留下印象；强调
He impressed the pot with his seal．
他把他的印记印在罐子上.
The book didnt’impress me at a11．
这本书没有给我留下一点印象。
She impressed me as being very rude．
她给我的印象是十分粗鲁。
He impressed me with the importance of the work．
他让我明白了工作的重要性。
His first speech as president made a strong impression on his audience．他当主席后的第一次演讲给听众留下了深刻的印象。
[考题2] (1)The speech by the mayor of Shanghaii before the final
voting for EXPO 20lO is strongly impressed my memory．
A．t0 B．over C．by D．0n (上海春季高考题)
[解析] 句意表示“上海市的市长为争取世博会的演讲给我留下了极为深刻的印象.”所缺介词与impress组成“给……留下印象”讲，介词用on，为习惯表达。[答案] D
(2)He--a design on cloth．。
A．pressed B．impressed C．put D．placed
[解析] 句意表示“把设计图案印制在布上”，而press表示“按，压”不合题意。C、D两项只表示“放置”，也不合题意.[答案] B
3． creation J1．创造
creature n．生命；生物
Man creates himself.人类创造了他本身。
Shakespeare created many comic characters．
莎士比亚创造了许多喜剧人物。
That would create a wrong impression．
那会造成一个错误的印象。
Her new dress created much excitement．
她的新衣引起了极大兴奋。
[考题3] It is the people who history
A．create B．invent C．discover D．find
[解析] 易排除c、D两项，因为本题不是考查“找寻”的用法，而是考查“创造”。create指从无到有，从粗糙的原料到完美的产品，既可用于具体事物，也可用于抽象的事物；invent指经过研究，实验等手段设计或创造出前所未有的东西，常用于具体的东西。本句话的含义为“创造历史的正是人民大众。”[答案]A
4．fill up填写；斟满；占掉(时间)；淤积
I want you to fill up this form.我要你填这张表。
Fill up the cask with hot water． 请把热水瓶灌满开水。
I filled the room up with furniture. 我把房间装满家具。
The theatre filled up rapidly．剧院很快坐满人。
Ihe gutter has filled up with mud． 沟槽里都是泥。
[考题4]Seeing her lovely daughter running towards her，the young mothers heart tenderness and happiness．
A．was filled 0f B．Was full with
C．Was filled with D．was full by
[解析] 本题考查“充满”的表达，除了用be filled with外，还可以用be full 0f。因为均是习语，所以不可更改两个词组的任何部分。
[答案] C
5.stick贴、粘；插、扎；卡住、陷在……里；伸出；突出，n．棍 子 .手杖
stick to坚持(真理、作法等)；坚持干(某事)
He stuck a needle in my arm． 他把针扎进我的胳膊里。
The key has stuck in the lock．钥匙卡在锁里了。
I stick to what I said/the truth.我坚持我所说的／真理。
[考题5]He had a great idea that one should whatever one had begun．
A．insist on B．stick to C．stick out D．stick with
[解析] 本题既考查了insist on与同义词sitck to的区别，又兼顾了stick out／with的用法。insist on后一般接v一ing形式，表示“坚持做某事”，很少直接接名词或从句。stick out意为“伸出；坚持到底(vi)”，stick with意为“和……在一起；扎／刺”，二者均不符合题意。 [答案]B
6．set aside存储；放在一边；取消(=put away)
Each week he tried to set aside a few dollars 0f his salary．
每周他尽量从薪水中省下几块钱。
My objections were set aside．
我的反对无人理会。
Peter set aside the papers and reached for his cigarettes and matehes．彼得把文件放在一边拿起了火柴。
[考题6] It is wise to have some money for old age．
A．put away B．kept up
C．given away D．1aid out (全国高考题)
[解析] 本题测试具体语境中动词的运用问题。keep up有“保
持下去”之意，give away表示“免费赠送；分发”，lay out表示“花费，使用”，均不符合语境体现出来的“为年老而存钱”。[答案]A
7．share分享；分担；合用；共同具有 n.一份；一份责任、功劳；股票
We need friends to share happiness and sorrow．
我们需要朋友分享幸福，分担悲伤，。
Those chestnuts smeⅡgood．Let’s share them．
那些栗子闻起来真香，咱们一起吃咆。
Everyone in the house shares the bathroom．
这所房子的人合用一个浴室。
We all take an equal share．
我们都分到了均等的一份。
[考题7]Let Harry play with your toys as well，Clare - you must learn to ．
A．support B．care C．spare D．share (高考题)
[解析] support表示“支持；阐述；赡养”，care表示“关怀；在乎”，spare表示“抽出，均出”，均不符合语境所体现的“克劳尔，让亨利一起同你分享玩具玩”。本题考查从具体语境中选择词汇的用法。[答案] D
8．taste的用法
作名词讲时。有“味道；爱好；鉴赏力，品味”等意。
作形容词讲时，有“有吸引力的；经精心挑选”的意思。
作动词讲时，有“尝，品尝”之意。
I don't 1ike the taste 0fthis coffee．
我不喜欢这杯咖啡的味道。
She has developed a taste for modern art．
她渐渐培养出对现代艺术的爱好。
The fumiture Was very tasteful．
家具十分雅致。
Can I taste a piece 0f that cheese t0 see what it’slike?
我可以尝一尝那块干酪的味道吗?
引申：(be)in bad taste指举止言谈粗俗；失当。
Some 0f his comments were in bad taste．
Tasteless akj.庸俗；没味道；不得体
Tasty adj.(tastier，tastiest)美味
have a taste 0f sth．有……的味道
The pudding has a taste 0foranges．那布丁带有橙味
[考题8](1)The oranges taste ________
A．well B．good C．badly D．wonderfully
[解析】 “尝起来”，taste后应跟形容词作表语。[答案] B
(2)Pop music is liked by many poople,but it is not_____everyone's taste．
A．with B．in C．on D．to
[解析] “适合某人的口味”应为短语to one's taste。[答案] D
(3)The cook______the soup．It_______delicious．
A．tasted；tasted B．is tasted；is tasted
C．tasted；was tasted D．i8 tasted；tastes
[解析] 分析句子结构及用法可知，第一空测试taste作为实义动词的用法，含义为“品尝（某食物）”，是个及物动词；第二空因为有句未形容词delicious ，所以taste此时“摇身一变”，变成了连系动词，表示“尝起来”，后接形容词作表语，无被动式。
9．convenient adj．方便。便利的
I’m willing to meet you on any day that is convenient for you．
我乐意在你方便的任何日期与你相见。
[考题9] Come over and have a chat witlI me whenever_______ ．
A．you will be convenient B．it wiU be convenient to you
C．you are convenient D．it is convenient to you
[解析] It is+adj.for sb．／sth．to do sth．为固定词组。类似于
convenient用法的还有necessary、national、important、impossible等等，这些形容词都是用来说明做某些事的特点，因而不可用人作主语，而应用于上述句型当中。[答案]D
10．复合形容词的构成
(1)数词+名词，数词+名词-ed或数词+名词+单数+形容词
a ten-speed bieyele 十速自行车
(2)形容词+名词
a full-timejob 专职工作
(3)名词+现在分词
Englingh-speaking countries 讲英语的国家
(4)形容词+现在分词
an ordinary-looking girl. 相貌一般的女孩
(5)名词+过去分词
a man-made satellite 人造卫星
(6)副词+现在分词
hard-working people 勤劳的人们
(7)副词+过去分词
a well-known doctor 著名医生
[考题10](1)The village is far away from here indeed．It’s_____
walk．
A．a four hour B．a four hour’s
c．a four-hours D．a four hours’(上海高考题)
[解析] “四小时的路程”有两种表达：a four hours’walk和a
four-hour walk。[答案]D
(2)His job is t0 sell the______carvings(雕)in the______ department 0f the company(湖北省部分重点中学联考题)
A．Wooden； sales B．wood；sales
C．Wood；sale D．wooden；sale
[解析]在Wood与carve之间存在动宾关系：所以形成构词法时，用“名词+ V．-ing'’形式，即wood carving；表示“销售”时。作定语要用sales。[答案] B
11．表示“忍受”的三个词(组)
它们是stand、bear与put up with。
He cannot titand criticism．他受不了批评。
It will stand firing up to 1300℃．它可以经受住高达1300度的度。
If I were you I wonldn't put up with his behaviour any 1onger．
如果我是你，我将再也忍受不了他的行为。
I can't bear the pain／my brother／this weather．
我受不了这苦痛／我的弟弟／这种天气。
[考题11] --Mum，it is nice weather．I want to skate this afternoon．(--20海淀区期中练习题)
--Don't you think the ice on the lake is too thin to____your weight?
A．stand B．bear C．catch D．take
[解析] 儿子想去滑冰，母亲担心冰层太薄，承受不住儿子的重量。所缺词表示“承担；承受……重量／负彬东西”等，应用bear。
stand常用于人，指面对痛苦、艰难、侮辱等不畏缩后退，bear指能忍受磨难、冷静地面对现实，强调容忍的能力，常用于口语，常可与put up will连用。[答案] B
12．表示“瞟；望”的三个词组
(1)glance，指“很快地望一望，看一眼”，多与at连用。
He glanced at tlle envelope and reeognized his ather’s handwriting．
他看了一下信封就认出来了他父亲的笔迹。
I glanced around／abou∥round the room．
我向屋子里四处看了看。
(2)stare表示目不转晴地长时间的“注视”；
(3)glare表示怒气冲冲地“盯着”，二者一般都与at连用。
The two fighters glared at eaeh other．
两位斗士恶狠狠地盯着对方。
Robinson stared at the footprints．full 0f fear．
鲁滨逊盯着脚印看，心里充满了恐惧。
[考题12](1)一Do you like________in public?
一I don't think so．It makes me nervous．
A．to be glared B．being stared
C．to be 100ked D．being stared at
[解析] 表示“盯、看”时，后一般要接介词at，所以A、B项排除。c项中的1ook为不及物动词，本身就没有被动式，也被排除。句意为“你喜欢在大庭广众之下被人盯着看吗?”[答案]D
(2)The two men stood____angrily at each other，while the crowd
loeked on with amusement．
A．staring B．daring C．dancing D．seeing
[解析] 三个同义词中，只有glare可以与表示感情的词连用。本题中含有angrily，所以用glare。[答案]B
13．如何“举例子”
take．．．for example举……为一个例子
for example(=for instance)例如
Such as(=like)比如／诸如
and so on等等(进行概括，不一一列举)
Chadie’s early films，such as(=like)City Lights，are well received．
Take Xiao Wang(for example)．举小王为例。
=Take Xiao Wang(for instanee)．
[考题13] There are several people interested in your new plan，
__________Mr Jones and Dr Simpson．
A．that is B．for an example C．1ike D．included
[解析]that is作插入语，含义为“也就是说”，不用来举例子；for example是习惯用法，中间的an因为习惯而要省略；include含义为“包含”，也不用来举例，用来表示附加说明，而且放在名词前面时要用including，放在名词后面时才用included。[答案] c
14．1ook at与1ook after的次常见含义
look at (1)（彻底）检查 (2)考虑，研究
(3) 认为 (4)读；阅读
My tooth aches，I think a dentist shotlld 1ook at it．
我牙痛，想找牙医检查一下。
The government is looking at ways of reducing the number of stray dogs．
政府正研究减少野狗数目的方法。
Different races and nation-alities 1ook at life differendIy．
不同种族和国籍的人对生命都有不同的看法。
look after负责某事物
our neighbours are looking after the garden while
we are away
我们不在家的时候，由邻居照料花园。
[考题14](1)r11le old woman's son_______all her financial affairs．
A．does with B．10eks after C．100ks at D．deals with
[解析]look after有“料理，照料”的意思。题目意思为“这位老妇人的所有财务都由她的儿子打理。”[答案] B
(2)一I felt very bad these days．
-0h，you should_______your body．
A．build up B．1ook at C．think D．take care
[解析]依题意，可知1ook at符合题意，在句中表示“彻底检查”之意。若选D项则加0f。若用build one's body则表示“强身健体”，也不完全符合题意。[答案] B
15．句型A is to B what C is to D的用法
这个句型是用来打比喻的，用已知来比喻未知。它的主句是作者要告诉读者的语义重点(新信息)，而what从句只不过是读者已知的内容(道理)而已。what在这种句型中是关系代词，在语义上相当于that which(the thing which)。what从句在主句中起表语(主语补语)的作用，what在句中也起表语(主语补语)的作用。
The Chinese Communist Parst is to people what fish is to water．
中国共产党对于人民就像鱼对于水
[考题15] Reading is to the mind_______food is to the body．
A．what B．that C．which D．of which (大学生竞赛题)
[解析] 句意为“读书之于头脑正如食物之于身体。”What food is to the body这个从句表达的是读者已知、熟悉的内容，而reading is to the mind才是全句的语义重点。又如：
Furniture is to the living room what playground equipment is to the playground．
家具对于卧室就像体育设施对于操场。[答案]A
16．“充当”的三种表达
act as作“充当；起……作用”。类似用法有 work as．serve as . .
He acted as chairman in my absence．
我不在时，他临时充当主席。
He acted as secretary to the Board．
他担任董事会的秘书一职。
He will serve as mayor．他将任市长一职。
The sofa served as a bed．那张沙发作为床用。
[考题16]_____monitor of our class，little Mike decided to
_____his classmates heart and soul．
A．Serving as；serve B．Serving as；serve as
C．Serving；serve as D．Serving；serve
[解析] 本题要求区别serve与serve as的用法。前者为“为……服务”，后者为“作为…’’。从语境可知，第一空符合后者，第二空符合前者。
[答案]A
17．“不顾”的两种表达
despite作介词，意为“尽管(有某种情况)”。In spite of与其意义及用法完全相同，可以互换。
He came to the meeting despite his serious illness．
尽管他的病很严重，他还是来出席会议了。
Despite advanced years-he is 1earning t0 drive．
尽管有一大把年纪了，他还是开始学起开车来。
In spite of the heavy rain．she went to school as usual．
尽管有大雨，她还像往常一样上学。
[考题17]一You 1ook upset．Anything wrong?
一I failed in the physics exam again___all the efforts I made．
A．in spite of B．because of
C．but for D．as to (20武汉市供题训练题)
[解析] 答语前半句意为“我的物理考试又失败了”，后半句意为
“我作了全部努力”，两句之间存在着让步关系，所以填表示该关系的in spite of，相当于despite。而because of所表示的含义与情理不符，but for引导虚拟语气，也不合题意。As to表示“至于，关于”，被排除。[答案]A
18．“连接”的两种表达
(1)join to作“把……和……连接在一起”。
He joined the two pieces of wood with nails．‘
他用钉子把那两块木板钉起来。
The worker are joining an island to the mainland by a bridge．
工人们正在架桥把一个小岛与大陆连起来。
(2)同义词组为connect…with，强调用中间媒介或一定的手段把两个或多个物体在某一点上连接起来，但彼此较为独立。
Buses and trucks connect the mountain villages with the outside．
公汽与卡车把山村和外界连起来了。
[考题18] (1)A good student must_____what he reads_______what he sees around him．
A．connect；to B．join；to
C．connect；with D．join；with
[解析]本题测试了“把……与……连接起来”的表达，看起来B项与C项均可，但本题并未强调外形结合及连接后的独立性(join的用法)，而是强调“关联；联系”：一个善于学习的学生应该把所学的知识与所见所闻联系起来。答案为C。
(2)Countries all over the world are______with computer．
A．joined B．connected C．taken D．related
[解析] join与relate均与介词to连用。只有be connected with才为正确表达。表示“由……连接”。[答案] B
19．“make+宾语+宾语补足语”的用法
这个结构中的宾语补足语可以用名词、形容词、动词的过去分词、不定式、副词等表示宾语的情况或动作。make带不定式作宾语补足语时，要省略不定式符号，但当make用于被动语态时，不定式符号不能省略。
The Americans elected Bush their President．
美国人民选布什为他们的总统。
We wi11 make our country richer and stronger．
我们将会使我们的国家变得更富强。
He tried to speak clearly to make himself understood．
他尽量说得清楚些以使别人听懂他的话。
Don't make him drink too much．
别让他喝得太多。
[考题19] (1)Little Tom doesn't have to be made_____．He always works hard． (全国高考题)
A．1earn B．to learn C．1earning D．1earned
[解析] 从to be made可知，被动语态中表示动作的不定式符号要恢复。[答案] B
(2)He is made_______monitor of our class．
A．a B．the C．one D．不填
[解析]在”make+宾语+宾补”句型中，如果作宾补的名词是表示独一无二的职位时，该名词前不再加任何冠词；。否则会产生误解与歧义。[答案] D
20．含set的词组小结
set about开始(某工作)；着手做某事
set aside把……放在一边，存储
set down写／记下来(指车辆)停下来让(乘客)下车
set free释放
set off开始，启程
set out从某地出发上路
set up使某人健康／有钱创业等；设置；建立
They've set off on ajourney round the world．
他们已经开始环游世界。
The government has set up a working party to 1ook into the problem of drug abuse．
政府已成立工作组调查滥用毒品问题。
[考题20] (1)The company has______a new braneh in wales．
A．took up B．changed C．set up D．set out
[解析]A选项通常指“从事”，如“take up doing sth.”而B、D两项与句意不符。[答案] C
(2)It is time for supper now．Please______your books aside so that.we can use the table for supper．
A．take B bring C．set D．carry
[解析]set．．．aside表示“把……放在一边，收起来”，符合语境“把书收起来以便吃晚饭”。[答案] c
21．过去分词作宾语补足语的学习
(1)在某些动词如make，have，get，find，keep，leave或某些介词(如with)等感觉动词等后面往往可以带上宾语及宾语补足语(对宾语进行进一步补充、说明、修饰、限定)形式。充当宾语补足语的重要部分之一是过去分词，用来表示该动作的被动与完成。
I found a dog killed on the road．
我发现一只狗被碾死在路上。
He left his work unfinished．
他走了，工作未完成。
Please get the report typed as soon as possible．
请尽快地把报告打印出来。
(2)have sth．done的三重含义：
①请叫／让别人(替自己)做某事
I had my hair cut yesterday．昨天我理发了。
②使某事(被人或自己)完成
He had his house repaired．他把房子修了一下。
③(别人)使(宾语)遭受(意外、不好的)某事
I had my wallet stolen．我的钱包被偷了。
I had my leg broken．我的腿摔断了。
[考题21](1)一Cood morning．Can I help you?
-I’d Iike to have this package_____，madam．
A．be weiglIed B to be weiglled
C．to weigh D．weished (全国高考题)
[解析] 这是顾客与营业员之间的对话。顾客要把包裹给营业员称量一下，符合have sth．done的用法。[答案] D
(2)Having passed all the tests，she felt a great weight____off her mind．(山东潍坊题)
A．taking B．taken c．take D．to be taken
[解析]从结构可知，本题测试“动词+宾语+宾补”的用法中不同形式作宾补的区别：不定式表未来的动作， V．-ing表示正在进行的动作，过去分词表示完成、被动的动作。从本题语境看，通过考试后，她精神上的负担也被卸下了，因此要用过去分词作宾语补足语。[答案]B
(3) Ihe murderer was bfought in，with his hands___behind．
A．tied B．tying c．to tie D．being tied
(全国高考题)
[解析]从句中含有with可知，本题测试with后面的宾语补足语的形式问题。从tie与hand之间存在动宾关系可知，此处宾语补足语要用过去分词形式。[答案]A ’
22．I must say I'd rather live in a traditional siheyuan．我想我 宁愿住在传统的四合院里。
(1)would rather后跟不带to的不定式，即动词原形，常用缩写式’d rather。
一How about a drink?喝一杯怎么样?
一I'd rather have something to eat．我宁愿来点儿吃的。
(2)would rather的否定式是在would rather后加否定词not，即would rather not do sth．
eg：I would rather not go out tonight，if you don't mind．
如果你不介意的话，今晚我不想外出了。
He would rather not listen to jazz．他不愿意听爵士音乐。
(3)在表示“宁愿……而不愿……”时，要用would rather．．．than．．．这一结构，表示在两者之中进行选择。使用这一表达方式要注意用“平行结构”，即在than的前后要用两个同类的词或词组，如两个名词，两个动词不定式，两个介词词组等。
eg：I would rather have red apples than green ones．
我宁愿要红苹果，而不愿意要绿的。
I would rathdr listen to music than go swimming．
我宁愿听音乐，而不愿去游泳。
I would rather talk with her mother than with her father．
我宁愿同她母亲谈，而不愿同她父亲谈。
(4)would rather后接从句，通常用过去式表示虚拟语气。
eg：I'd much rather you told me the truth．我真宁愿你把真相告诉我。
I'd rather he had told me about it．我宁愿他告诉了我那件事。
一What would you like ，the bigger or the smaller?
一1 would rather the smaller．
A.choose；choose B. to choose；choose
C to choose；to choose D. choose；to choose
23．furniture
n. a11 those movable things such as chairs，beds，desks,etc
needed in a house，room，office，etc．(总称)家具；是不可数名词。 eg：a piece of furniture一件家具
two old pieces of furniture两件旧家具
We had little furniture．我们几乎没什么家具。
The old table was a very valuable piece of furniture．那张旧桌子是一件很值钱的家具。
He would like to buy some fashionable for his new flat.
A.furniture B. furnitures C.luggage D. luggages
24．roof[ru：f]．top covering of a building屋顶，顶部
eg：Don't climb onto the roof．不要爬上屋顶。
They can't live under the same roof．他们无法生活在同一个屋 。
【警示】roof的复数形式是roofs，而不是rooves(×)，类似的以“f”结尾的可数名询复数直接加s的词有以下几个：belief(信仰、信念)、chief(首领)、cliff(悬崖)、gulf (海湾)、proof(证据)、serf(农奴)
25.belong．be the property 0f属于，适合
eg：These books belong to me．这些书是我的。
That 1id belongs to this jar．那个盖子是配这个瓶子的。
I belong to the tenni’s club．我是这个网球俱乐部的人员。
【警示】该词不可用于进行时态，如不能说The car is belonging to my uncle．也不用于被动语态，后面的宾语常是名词或宾格代词，不能用名词性物主代词：“mine， yours，hers，his．．．”
belongings n．(使用复数)(个人的)所有物，财产，携带物品eg：
The tourists lost all their belongings in the hotel fire．
因旅馆失火，游客财物尽失。
26. pull down
(1)拉下(遮帘，帘子等)
eg：Shall I pull down the blinds?我可以放下百叶窗吗?
(2)拆毁，拆掉
eg：The old houses were being pulled down．那些旧房子正在拆除中。
(3)使……虚弱
eg：His long illness had pulled him down．他因长期患病身体虚弱。
【拓展】
① pull in拉近，(列车等)到达，进站
② ②pull off脱掉、取下
③ pull on穿上，戴上
④ ④pull OUt拔出，驶出，出站
⑤pull through渡过难关
⑥pull up使……停止
⑦pull up to／with追上，赶上
These houses are being pulled . A new building will be built there．
A．out B．0n C．down D．off
单项填空
1.He seems to like me but I can’t_______the sight of him．
A．take B．hold C．stand D．make
2.Did they Iive_____European style when they were in Japan?
A．in B．on C．with D．to
3.Will you drop in at my house this afternoon if_______?
A．it is convenient for you B．you are convenient
C．it is convenient of you D．you will be convenknt
4.she missed the plane，_____driving very fast to the air-port．
A．despite B．unless C．though D．without
5._____their country has plenty of oil，ours has none．
A．While B．When C．Before D．Where
6.They used to take their holidays in their own country
______foreign countries．
A．in favour of B．in preference to
C．in honour of D．in spite of
7.We saw the houses in the street____in order to make room for a large square．
A．puned off B．pulled up
C．pulled down D．pulled in
8.They hurried back home only to find their house______ into．
A．break B．to break
C．broken D．breaking
9. -Doesn’t Elaine want to see that movie?
-Yes，but she says____go tonight．
A．she’ll rather not B．she’d rather not
C．she’d not rather D．she won’t rather
10.The house has been standing_____without use for months．
A．empty B still C．quietly D．1onely
11.A nest is to a bird____a house is to a man．
A．where B．how C．what D．when
12.When he came to，he found himself____on a chair；
with his hands______back．
A．to sit；tied B．sitting；tying 。
C．sat；tied D．sitting tied
13.We do not feel______to enter modern buildings；every-thing about them seems unfriendly．
A．invited B．inviting C．to invite D．to be invited
14.I’m going to have my letters_____tomorrow if I’ve got them ready by then．
A．to type B．type C．typed D．typing
15.Every great Culture in the past had its own ideas of beauty___in art and literature．
A．expressed B．to express
C．being expressed D．to be expressed
短文改错
Late in the afternoon，the boys put up thek tent 1．____
in the middle of a field．As soon as this was done it， 2．____
they had cooked a meal over an open fire．They were 3．____
all ungry and the food smelt well．After a wonderful 4．____
meal，they said stories and sang songs by the camp 5. ____
fire．But some times later it began to rain．The boys 6．____
felt tired so they put out the fire and crept into his 7._____
tent．Their sleep-bags warm alld comfortable，so 8．_____
they all slept.sounldly．At the middle of the night， 9. _____
one of the boys woke up or began shouting，The tent 10._____
had been flooded!
答案：单项填空
1 C 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 B 7 C 8 C
9 B 10 A 11 C 12 D 13 A 14 C 15 A
短文改错
1.√ 2.去掉it 3.去掉had 4.well→good
5.said→told 6.times→time 7.his→their
8.warm前加were 9.At→In 10.or→and
知识与能力同步测控题
一、单项填空（共15小题；每小题1分）
1. A computer does only what thinking people __
A. have it do B. have it done
C. have clone it D. having it done
2. The lady said she would buy a gift for her daughter with the
A. 20 dollars remained B. 20 dollars remain
C. remained 20 dollars D. remaining 20 dollars
3.--What happened to Mr Smith early this morning?
--Oh,he was seen __ down and the driver __ away.
A. knock; drive B. knocking; driving
C. knocked; drove D, to knock; driven
4. After half a year's training, they were made entirely used __underwater again.
A. to stay B. to staying C. staying D. stay
5. Mr. Brown was much disappointed to see the washing machine she had had __ went wrong again.
A. it repaired B. to be repaired
C. repair D. repaired
6. I'd rather have a room of my own, however small it is, than______ a room with someone else.
A. share B. to share C. sharing D. to have shared_
7. _______ Lucy for example, she raised her voice so as to make____
A. Take ; herself heard B. Make; her hear
C. Put; herself heaving D. Follow; her heard
8. She was glad that her success would __ for the women who would follow.
A. make things easier B. be easier
C. make it easier D. be easier to make
9. The murderer was brought in, with his hands __ behind his back.
A. being tied B. having tied C. to be tied D. tied
10. --What do you think of your new roommate?
--I can't really_____ her, She's always making loud noises atmidnight. And when I remind her, she always makes rude
remarks.
A. put up with B. catch up with
C. come up with D. keep up with
11. We got lost in the dark forests.______ ,it began to rain.
A. Beside B. Besides C. Expect D. Though
12. He always did weU at school __ having to do part-time jobs every now and then.
A. in spite of B. instead
C. in case of D. in favor of
13. What a great weight the mother felt __ her mind the moment she found her lost son!
A.turned off B. taken off
C. set free D. brought into
14. I think she will____ a good monitor, so I'm going to vote for her.
A. remain B. grow C. turn D. make
15. With our life developing rapidly, people buy ____ to decorate their rooms.
A, a great many furniture B. a lot of furnitures
C. a large number of furitures D. plenty of furniture
二．完形填空（共20小题，每小题1.5分，满分30分）
Building a house costs quite a lot of money. Your first __16___
will be to find a 17 piece of land. Your 18 will depend on many different things. You will probably try to find a sunny place,with 19 surroundings near shops and bus stops, not too farfrom your friends and the place where you work.
20 you will find an excellent 21 , and together with the builder you will work out a 22 . The builder will draw theplan. It will 23 the number of rooms, their position and
24 , and other 25 which must be noticed, 26
windows, doors, and electric outlets. The builder will work out how much money is 27 to build your house. He will work out the 28 of the wood, bricks, the glass, and 29 else that must be used in building the house. Later on, when he starts to build, this estimate mustbe corrected and revised. His estimate is based on 30 price, but prices of such things may change, and many other things may happen 31 the time when he makes the 32 and the time when he builds the house.
When the builder gives his estimate, you may wish to change
your plan. You may also wish to change your builder, if his estimate is too 33 ! You may find that some of the features you wanted at first cost too much, or that you can spend a little more and 34 something to your plan. The builder's estimate depends on the plan, 35 the final plan depends on the builder's estimate.
16. A. step B. plan C. way D. idea
17. A. small B. large C. right D. exact
18. A. land B. choice C. house D. preference
19. A. quiet B. pleased C. lonely D. pleasant
20. A. Yet B. Next C. However D. Though
21. A. worker B. engineer C. builder D. drawer
22. A. plan B. cost C. suggestion D. price
23. A. appear B. design C. show D. recite
24. A. height B. width C. length D. size
25. A. rooms B. doors C. parts D. roofs
26. A. for example B. such as
C. in other words D. on the other hand
27. A. needed B. spent C: collected D. taken
28. A. numbers B. amount C. cost D. level
29. A. something B. everything C. whatever D. others
30. A. rising B. falling C. existing D. remaining
31. A. by B. in C.among D. between
32. A. plans B. design C. estimate D. cost
33. A. expensive B. high C. cheap D. low
34. A. reduce B. place C. add D. lay
35. A. but B. so C. and D. then
三．阅读理解（共20小题，每 题2分，满分40分）
A
In the late 1960's,many people in North America turned their attention to environmental problems, and new steel-and-glass skyscrapers were widely criticized. Ecologists pointed out that a forest of tall buildings in a city often overburdens public transportation and parking lots.
Skyscrapers are also consumers and wasters of electric power.In one recent year, the addition of 17 million square feet of skyscrapers office space in New York City raised the peak daily demand for electricity by 120,000 kilowatts--enough to supply the entire city of Albany, New York, for a day.
Glass-walled skyscrapers can be especially wasteful. The heat loss ( or gain) through a wall of half-inch plate glass is more than ten times that through a typical brick wall filled with insulation (绝缘) board. To lessen the strain on heating and air-conditioning equipment,builders of skyscrapers have begun to use double-glazed panels of glass, and reflective glasses coated with silver or gold mirror films that reduce glare(眩目的光) as well as heat gain.
However, mirror-walled skyscrapers raise the temperature ofthe surrounding air and affect neighboring buildings.
Skyscrapers put a strain on a city's sanitation facilities(卫生设备),too. If fully occupied,the two World Trade Center towers in New York City would alone produce 2.25 million gallons of wastes each year-as much a city the size of Stanford, Connecticut, which has a population of more than 109,000.
Skyscrapers also affect television reception,block bird flyways and air traffic, In Boston in the late 1960's, some people even feared that shadows from skyscrapers would kill the grass on Boston Common. Still ,people continue to build skyscrapers for all the reasons that they have always built them-personal pride and the desire of owners to have the largest possible amount of space to rent.
36. The main purpose of the passage is to __
A. compare skyscrapers with other modern structures
B. describe some architectural designs of skyscrapers
C. describe skyscrapers and their effect on the environment
D. encourage using bricks in the construction of skyscrapers
37. According to the passage, what is one disadvantage of skyscrapers that have mirrored walls?
A. The surrounding air is heated.
B. Construction time is increased.
C. The windows must be cleaned daily.
D. Extra air-conditioning equipment is needed.
38. According to the passage, in the late 1960's some residents of Boston were concerned with which aspect of skyscrapers?
A. The noise from their construction.
B. The high cost of renting an office.
C. The harmful effects on the city's grass.
D. The removal of trees from building sites.
39. The author raises problems that would most concern which of the following groups?
A. Pilots . B. Electricians.
C. Environmentalists. D. Construction workers
B
Art museums are places where people can learn about various cultures. The increasingly popular “ design museums”that are opening today, however, perform quite a different role. Unlike most art museums, the design museum shows objects that are easilyfound by the general public. These museums sometimes even placethings like fridges and washing machines in the center of the hall.
People have argued that design museums are often made useof as advertisements for new industrial technology. But their role is not simply a matter of sales--it is the honoring of excellently invented products. The difference between the window of a department store and the showcase in a design museum is that the first tries to sell you something, while the second tells you the success of a sale.
One advantage of design museums is that they are places where people feel familiar with the exhibits. Unlike the average art museum visitors, design museum visitors seldom feel frightened or puzzled. This is partly because design museums clearly show how and why mass-preduced products work and look as they do, and how design has improved the quality of our lives. Art museum exhibits, on the other hand, would most probably fill visitors with a feeling that there is something beyond their understanding.
In recent years, several new design museums have opened their doors. Each of these museums has tried to satisfy the public's growing interest in the field with new ideas. London's Design Museum,for example, shows a collection of mass-produced objects from Zippo lighters to electric typewriters to a group of Italian fish-tins. The choices open to design museums seem far less strict than those to art museums, and visitors may also sense the humorous part of our society while walking around such exhibits as interesting and unusually attractive toys collected in our everyday life.
40. Showcases in design museums are different from store windows because they __
A. show more technologic~Llly advanced products
B. help increase the sales of products
C. show why the products have sold well
D. attract more people than store windows do
41. The author believes that most design museum visitors.
A. do not admire maes-preduced products
B. are puzzled with technological exhibits
C. dislike exhibits in art museums
D. know the exhibits very well
42. The choices open to design museums __
A. are not as strict as those to art museums
B. are not aimed to interest the public
C. may fail to bring some pleasure to visitors
D. often contain precious exhibits
43. The best title for this passage is .
A.The Forms of Design Museums
B.The Exhibits of Design Museums
C.The Nature of Design Museums
D.The Choice Open of Design Museums
C
CAIRO--After nearly a decade 0f planning , the Egyptian Government has announced an ambitious plan t0 build the world the biggest museum devoted entirelyto exhibitingthe ancient relics(遗物)．Called the New Egyptian Museum，it will eventually housethe largest collection 0f pharaonic(法老的)monuments，including the solid gold death musk of Tutankhamun．King Nebkheperura TutankhalTlun remains the most famous ofallthe Pharaohs 0f Ancient Egypt．He lived over 3，300 years ag0 during the period known as the New Kingdom．The museum will als0 house more than 120，000 antiquities (古代艺术品)from the 4th milknnium(1，000 years)Bc to the fall 0f the Roman Empire．
For the first time．the entire 3，500 items from Tutankhamun’sTomb will be disDlayed．Permanent exhibitions will include the royal mummies of Ramses Ⅱand Ⅲand other pharaohs and a largequantitv 0f collection of Pharaonic jewellery．
Antiquities wiU be 0rganized by the theme rather thanchronogically(编年地)．The four main themes will be：the 1and of EgYPt；royalty and the state；arts of life and death；and scribes(文牍)and wisdom．With building costs estimated near US$31 1 mimon，funding forthe new museum’viU Come from corporate sponsorship(资助)and charitable(慈善的)donations．The Egyptian Government isexpected to pay one tlliId 0f the final bill．
44．Wh0 has planned t0 build the wodd’s biggest museum?
A．The EgYPtian Government．
B．A corporate body．
C．The charitable body．
D．The EgYPtian Government and a corporate body．
45．When you go into one exhibiting hall 0f the wouldbe museum，you’ll see
A．all the exhibits are arranged bythe year
B．all the exhibits are arranged by the theme
C．more than 120，000 Egyptian antiquities are on show
D．Pharaonic monuments of Tutankhamun and the royal relics
46．According to the passage，---
A. the most valuable relics that are to be displayed are 120，000 antiquities from t11e 4th miueBBiuin BC
B．3．500 items 0f relics have been discovered from Tmankhamun's
tomb
C．the Pharaonic monuments ofTutankhamun arethe oldest relics
D．the royal mummies 0f RamsesⅡand Ⅲand 0ther pharaohs
Will be displayed for the second time
47．The best title for the passage should be“--”．
A．Egypt’s AmbitiOUS Plan
B．The Wodd’s Biggest Museum for tlle Ancient Relics
C．EgYPt to Construct New Museum
D．Ancient Egyptian Relics Are to Be Displayed
D
Experts have put forward detailed plans for a tunnel to join Taiwan with the Chinese mainland．
The shortest proposed route wonld be 126 kilometers-more than twice the length 0f the Endish Channel Tunnel．And the longest proposed route would be 207 kilometers．
A recent conference in xiamen，Fujian Province brought together more than 70 experts．The event was co一sponsored(共同发起)by universities from Taiwan and the Chinese mainland．Fujian is the province where both proposed mutes would begin．
There is no direct passenger access(通道)between the mainland and Taiwan by air or sea at the moment．
Experts say that it is better to start research sooner rather than later，althongh there is a lack 0f government funding(资金)．There are no technical problems t0 build a Taiwan tunnel．But it will require an improved political relationship across the Straits．
A professor 0f TsinghHa University said，“A special feature 0f huge projects is that the period of preparation is longer than the period 0f construction．”
For example，he said，the Endish channel Tunnel took 14 years 0f planning and had been discussed for two centuTies．And
preparations for the huge Three Corges(三峡)dam on the Yangze River began in the 1950s．
The xiamen conference focused on the longest southern route，which would use the Taiwan-controlled islands of Jinmen and Penghu as stepping_stones.
The first stage 0f the new project could be a bridge to cross the five kilometers between Xiamen and Jinmen．This would mean that traveling from Xiamen to Jinmen by car would only take five minutes．
The longest tunnel now being planned anywhere in the world is the 54-kilometer land tunnel to link Lyon in France with Turin in Italy．The tunnel will not be completed until -．
48．Which is the longest tunnel in the world at present?
A．The Endish Channel Tunnel．
B．The tunnel between Lyon and Turin．
C．The Taiwan straits tunnel_
D．The passage does’t mention it．
49．The example of English Channel Tunnel shows--．
A．it’s important to complete a huge project
B．there are many problems to be solved before doing somethihg
C．discussions among countries usually take a lot 0f time
D．the preparation takes 1onger time than the construction
50．Which oftlle following is NOT true?
A．Universities both at_home and abroad have sponsored(赞助)the plan．
B.If the project is completed，the world's longest tunnel willappear． ．
C．You can't reach Taiwan from the mainland directly atPresent.
D．The starting point of the proposed tunnel is in Fujian．
51．What is the possible difficulty in carrying out the plan?
A．The 1ack 0f money for the project from the government．
B．Improving the relationship between Taiwan and the mainland．
C．The detailed plans for the tunnel．
D．The technical problems with the tunnel．
E
SHANGHAI--The Shanghai World Financial Centre will be
the tallest land-mark in the world after its completion this century in Pudong, according to the project's Japanese investors.
The building will be located in the prime Lujiazui Zone in
Pudong , on a 30,000-square-metre site. The building was originally designed to be a 94-floor office tower with a height of 460 metres.
The project broke ground in but was later halted as a
result of the financial crisis in Southeast Asia.
“As the economy warms up, we are more confident about
Shanghai and the whole China and we are working hard to get the
Project restarted as soon as possible,” said Katsuyuki Takeuchi,
vice-president and general manager of the Shanghai World
Financial Centre Company.
Its parent company, Japan-based Moil Building Co. Ltd,
established the Shanghai subsidiary as the opreator responsible for this ambitious project. The design, which is undergoing revision in apan, will accommodate international high-tech businesses,
department stores, art galleries, clubs and a five-star hotel. Unlike the gloomy economies of the United States, Europe and Japan, China enjoys a strong growth with brighter prospects, Takeuchi said.
More capital and businesses are expected to flow into
Shanghai, which aims to become a world centre for trade and the
financial industry--with Lujiazui as its showpiece.
The layout of Luijiazui includes three tall buildings, one of
which is the completed Jinmao Tower, each rising above 400
metres, as designed by local government after holding an international design competition early last decade.
Other buildings nearby fall in height gradually, creating a
special shape against the skyline. The Shanghai World Financial
Centre will be built as the peak of the mountain.
“The peak will be safe thanks to the perfect design,advanced
technology and the stable social and political environment in
Shanghai,” Takeuchi said, reassuring those who might be anxious
about the safety of the soon-to-be world's tallest building.
52. Why is the Shanghai World Financial Center to be built? :
A. Because it is by the bank of the Changjiang River.
B. Because it is going to be the highest building in China.
C. Because the economy of China is of a better future than of other countries.
D. Because the builders in Shanghai could be sure of the quality of the building.
53. Seen from a long distance,the Lujiazui Zone looks like a(an)
A. apple B. mountain C. box D. basin
54. Why will the Shanghai World Financial Center be of great safety?
A. Because it will be the peak of a mountain.
B. Because its design and technology are of the top levels.
C. In Shanghai there is a stable social and political environment.
D.B and C.
55. Which of the following has the same meaning as the sentence“... reassuring those who might be anxious about the safety of the soon-to-be world's tallest building”
A. Comfort the people so that they won't worry about the safetyof the peak.
B. Tell the people the tallest building will be finished soon.
C. Advise people not to be anxious about the building until it is finished.
D. Make sure that the building will be built in Shanghai.
短文改错（满分10分）
The Great Wall of China is being called“the
56.
Ten-Thousand-Li Great Wall”in Chinese. It has the history of
57.
over twenty centuries. Parts of it were built through different 58.
dynasties. It was during the Qin Dynasty when the parts were 59.
joined up into one long wall. It's very difficult build such 60.
a long wall in the ancient days without some modern machines. 61.
All the work were done by hand. Thousands of men died 62.
of cold and hungry when they were forced to work on the 63.
wall. Today the Great Wall has become a place of interesting 64.
to the Chinese and to the people in all over the world~ 65.
书面表达（满分25分）
请你根据以吓图表和提示写一篇关于我国手机拥有量变化的报道，并阐述手机给人们生活带来利与弊。
1。方便
2． 随时，随地联系；
3． 许多功能满足不同要求。如发短信，上网等；
4． 接到打错的电话并为之付费；
5． 电磁辅射（radiation）有害健康。
注意：1。词数100左右；2。开头已写好
As can be seen from the chart...
Unit3 知识与能力同步测控题
1．A it指代计算机；人们让计算机做事情，所以d0的逻辑主 语就是计算机(it)，那魔作为宾语补足语的形式用动词原形 即可。 ’
2．D本句含“with+宾语+宾补”句型，因为一remain为不及物。
动词，所以没有过去分词形式作宾补及定语用法，所以表示“剩 下的”时，用remaining即可。
3．C Mr!Smith是被人看到被车撞倒，所以作宾补的应是过去分词形式。后一分句由and连接，独立成句，所缺成分作谓 语动词。
4．B be used to doing sth．表示“习惯于做某事”，当它作宾语 补足语时．be动词去掉即可。、
5．D“she had”作定语从句，修饰“洗衣机”；洗衣机是让别人修理，所以应用被动语态作宾补。
6．A 中包含句型would rather do sth than do sthl．。
7．A表示“举例子”用take…for example；第二空表示Lucy 提高嗓音以便让她自己被别人听见。
8．A若选B、D则成了“成功是较容易”，不符合题意。it一般要代替不定式，但本题中无不定式。who引导的定语从句只修饰women，而for the women作本句的状语，所以只能选意义完整的A项作为答案。
9．D该结构的难点在于应用哪一种形式作宾补。本题中的 “小偷被带来了，他的双手是被人绑在身后”，所以应用过去分词形式作宾补。
lO．A catch up witll表示“跟上；赶上”，come up with表示“提出”，keep up with表示“跟上”，均不符合语境体现出来的 “我的确容忍不了她”。
11．B从句意及用法看，后者表示的是递进关系，所以用副词 besides .
12．A “did well”与后半句的“不时地做兼职工作”之间是让步关系。
13．B turn 0ff表示“关闭；使人厌倦”，set free表示“释放”，bring into表示“使进入某种状态”。语境表示“当她见到失踪的儿子时候，心头多么大的负担被卸掉了啊!” feel a great weight taken off是其正常语序。
14．D当表示“有条件成为……(人或物)”时，用make表示。 又如：She will mke a good wife．她将会成为一位好妻子。
15．D fumiture表示家具的总称，是个不可数名词，不可由a great many，a number of等词修饰，也无复数形式。
16．A此处指建房的第一步(step)是选择一块合适的土地。
17．C此处指建房选择土地。不是选大、小土地，而是选合适的土地。 。
18．B “选址”这个选择取决于很多东西。
19. D 一般要选择阳光充足，周围环境优美的地方。
20．B 现在指下一步该干什么。
21. C 就在此空后面有the builder，所以本空指选一个好的建筑师。
22．A 从下文the builder will draw the plan可知。
23．C it指代建筑图纸，它的上面是标明了各自的位置。
24．D 图纸上标的是房间数、房间的大小及位置等。
25．C 一座房子不仅仅只有房间，还有其他的部分。
26．B 这些部分比如说(such as)，有门、窗、电线等部分。举出部分例子用such as。
27．A 此处指建筑师也会帮你算出建房要多少钱。
28．C 这些材料得花费多少钱。
29．B 指其他的建房需要的一切。
30．C 此时的预算只是依当时存在的价钱算的，所以在以后的日子会有浮动。
31．D 由下文的the time…与the time…可知指两段时间之间。
32．C指作预算的时间与做房子时的两个时间。
33．B 当然指价钱要得太高的话，你可能换个建筑师。
34．C add．．．t0为习语，表示“把……添加到……上去”。
35. A 两句话(建筑师的估计取决于计划、计划取决于建筑师的估计)之间存在对比转折关系。
36．C本文主要记叙摩天大楼及其对环境的影响。
37．A 从第三段最后一句话中的raise the temperature可以推出。
38．C本题是个细节理解题。从第五段最后一句话可知。
39．C从36题可知，摩天大楼对环境产生极大的影响，因为与此最相关的人当然是环境学家了。
40．C从第二段内容可知。
41．D普通博物馆似乎拒人于千里之外，但大多数参观“设计博物馆”的人十分喜欢这种形式，那么对展品就不太陌生,甚至很了解了。
42．A见最后一段第三句话。
43．C nature此处指“本性、特征”。而不是指自然。因此“设计博物馆的特性”便是最好的标题了。
44．A答案可以从第一段知道。
45．B倒数第二段第一句提供了答案。
46．B见第五段内容。其余三个选项均与文中事实不符。
47．C第一段告诉读者，埃及政府经过多年的筹划，现在宣布将建造世界上最大的古文物博物馆。随后讲了该博物馆的作用、特点以及筹款方式等。所以C项才能恰当地反映文章主题。
48．D 题目的意思是指现在世界上最长的已经建成的隧道。英吉利海峡隧道并没有在文章中提到是否是最长的；根据文章的最后一段，法国到意大利的海峡隧道还未建成；台湾海峡隧道虽是文章介绍的主题，但还在计划之中，所以文章没有告诉我们答案。
49．D 英吉利海峡隧道的例子在第八段，主要是为了证明第七段的观点。
50．A文章只提到计划是台湾和大陆的大学发起，没有提到国外的大学，故A项不对；B项不能只看文章最后一段提到法国至意大利的海峡隧道是最长的，而the project(台湾海峡隧道)比它要长的多；c项在第五段提到；D项在第四段提到。
51．B 从第六段的But it will require and improved political relationship across the Straits．中”require(需要)”，说明这方面还是障碍；虽然第六段中提到A项，但句中用了although(尽管)这个词，可见资金方面不是主要问题；c项是文章一开始就说明已经完成的事项；D项从第六段There are no technical problems to build a Taiwan tunnel．得知，也是不成问题的。
52．c由第五段可知，与日本、美国、欧洲等相比，中国经济发展的潜力更大。
53．B由倒数第二段可知，陆家嘴金融区分三部分，中间高，四周低，nearby，gradually，in the middle是关键词。
54．D最后一段可知，在上海建造世界金融中心，有三个有利因素：完美的设计；先进的技术；安定的社会环境。
55．A在所给的四个选项中，唯有comfort与reassure(打消……的疑虑)最接近，其他三项均与文意不符。
56．去掉being 。is being called是现在进行时态的被动语态。此处应该用一般现在时。is called表示“被称为……”。
57．the改为a 。have a history of…为固定用法。
58．√。
59．when改为that。此处是强调句型。
60．在build前面加to。It is+adj．+to do sth．结构中，it为形式主语。动词不定式是真正的主语。
61．some改为any。without表示否定意义。
62．were改为was。work为不可数名词，谓语动词用单数形式。
63．hungry改为hunger。die 0f cold and hunger：死于寒冷和饥饿．。
64．interesting改为interest。习惯用法。a place 0f interest：名胜。风景。
65．in改为from。表示“来自世界各地”。应用介词from。
书面表达One possible version：
As can be seen from the chart，great changes have been taking place in the ownership 0f mobile phones in China．At the end of ，there were 20 million mobile users．By the year ，the number will reach up to 30 million．People have found mobile phones very convenient．they Can get in touch with each other whenver and wherever they like．There are many different functions for different needs．Such as sending short messages and surfing the Internet．However，it may also bring
us some trouble．For example．You will have to pay for a wrong number，and the radiation from the phone may do harm to our health．In spite of this，the number of people having mobile phones is still increasing steadily．
篇17：初三英语人教版教案（全套）Unit 1 In the library(新课标版九年级英语教案教学设计)
Teaching aims and demands
1. words
CD player several shelf already used to on knowledge yard schoolyard put (sth) down step librarian probably pay pay for sadly come up with mark bookmark think of encourage get…back pick up once abroad copy as
2. Useful expressions
I have got a book.
Excuse me. Have you got…?
Yes, I have . / Sorry . No , I haven’t.
You are welcome.
Have you ever done…? Yes , I have, once ./ No, never.
I’ve just done…
3. Grammar
The Present Perfect Tense (1) 现在完成时态（一）
现在完成时由“助动词have (has) +过去分词“构成。陈述句形式、疑问句形式和简略答语。动词的过去适和过去分词（规则形式和不规则形式）
Lesson1
Step 1 Revision
1、由于这是本单元的第一课，也是学生第一天来到学校，请对学生说“Welcome back”
2、复习过去时并让学生习惯地在活动中说英文，教师知道说：Tell your partner what you did this summer.
3、Revise “Do you have…?”通过向学生提问得出他们的答案如; ( pencil , pen, eraser, etc. ).并使用常用形式“Do you have any…？” 所以学生也会练习使用any 和some
Step 2 Presentation
告诉学生，我们将要学习一种新的表达Do you have…?的方式，让学生仔细听Have you got a pencil? Yes, I’ve got one. 解释说I’ve got =I have got 并解释one的意思在这里就是 a pencil。然后给学生句例子听对话。
Teacher:（举起一支铅笔）
Group A: Have you got a pencil ?
Teacher；（点头）
Group B: Yes, I’ve got one .
.Teacher: （举起一本书）
Group A：Have you got a book?
Teacher: （摇头）
Group B； Sorry , I haven’t got one.
向学生解释Haven’t=have not。让学生给出示例，说明 any/some 的用法。用同样的方法进行练习。
Step 3 Read and Act
学生书第一页第一部分，与全班学生一起练习对话，然后让他们两人一组练习。看看他们能否编写自己的对话进行表演。看学生能否猜出CD player 的意思。
Step 4 Exerceses
学生用书第一页第二部分，读一遍对话给学生听并让他们重复。看是否猜出生词several 和shelf的意思。然后让学生根据对话分角色表演，一个学生演图书管理员，另一个学生表演在找书。告诉学生除了方框里的替换词以外，他们还可以增加一些其他词。
做练习册第1课练习2。
Step5
把Have you got a book?这个句子写在黑板上。指出完成时态的组成形式(have+past participle)。向学生解释每一个动词都有一个过去分词形式。一般来说，动词的过去分词形式与过去式形式是一样的，但不都是一样，也有一些不规则形式。向学生解释，这个时态是用来表示过去或不久以前发生的动作，而产生的形态仍然存在。如：把你的笔掉在地上，教师说I have dropped my pen. You can see the pen on the door .打开门I have opened the door. Now the door is open , 等等。
用一本化学书或物理书，把它放在你的书桌上的英语书下面。接着你假装找这本书，说：Oh, where is my science book? I have lost my science. I can’t find it. Have you seen it, Wang Wei ?这个学生找到了这本书并把它递给了你。你可以说Thanks a lot. Now Wang Wei has found the book. I have got it back.
Step6 Read and act.
学生用书第一页第三部分。口语录音带第一课。把下列句子写在黑板上：
I have lost my science book.
Have you seen it?
He has found the book..
在lost、seen和found下面画线，看看学生能否猜出这些词来自哪些动词不定式。 让学生默读对话，试着找出现在完成时态的例句。让两个学生给全班表演第3部分里的第一个对话。
A:（四处查看教室）Hi, Bob! I can’t find my history book. Have you seen it anywhere?
B:Yes,…（指着书桌）Look at that book on the desk .
A:（拿起这本书）Oh, yes, it’s mine! Thanks a lot.
这几句话将帮助学生理解书中对话的意思。现在放录音让学生听并让他们重复。学生两人一组练习对话。让一些学生表演对话。看看学生用其他学习用具能否编写他们自己的对话。
Step7
练习册第1课联系1可以与全班一起完成。
练习4是选做题。
家庭作业：
完成练习册里的练习。
学习练习三里的动词形式。
把练习2做在练习本里。
复习学生用书第1课第3部分里的对话。
Lesson2
Step1
1 检查家庭作业。复习现在完成时态，方法是让学生两人一组活动，让他们用Have you got…即Have you got an eraser? Have you got any pens?等句型，要每个学生说出学习用具。
2 复习学生用书第1页第3部分里的对话。
Step2
学生用书第2页第1部分。让学生两人一组讨论这个问题。然后问 What kinds of books do you like to read?进行一次非正式调查，看看有多少学生喜欢读英语书和历史书。
Step3 Read
学生用书第2页第2部分，口语录音带第2课。把书合起来，让学生听故事大意(Grandma keeps losing library books)。把书打开，再放一遍录音，让学生边听边读。看看学生能否猜出一些生词的意思，让他们使用上下句子的信息来帮助他们。接着教学生仍然不理解的生词和短语：aleady , used to , hobby , knowledge, yard, put down, librarian, pay, sadly, come up with 和bookmark。
向学生解释，schoolyard 是校园里建筑物周围的一个区域，孩子们在这里可以玩耍。操场上可能有也可能没有草地。里面常常有树和树下可以坐的地方。
向学生解释 knowledge一词含有know在里边。这可以帮助学生理解这个词的意思。
告诉学生used to do something的意思是，过去经常发生的事情，但现在已经不存在了。
Step4 Exercise
教师说 Reading is one kind of hobby. What other kinds of things are hobbies?让学生自由讨论找到答案。让学生给出他们的答案，把答案写在黑板上。例如：hiking, biking, painting, travelling, collecting things, bird watching, 等等。让学生两人一组相互谈一谈他们的业余爱好。教师在教室内巡视并给他们必要的帮助。
Step5
做练习册第2课练习2和3。关于这两个练习，学生可以两人一组做。至于练习3，问一问学生他们是否已经发现了某些有趣的现象并要告诉全班学生。
注释：
在左边方框里的动词是规则动词，其余动词是不规则动词。然而你可以从这4个栏目里发现一些有趣现象。在第一个栏目里这些动词的过去式和过去分词的形式是不同的，例如 go-went-gone。在第2栏里，每一个动词的过去式和过去分词，其形式是一样的，如 bring-brought-brought。在第3栏里，所有的动词都不改变它们原来的形式，如put-put-put。在第4栏里，动词的过去分词和动词不定式的形式是一样的，如come-come-come。你可以简单的按照ABC/ABB/AAA/ABA的形式来描述这4类动词形式的变化。
首先两人一组做练习3，然后叫几组学生朗读他们的对话。
家庭作业：
把练习2写在练习本里。
复习生词和短语。
Lesson 3
步骤1 复习
1 检查家庭作业。
2 让学生复述学生用书第2页上的故事。通过问一些指导性的问题来帮助学生复述课文，如问：Who is the story about？Why does she often go to the library？等等。
步骤2 读
学生用书的第3页第1部分。口语录音带第3课。谈一谈书上的插图：Who can you see？What’s happening?等。放录音让学生听并让他们跟着重复，注意他们的语调。解释单词和短语think of，encourage和pick up的意思。
步骤3 表演
让学生以3人小组的形式表演这个故事。一个学生表演图书管理员，一个学生表演祖母，另一个学生表演孙子或孙女。让一组学生在全班面前表演。力求使学生通过动作、手势把故事演得生动有趣。
步骤4 练习
作练习册第3课练习2。让学生两人一组表演他们的对话。然后让几组学生与全班一起表演对话。
步骤5 介绍新语言项目
把下列练习介绍给学生：
A：Have you ever travelled to Hangzhou？
B：Yes，I have.I went there in 1999.
A：Have you ever travelled to Wuhan？
B：No，I haven’t.But I’d like to go someday.
与学生一起练习这个对话。让他们用真实的情况回答问题。文一些不同的地区。
让学生两人一组相互问一些一般性的问题，如：Have you ever seen elephants？Have you ever made jiaozi？等等。
步骤6 问，答
学生用书第3页第2部分。过一遍方格里的语言内容。向学生指出这些问题可以有不同的回答。教学生词once和abroad。提问一两个问题。让一些学生把它做示范表演进行问答练习。然后让他们两人一组进行练习。最后看一看谁能编写他们自己的问题。
步骤7 练习
学生用书第3页第3部分。教学生词copy。与学生一起练习对话，练习Really？I did that hours ago.这个句子的语调，务必使学生在说really时用升调，学生在说单词hours时要重读以表示强调。然后让学生两人一组进行活动。
步骤8 练习册
做练习册第3课练习1和3。练习1应两人一组做。让几组学生给出他们的答案。练习3可以个别做。与全班一起核对答案。
家庭作业：
从练习1里写出4个答案在练习本里。
把练习3里的对话写在练习本里。
Lesson 4
步骤1 复习
1 把书合起来。问一些练习第3课练习2里的问题。
2 复习句子结构Have you ever…及其意思。让一些学生在编一些问题。
步骤2 听
学生用书第4页第1部分。听力训练录音带第4课。做练习册第4课练习1。务必使学生清楚做什么。从头到尾放一遍录音，给学生几分钟时间让他们标出房间（rooms）并回答问题。然后再放一遍录音，在听到重要的信息后停放一下。让学生两人一组核对答案，然后全班一起核对答案。如果学生还有争论的话，再放一遍录音。
听力课文：
Last Sunday my cousin took me to the library at his college .It was a huge one with thousands of books .I didn’t know how to find a book ,so I went to the information desk.
LIBRARIAN：May I help you?
STUDENT：Yes ,please. I’ve never been here before, so I don’t know how to find a book .
LIBRARIAN：Ok. Look at the map. Here is the information desk where we are. To the left is the First Reading Room. You can find a lot of interesting books about animals there. Next to it is the Second Reading Room. It has storybooks of all kinds. If you are interested in science books, you can go to the Third Reading Room. It’s to the right of the information desk. And to the right of the restrooms is the Fourth Reading Room. You can read newspapers and magazines there.
STUDENT：Oh, there are so many books here. Can I use a computer to search for a book?
LIBRARIAN：Sure. We have a computer room near the stairway. And what’s more, there’s a copying room to the left of it. You can copy some pages you think useful.
STUDENT：Can I borrow books from here?
LIBRARIAN：The borrowing section is on the second floor. But you must have a library card to enter.
STUDENT：Oh well, I have to read on the first floor. Anyway, thank you.
LIBRARIAN：You’re welcome.
答案：
The rooms talked about are：The First，Second，Third and Four Reading Rooms，the Computer Room and the Copy Room.
1. First Reading Room.
2. Third Reading Room.
步骤3 写
学生用书第4页第2部分。这一部分需要提前一星期进行。问一问学校图书管理员，如果学生对他/她进行采访是否可以。然后这一课期间要分配任务，以便学生能及时把采访结果向全班汇报。让学生一小组形式比较他们的答案。然后让几组学生与全班一起给出他们的答案。
步骤4 单词重音
做练习册第4课练习2。教师念一个词，然后让学生重复。在念这个词时，要尽可能地念得自然，不要过分重读这个词。要注意学生的重音。
步骤5 朗读，表演
学生用书第4页第3部分。让学生两人一组读对话。可以鼓励学生用录音带换成另外一些内容或者在对话里增加一些你自己的话。然后让几组学生为全班表演对话。
步骤6 看，学
学生用书第4-5页第3部分。与学生一起读一遍卡片和电脑上的内容。向学生指出这两样东西所展示的内容的差异。教学生词screen，然后把学生带到图书馆。在那里他们可以把实际的图书馆资料卡片上的内容抄到练习本上。
注释：
在西方国家的许多图书馆里，卡片对话已经不再使用了。几乎所有的“card dialogue”都录在电脑里。大多数图书馆也都有可以用来在互联网上查找信息的电脑。这是一种免费服务，任何人都可以自由查询。
步骤7 小诗
学生用书第5页第5部分。口语录音带第5部分。放录音让学生听并让他们重复。教学生词spoil。让学生练习小诗。让一些学生为全班读一读这首小诗。
步骤8 复习要点1
过一遍复习要点1。复习现在完成时态。让学生问问你他们在本单元还有什么疑难问题。练习说日常用语。
步骤9 测试
动词形式测试。让学生画3个以Verb，Past Tense和Past Participle开头的栏目表。听写下列动词，让学生把这些动词写在第一个表里。他们必须填写另外两个表，例如，你说“ask”，学生写ask，asked，asked。
1 pay 2 travel 3 eat 4 lose 5 find
6 see 7 do 8 return 9 forget 10 come
现在让学生运用现在完成时态为其中5个动词编一个两行对话。
步骤10 练习册
做练习册第4课练习3-7。两人一组做练习3。练习4应首先个别做，然后与全班一起核对答案。练习5 可以两人一组做。练习6可以4人小组的形式做。至于练习7，可以首先让学生读故事下边的几个问题，然后让他们快速度一遍找出答案。与全班一起核对答案。如果时间允许，让学生把它看作一个剧本来读这个故事。
练习8是选做题，可以把它作为一个任务，两人一组来完成。
家庭作业：
完成练习册里的练习。
把练习6写在练习本里。
让学生读和学习学生用书后面不规则动词表里的动词形式。
文档为doc格式
